Appendix C—GPIB Quick Reference

Operation and Remote Programming Manual
ML2437A / ML2438A
Power Meter
Anritsu Company
490 Jarvis Drive
Morgan Hill, CA 95037-2809
USA
http://www.anritsu.com
Part Number: 10585-00001
Revision: P
Published: October 2017
Copyright 2017 Anritsu Company
Table of Contents
Chapter 1—General Information
1-1
About this Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1-2
Associated Documentation and Software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1-3
Identification Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1-4
Available Models. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1-5
Available Options, Accessories, and Power Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Chapter 2—Installation
2-1
Initial Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2-2
Sensor Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2-3
Power Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
AC Line Power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
DC Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Battery Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Fuses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2-4
Environmental Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2-5
Rack Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2-6
Battery Charging, Removal and Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2-7
Storage and Shipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Preparation for Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Environmental Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2-8
Preparing for Shipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Chapter 3—Memory and Security Considerations
3-1
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Internal Flash Memory (8 MB EEPROM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
RAM Memory used by the DSP microcomputer (640 KB). . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
RAM Memory as non-volatile RAM (1 MB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3-2
Secure Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3-3
Clearing the Non-Volatile Static RAM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3-4
Anritsu Power Sensors EEPROM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
EEPROM Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
Contents-1
Table of Contents (Continued)
Chapter 4—Connections
4-1
Front Panel Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Calibrator Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Sensor A Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Sensor B Connector (ML2438A only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
4-2
Rear Panel Connectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Chapter 5—Front Panel Operation
5-1
Front Panel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
5-2
Power-On Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
5-3
Sensor Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Calfactor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Averaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Duty cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Rng Hold [RGH]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
5-4
Channel Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Rel 1 [REL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Rel 2 [REL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
5-5
Trigger Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
5-6
System Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Power vs. Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Source Sweep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
Print [PRINT] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
Secure [SECURE] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
Identity [*IDN, OI] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
Contents-2
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
Table of Contents (Continued)
5-7
Cal/Zero Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38
Zero/Cal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38
Cal 0 dBm [CAL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38
Zero [ZERO] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38
RF ON/OFF [RFCAL] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38
Ext V [VZERO] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38
Chapter 6—Procedures
6-1
Power Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
6-2
Zeroing the Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
6-3
Sensor Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
6-4
Sensor Zero/Cal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
6-5
Performance Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
6-6
Printer Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
6-7
GPIB Remote Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
6-8
Serial Remote Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
6-9
RS232 Modem Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
6-10 Profile Operation Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Typical Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
Scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Cursor Readout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
Triggered Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Control of x-axis - Width of Profile - Sample Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Advanced Triggering and Setup Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
6-11 Source Sweep Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Frequency Sweep Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Power Sweep Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Source Sweep Graph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Using an Anritsu Synthesizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
6-12 Power vs. Time Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
6-13 User Cal Factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
Example Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Readout Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
6-14 Optimizing Readings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
DISP ON/OFF command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
FAST ON/OFF command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
Using Buffered Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
Changing Measurement Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
An Example Program in C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
6-15 Operator Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
Software Loader Instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
Contents-3
Table of Contents (Continued)
Chapter 7—Measurement Examples
7-1
Example 1: Standard CW Power Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
7-2
Example 2: Measuring Modulated Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
7-3
Example 3: Optimizing Measurements at Low Power Levels . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
7-4
Example 4: Using Both Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
7-5
Example 5: Using Two Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
7-6
Example 6: Gain Compression Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
7-7
Example 7: Measuring Pulse Signals With a Duty Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
7-8
Example 8: Profiling Pulse Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
7-9
Example 9: Displaying GSM-TDMA Bursts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23
7-10 Example 10: Power Versus Time Data Logging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27
7-11 Example 11: Frequency Measurements Using a Separate Source . . . . . 7-31
Chapter 8—GPIB Operation
8-1
Data I/O Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
<NR1> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
<NR2> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
<NR3> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
<NRf> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
<String> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
<Arbitrary ASCII> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
<Arbitrary Block> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
8-2
Query Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
8-3
GPIB PC Card Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
GPIB Device Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
GPIB Card Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
8-4
Using 488.1 GPIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Device Clear (DCL) and Selected Device Clear (SDC) . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Device trigger (GET) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Goto local (GTL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Interface clear (IFC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Local lockout (LLO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Serial poll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
8-5
Using 488.2 GPIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Contents-4
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
Table of Contents (Continued)
8-6
488.2 Command Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Status Byte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Event Status Bit (ESB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Message Available Bit (MAV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Getting a Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Service Request Status (SRQ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
RGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
LIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
MAV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
ESB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
8-7
Functional Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
BNC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Data Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
GPIB 488.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
GPIB Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
GPIB Trigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Profile Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Trigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
Contents-5
Table of Contents (Continued)
8-8
Contents-6
ML24xxA Native Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
*CLS (Clear GPIB status bytes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
*ESE (Event Status byte Enable) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12
*ESE? (Return Event status register enable mask). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
*ESR? Event status register request . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
*IDN? (Request device identification) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
*OPC (Operations complete) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
*OPC? (Operations complete Output '1') . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
*RCL (Recall a stored setup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
*RST (Reset Device) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
*SAV (Save configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
*SRE (Setup service request enable register) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
*SRE? (Return Service Request Enable register) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
*STB? (Return Status Byte register) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
*TRG (Perform the GPIB 'Group Execute Trigger' command) . . . . . . 8-16
*TST? (Self Test) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
ADDR (Change GPIB address) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17
AVG (Sets up averaging for a sensor). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
AVGLL (Auto low level averaging). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
AVGM (Manual Averaging) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
BAUTS (Battery Auto Turn OFF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
BAUTT (Battery Auto shut off after x minutes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
BUFF (GPIB response buffering enabled) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
CAL (Cal sensor to 0 dBm reference) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
CFADJ (Cal Adjust) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
CFCAL (Cal factor manual setting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
CFFRQ (Cal Factor Frequency value) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
CFSRC (Cal factor source) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
CFUADD (Add an entry pair to a cal factor table) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23
CFUCT (Clear cal factor table) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23
CFUID (Cal factor table identity update) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24
CFUNITS (Cal factor display units) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24
CFULD (Cal factor table binary load). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24
CFUPT (Preset cal factor table) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25
CFURD (Cal factor table binary read) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25
CFUSAV (Cal factor table save) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25
CFUSEL (Select cal factor table) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26
CFUTBL (Number of cal factor tables in the sensor). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26
CFUUSE (Number of cal factor table being used). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26
CFUVLD (Valid cal factor table check) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26
CFVAL Current cal factor value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
CHCFG (Channel input configuration). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
CHRES (Set channel decimal pint resolution) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
Table of Contents (Continued)
CHUNIT (Set Channel units) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28
CONT (Continue) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28
CUR (Cursor in Power vs. Time and Source Sweep modes) . . . . . . . 8-29
CURLK (Link cursors in all graphic modes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-29
CVSPF (V/GHz calibration factor stop frequency). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30
CVSPV (V/GHz calibration factor stop voltage). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30
CVSTF (V/GHz calibration factor start frequency). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30
CVSTV (V/GHz calibration factor start voltage). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31
DBLGHT (Battery LCD Back light mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31
DBLTIM (Auto Backlight OFF timer setting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31
DCONT (Set Display Contrast) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32
DCONTD (Set display contrast down by one) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32
DCONTU (Set display contrast up by one) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32
DISP (Display On or OFF). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32
DTRGD (Display Trigger Delay) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-33
DUTY (Duty cycle). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34
DUTYS (Duty cycle state) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34
EMUL (GPIB emulation mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35
ENTERR (Entry Error beep) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35
ERRLST (Returns the DDE error list) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36
FAST (Operate in non-488.2 compliant mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-37
FHOLD (Fail indicator Hold) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38
FRST (Factory Reset) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-39
GMNMX (Return the minimum and maximum values) . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-39
GPRST (Reset min/max graph). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-40
GRAUTO (Auto scaling) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-40
GRAVG (Average between profile cursors). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-40
GRCP (Connect points on profile) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-40
GRDATA (Display Graph Cursor Data) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-41
GRDDT (Power vs. Time data display time) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-41
GRDRQ (Return Graph Data readout) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-42
GRFS (Profile Reference line state) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-42
GRMD (Profile, Power vs. Time and Source Sweep Selection) . . . . . 8-42
GRPIX (Profile type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43
GRPRD (Profile data collection period) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43
GRPTP (Graph Pretrigger Percentage). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43
GRSWP (Graph Averaging Number for Profile or Source Sweep) . . . 8-44
GRSWR (Reset Graph Averaging for Profile or Source Sweep) . . . . 8-44
GRSWS (Graph Average State for Profile or Source Sweep) . . . . . . 8-44
GRTMM (Profile Min/Max tracking mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-45
GRYB (Set graph Y-axis bottom scale) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-45
GRYT (Set graph Y-axis top scale) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-45
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
Contents-7
Table of Contents (Continued)
GT0 (Set to ignore the Group Execute Trigger (GET) command) . . . 8-46
GT1 (Set 'GET' command to TR1 type (immediate) trigger) . . . . . . . . 8-46
GT2 (Set 'GET' command to TR2 type (settling delay) trigger) . . . . . 8-46
GTARM (Set profile trigger arming) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-46
GTDLY (Set profile trigger sample delay) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-47
GTGW (Set profile trigger gate width) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-47
GTLVL (Set profile trigger level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-47
GTSRC (Set Profile Trigger source) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-48
GTTYP (Set profile trigger type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-48
GTXTTL (Set profile external trigger edge) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-49
HLIM (Set High limits) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-49
HLIMS (Turn on/off High limits) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-50
HOLD (Graph hold) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-50
IBBLP (Blanking active TTL level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-50
KEYCK (Turn key click sound on or off) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-51
LINK (Trigger linking) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-51
LLIMS (Turn on/off low limits) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-52
MMRST (Min Max Tracking reset) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-53
MNGDB (Output Min Graph Binary Data) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-53
MNGD (Output Min Graph Data) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-53
MNMXS (Track min and max values) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-54
MODDEL (Modem redial delay time) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-54
MODINIT (Initialize modem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-54
MODLIM (Autodial enable for limits failure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-54
MODPH (Autodial phone number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-55
MODPWR (Autodial enable for power on) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-55
MODRED (Redial count) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-55
MODRNG (Autodial enable for range error) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-56
MXGDB (Output Max Graph Binary Data) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-56
MXGD (Output Max Graph Data) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-56
O (Return display channel reading) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-57
OBACM (AC mod output polarity configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-57
OBCH (BNC output port channel configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-57
OBDSP (BNC analog output display stop value) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-58
OBDST (BNC analog out display start value) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-58
OBMD (BNC output mode select) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-59
OBPL (BNC pass/fail pass level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-59
OBVSP (BNC analog output stop voltage scale) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-60
OBVST (BNC analog output start voltage scale) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-60
OBZL (BNC RF blanking output level when zeroing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-60
OFFCLR (Clear an offset table) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-60
OFFFIX Offset fixed value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-61
Contents-8
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
Table of Contents (Continued)
OFFTBL (Specify the table used to apply offsets to the sensor) . . . . 8-61
OFFTBU (Updates an offset table) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-62
OFFTYP (Offset type to use) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-63
OFFVAL (Sensor Offset Value) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-63
OGBD (Output Graph Binary Data) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-63
OGD (Output Graph Data) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-64
OGSD (Output Valid Samples Array (Power vs. Time mode only)) . . 8-64
OI (Output device identification) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-64
ON (Output number of channel readings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-65
OPMD (ML243xA operation mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-65
PRINT (Send details to the connected printer.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-66
PRNSEL (Select the type of printer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-66
RCD (Range Calibrator data request) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-66
REL (Relative control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-67
RFCAL (Turn RF reference calibrator ON or OFF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-67
RGH (Range Hold Sensor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-67
RSBAUD (RS232 Baud Rate) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-68
RSMODE (RS232 Operating Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-68
SECURE (Secure system state) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-68
SENMM (Sensor Measurement mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-69
SENMO (Universal Sensor Operation Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-69
SENSTL (Set Sensor Settle Percentage) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-70
SENTYP (Return sensor information) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-70
SRCMOD (Source Sweep Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-70
SRCSPFRQ (Source Sweep Stop Frequency) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-70
SRCSPPWR (Source Sweep Stop Power) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-71
SRCSTAT (Source Sweep mode status request) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-71
SRCSTFRQ (Source Sweep Start Frequency) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-71
SRCSTPWR (Source Sweep Start Power) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-71
START (Initial startup self test command) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-72
STATUS (Status Message) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-73
STERR (Returns results of POST or *TST?) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-75
SYSLD (Load saved setup store over the GPIB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-75
SYSLNM (Saved set naming) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-76
SYSRD (Output the saved setup over the GPIB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-76
TEXT (User text command) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-77
TEXTS (User text display command) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-77
TR0 (Trigger hold mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-77
TR1 (Trigger immediate) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-78
TR2 (Trigger with a settling delay) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-78
TR3 Trigger free run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-79
TRGARM (Trigger arming) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-79
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
Contents-9
Table of Contents (Continued)
TRGDLY (Trigger sample delay) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-80
TRGGW (Set trigger gate width) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-80
TRGLVL (Set trigger level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-81
TRGMODE (Change trigger mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-81
TRGSRC (Set trigger source) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-82
TRGTYP (Set Trigger type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-82
TRGXTTL (Set external trigger edge type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-83
VZERO (Zero the BNC input connector) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-83
ZERO (Zero the selected sensor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-83
8-9
Contents-10
GPIB Emulation Modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-84
Zeroing a Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-84
Sensor Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-84
Output Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-84
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
Table of Contents (Continued)
8-10 ML4803A Emulation Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-85
SRQs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-85
Status Byte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-85
Output Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-86
Unsupported Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-86
AVE (Sensor averaging setting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-87
CAL (Set the user cal factor value) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-87
CCA (Clear the calfactor value to zero). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-87
CDJ (Perform a CAL 0 dBm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-87
COF (Clear the offset value to zero) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-87
COS (Turn ON the 50 MHz, 0 dBm RF calibrator output) . . . . . . . . . . 8-87
CRF (Clear the reference value to zero) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-87
CST (Turn OFF the 50 MHz, 0 dBm RF calibrator output) . . . . . . . . . 8-87
DBM (Sets the display channel units to dBm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-88
DBR (Sets display channel units to dB’s and takes the relative value) 8-88
EMUL (GPIB emulation mod) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-88
MCA (Set the cal factor value at the specified memory location in dBm)8-88
MCC (Clears the cal factor value at the specified memory location). . 8-89
MCO (Clears the offset value at the specified memory location) . . . . 8-89
MCQ (Clears the frequency value at the specified memory location) . 8-89
MCR (Clears the reference value at the specified memory location) . 8-89
MCT (Clears all the entries at the specified memory location) . . . . . . 8-89
MDI (Disable memory store setting and use) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-89
MEN (Enable setting of the memory stores) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-89
MFG (Set the frequency value at the specified location in GHz). . . . . 8-90
MFM (Set the frequency value at the specified location in MHz) . . . . 8-90
MOF (Set the offset value at the specified location in dBm) . . . . . . . . 8-90
MRF (Set the reference value at the specified location in dBm) . . . . . 8-90
ODT (Output the current calibration factor, offset, and reference level)8-91
OFF (Set sensor offset value) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-91
OI? (Request identity) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-91
OMR (Output a memory store set of data) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-92
OPW (Request for channel reading) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-92
REF (Set the reference value). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-95
RNG (Sensor measurement range hold). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-95
SRQ (Turns on or off the SRQ on output data ready) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-95
STA (Restart averaging reading). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-95
WAT (Sets the display channel units to Watts) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-95
ZAJ (Zero the sensor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-96
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
Contents-11
Table of Contents (Continued)
8-11 HP436A Emulation Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-97
+ (Disable cal factor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-97
– (Enable cal factor). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-97
1, 2, 3, 4, & 5 (Set sensor operating range). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-97
9 (Auto range) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-97
A (Wat). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-97
B (dB (rel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-98
C (dB (ref) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-98
D (dB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-98
EMUL (Select emulation mod). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-98
H (Hold mod) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-99
I (Trigger without settling) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-99
OI (Identification) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-99
R (Free run mod) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-99
T (Trigger with settling) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-99
V (Free run mode with settling) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-99
Z (Zero sensor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-100
Output Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-100
Contents-12
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
Table of Contents (Continued)
8-12 HP437B Emulation Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-102
*CLS (Clear GPIB status byte) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-103
*ESE (Set the Event Status register enable mask) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-103
*ESE? (Return Event status register enable mask). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-105
*ESR? (Event status register request). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-105
*RST (Reset Device) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-105
*SRE (Setup service request enable register). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-105
*SRE? (Return Service Request Enable register) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-105
*STB? (Return Status Byte register) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-106
*TST? (Self Test). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-106
@1 (Set SRE mask) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-106
CL (Cal Adjust) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-107
CS (Clear all status byte). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-107
CT (Clear the cal factor table) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-107
DA (Display All) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-107
DC (Duty Cycle state) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-108
DD (Display disable) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-108
DE (Display enable). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-108
DF (Display disable) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-108
DR (Set GPIB address) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-108
DY (Duty Cycle). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-109
EMUL (GPIB emulation mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-109
EN (Enter command). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-110
EX (Exit cal factor table mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-110
FA (Auto average) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-110
FH (average hold) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-111
FM (Set average value) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-111
FR (Frequency of the input signal) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-111
GT (Set group trigger) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-112
ID (Return identification string) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-112
IDN? (HP437B identity request) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-112
KB (Calibration factor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-113
LG (Set log units). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-113
LH (Set high limit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-113
LL (Set low limit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-113
LM (limits check state). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-114
LN (Set linear units). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-114
OC (Set calibrator state) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-114
OD (Output the display). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-114
OF (Offset state) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-115
OI (Return identification string) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-115
OS (Set offset value) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-115
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
Contents-13
Table of Contents (Continued)
PR (Preset the unit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-115
RA (Auto Range) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-115
RC (Recall setup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-116
RE (Set decimal point resolution) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-116
RF (Set the reference cal factor value for a table). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-116
RH (Range hold) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-116
RL (Relative mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-117
RM (Range hold set) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-117
RV (Service request mask value) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-117
SE (Select cal factor table) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-117
SM (status message). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-118
ST (Store setup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-119
SV (Save cal factor table) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-119
TR0 (Trigger hold mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-119
TR1 (Trigger immediate) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-120
TR2 (Trigger with a settling delay). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-120
TR3 (Trigger free run) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-120
ZE (Zero sensors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-120
Contents-14
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
Table of Contents (Continued)
8-13 HP438A Emulation Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-121
?ID (HP Identity request) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-122
@1 (Set SRE mask) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-122
AD (Set display to A – B). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-122
AP (Set single sensor A display) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-122
AR (Set display A / B) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-122
BD (Set display B – A). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-122
BP (Set single sensor B display) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-123
BR (Set display B / A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-123
CL (Cal Adjust) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-123
CS (Clear all status bytes). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-123
DA (Display All) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-123
DD (Display disable) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-123
DE (Display enable). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-124
DR (Set GPIB address) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-124
EMUL (GPIB emulation mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-124
FA (auto average) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-124
FH (average hold) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-125
FM (Set average value) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-125
GT (Set group trigger) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-125
KB (Calibration factor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-126
LG (Set log units). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-126
LH (Set high limit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-126
LL (Set low limit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-126
LM (limits check state). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-126
LN (Set linear units). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-127
OC (Set calibrator state) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-127
OI (HP Identity request). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-127
OS (Set offset value) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-127
PR (Preset the unit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-128
RA (Auto Range) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-128
RC (Recall setup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-128
RH (Range hold) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-128
RL (Relative mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-129
RM (Range hold set) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-129
RV (Service request mask value) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-129
SM (Status Message) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-130
ST (Store setup) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-130
TR0 (Trigger hold mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-131
TR1 (Trigger immediate) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-131
TR2 (Trigger with a settling delay). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-131
TR3 (Trigger free run) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-131
ZE (Zero sensors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-131
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
Contents-15
Table of Contents (Continued)
8-14 Programming Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-132
Output Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-132
Get Graph Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-133
Status Register Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-134
488.2 General Send/Receive System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-134
Binary Output Message Decoding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-136
Appendix A—Technical Support
A-1
Getting Support. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
Appendix B—Specifications
B-1
System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
B-2
System Defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3
B-3
System Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-10
B-4
Calibration and Zero Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-12
Appendix C—GPIB Quick Reference
C-1
ML24XXA Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-1
BNC Functional Group Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-1
Calibration Functional Group Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-1
Channel Functional Group Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-1
Data Output Functional Group Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-2
Display Functional Group Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-3
GPIB 488.2 Functional Group Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-3
GPIB Setup Functional Group Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-3
GPIB Trigger Functional Group Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-4
Profile Setup Functional Group Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-4
Sensor Functional Group Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-5
System Functional Group Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-6
Trigger Functional Group Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-7
ML24XXA Native Mode Query Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-8
C-2
ML4803A Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-12
ML4803A Emulation Mode Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-12
C-3
HP436A Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-14
HP436A Emulation Mode Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-14
C-4
HP437B Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-15
HP437B Emulation Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-15
C-5
HP438A Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-16
HP438A Emulation Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-16
C-6
HP-IB Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-18
HP437B Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-18
HP438A Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .C-21
Contents-16
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
Table of Contents (Continued)
Appendix D—Connector Care and Handling
D-1
Pin Depth Mating Connectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
D-2
Torquing Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-2
D-3
Mechanical Shock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-2
D-4
Cleaning Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
Contents-17
Table of Contents (Continued)
Contents-18
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
Chapter 1 — General Information
1-1
About this Manual
This manual provides installation and operational information for the ML2437A and
ML2438A Power Meters. All explanations in this manual apply equally to both units unless
otherwise stated. For simplicity, the term “ML243xA” is used to refer to both units.
1-2
Associated Documentation and Software
Updated software and related literature can be downloaded from the product page
Library tab:
https://www.anritsu.com/en-us/test-measurement/products/ml2438a
https://www.anritsu.com/en-us/test-measurement/products/ml2437a
1-3
Identification Number
The ML243xA ID number is affixed to the rear panel. Please use the complete ID number
when ordering parts or corresponding with the Anritsu Customer Service department.
1-4
Available Models
The following ML243xA Power Meters are available with either one or two sensor inputs and
are delivered with a 1.5 m sensor cable for each input.
Table 1-1.
Model Numbers and Sensor Channels
Model Number
Number of Sensor Channels
ML2437A
Single Channel
ML2438A
Dual Channel
Note
1-5
The use of sensor cables greater than 10 meters in length is not recommended
when measuring pulses of less than 10 ms.
Available Options, Accessories, and Power Sensors
Refer to the Anritsu Power Meters & Power Sensors Technical Data Sheet, PN: 11410-00423
for a complete listing of additional options and accessories, including power sensors available
for the ML243xA power meters.
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
1-1
Available Options, Accessories, and Power Sensors
1-2
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
General Information
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
Chapter 2 — Installation
2-1
Initial Inspection
Inspect the shipping container for damage. If the container or cushioning material is
damaged, retain until the contents of the shipment have been checked against the packing
list and the instrument has been checked for mechanical and electrical operation. If the power
meter is damaged mechanically, notify your local sales representative or Anritsu Customer
Service Center. If either the shipping container is damaged or the cushioning material shows
signs of stress, notify the carrier as well as Anritsu. Retain the shipping materials for the
carrier's inspection.
2-2
Sensor Handling
The sensors are enclosed in a polycarbonate case to help prevent damage. The sensor
connectors, however, are exposed and are a critical part of the microwave instrument. Refer
to the MA24xxA Series Power Sensor manual (10585-00004) for detailed information on
proper connector care.
2-3
Power Requirements
The ML243xA Power Meter can be operated from either AC line power, external DC power, or
from the optional internal battery. The ML243xA Power Meter is intended as an Installation
(Overvoltage) Category II, Insulation Category I device. At power-on, the power meter will
perform a brief power-on self test (POST). If a POST error occurs, information and available
options are displayed on the screen. If the POST is successful, the instrument loads the last
used configuration, unless Secure mode has been selected.
AC Line Power
The ML243xA Power Meter can operate on AC input power of 85-264 V, 47-440 Hz, 40 VA
maximum. The power meter automatically configures itself for the voltage applied. The AC
line input is protected by an internal fuse.
DC Power
The ML243xA Power Meter can also operate from a nominal external 12-24 VDC input in the
absence of AC line power. DC line power is protected by a fuse mounted inside the unit, on the
main board. A grounding terminal is provided on the rear panel to ground the unit during
operation from a DC supply.
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
2-1
Environmental Requirements
Installation
Battery Power
The ML243xA Power Meter can be operated using the optional internal battery pack. During
battery operation, an icon is displayed on measurement screens indicating the state of charge.
When the remaining capacity reaches less than 10 %, the icon will flash, indicating that
charging will soon be required. When running from battery power, an estimate of typical-use
running time remaining can be viewed using the System menu. Note that, due to power
consumption considerations, GPIB and serial remote operation are not available when the
power meter is running from the battery.
The AUTO POWER OFF feature is also available through the System menu, and can be used
to automatically switch the unit to standby after a specified period of inactivity to save
battery power. The timer can be set for 10 to 240 minutes, and any key press will restart the
timer. This same feature will automatically switch the unit to standby when the battery is
fully discharged (in order to minimize the risk of over-discharge).
Note
The ML243xA Power Meter uses a high-capacity Ni-MH battery. Over-discharge
can result in a permanent loss of battery capacity of as much as 20 %. If the unit is
to be stored for an extended period (longer than one week), remove the optional
battery pack so as to preclude over-discharge.
For optimum battery life, store the battery pack at -20 to +50 C (-4 to +122 F) for short
periods and -20 to +35 C (-4 to +95 F) for long term storage. The ML243xA Power Meter will
operate from AC or DC main power with this battery removed. This battery is not used for the
retention of nonvolatile memory functions. Refer to Battery Charging, Removal and
Replacement, for further information.
Fuses
The ML243xA Power Meter AC and DC input lines are protected by internally mounted fuses.
These fuses should only be changed by qualified service personnel. Replace only with fuses of
the same type and rating (AC fuse is 2 A, 250 V, slow-blow; DC fuse is 3 A, 125 V, slow-blow).
Grounding
The ML243xA Power Meter must be properly grounded. Failure to ground the instrument
could be hazardous to operating personnel. The meter is supplied with a three-conductor
power cord. The instrument is properly grounded during AC line operation when the plug is
connected to a properly installed three-prong receptacle. A grounding terminal is provided on
the rear panel to ground the unit during operation from a DC supply.
2-4
Environmental Requirements
The ML243xA Power Meter is designed to operate within the temperature range of 0 to 50 C
(32 to 122 F) with a maximum humidity of 90 % at 40 C (104 F), non-condensing. Full
accuracy is specified at 5 to 35 C (23 to 95 F). Although not recommended, operation in
temperatures to -20 C (-4 F) is possible. At these temperatures the liquid crystal display
may exhibit excessively slow response. The soft sided carry case (part number D41310) and
optional front panel cover (PN: 2000-1535) can be used to help retain internally generated
heat and may improve response.
2-2
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
Installation
2-5
Rack Mounting
Rack Mounting
The ML243xA can be ordered with rack mounting hardware that allows it to be mounted into
a standard 48 cm equipment rack. There are two rack mount option kits available:
• The 2400-82 Rack Mount option allows the installation of a single ML243xA in either
the left or right side rack position.
• The 2400-83 Rack Mount option allows side-by-side mounting of two ML243xA.
Refer to the instructions that come with the mounting kit for installation.
2-6
Battery Charging, Removal and Replacement
The optional ML243xA Power Meter battery is a 12 Volt, 3000 mA-h nickel-metal hydride
(Ni-MH) multi-cell pack, located in a compartment on the bottom of the housing. The
compartment cover is secured by fractional turn fasteners, as shown in the figure below.
Rotate the fasteners approximately 1/4-turn counter-clockwise to release the cover.
Figure 2-1.
Note
Battery Compartment
The battery is shipped with a partial charge only, and should be fully charged
before use.
The life of the battery (the number of useful charges and available operating time) can be
extended by correct use. It is also possible to recover some of the performance of a battery
after is has been used incorrectly.
1. A battery will be damaged if left inside a power meter when the power meter is not used
for a period longer than two weeks. Do not leave a battery in a power meter if it is not
being used.
2. Best charging of the battery is achieved by using the optional external battery charger.
3. It is not recommended for a battery to be charged with the power meter internal
charger. However, the power meter can charge a well-maintained battery.
4. A battery should always be fully discharged before being re-charged. Fit the battery to
the power meter and discharge the battery before charging. The battery charge level
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
2-3
Battery Charging, Removal and Replacement
Installation
may be checked by fitting the battery in the power meter and pressing the following
front panel keys
a. Press [System] > [more] > [more] > [Battery] > [STATUS].
b. The remaining capacity is shown as a percentage of full charge.
5. An acceptable level of charge is defined by the number of hours the power meter will
operate with the charged battery. Typically this is 4.5 hours with the display backlight
on, and 9 hours with the backlight off. The percentage of charge is a guide not a
specification.
6. The power meter can operate with two types of battery.
• Duracell DR36 2800 mAh
• Energizer NJ1020 3500 mAh
The NJ1020 has 25 % more capacity than the DR36.
For the DR36, 80 % of charge is approximately 4.5 hours operation (backlight on).
For the NJ1020, 66 % of charge is approximately 4.5 hours operation (backlight on).
7. If a battery repeatedly charges to less than 50 % it may be possible to recover some of
the lost charge capability. This is achieved by completely discharging the battery and
then recharging it 5 times. The best way to discharge the battery is to disable the auto
off function so that the power meter will operate until automatically shut down.
Battery voltage. Press the following keys to set auto off to no:
c. Press [System] > [more] > [more] > [Battery].
d. Press [AUTO] to change the AUTO power off states to “Disable”.
Note
To avoid excessive heat build up, always remove the ML243xA from the optional
soft-sided carrying case (D41310) before selecting fast charging.
The ideal battery temperature ranges are:
• Discharging: -20 to +50 C (-4 to +122 F)
• Charging: 10 to +45 C (+50 to +113 F)
Note that charging will be inhibited if the temperature falls outside these limits.
To remove the battery, first disconnect any AC or DC input line power. Open the battery
compartment as illustrated and remove the battery. Replace the battery with an identical
battery or with an equivalent as recommended by an Anritsu Service Center. Ensure that the
battery is correctly connected and that the battery compartment cover is securely fastened.
2-4
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
Installation
Storage and Shipment
Note that the battery is an optional component that is not used for the retention of
non-volatile memory functions, and is not required for the power meter to operate from either
AC or DC line sources. Serial and GPIB remote operation, however, are not available when
the power meter is running from battery power.
Warning
This product is supplied with a rechargeable battery that could
potentially leak hazardous compounds into the environment. These
hazardous compounds present a risk of injury or loss due to
exposure. Anritsu Company recommends removing the battery for
long-term storage of the instrument and storing the battery in a
leak-proof, plastic container. Follow the environmental storage
requirements specified in the product technical data sheet.
The ML243xA battery pack can leak, explode, or catch on fire if it is
opened, disassembled, or exposed to fire or very high temperatures.
No attempt should be made to open, repair, or modify the battery
package. When a battery pack has reached the end of its functional
life, it should be returned to the nearest Anritsu Service Center for
proper recycling or disposal. Do not treat a used battery as normal
waste.
2-7
Storage and Shipment
The following paragraphs describe preparing the power meter for storage and shipment.
Preparation for Storage
Preparing the power meter for storage consists of cleaning the unit and packing it with
moisture-absorbing desiccant crystals. Whenever the unit is to be stored for an extended
period (longer than one week), it is advisable to remove the optional battery pack. Refer to
Section 2-8, “Battery Charging, Removal and Replacement” for instructions.
Warning
This product is supplied with a rechargeable battery that could
potentially leak hazardous compounds into the environment. These
hazardous compounds present a risk of injury or loss due to
exposure. Anritsu Company recommends removing the battery for
long-term storage of the instrument and storing the battery in a
leak-proof, plastic container. Follow the environmental storage
requirements specified in the product technical data sheet and below.
Environmental Requirements
Store the unit in a temperature controlled environment that is maintained between -40 C
and +70 C (-40 F to +156 F), with a maximum humidity of 90 % at 40 C (104 F),
non-condensing. For optimum battery life, store the battery pack at -20 C to +50 C (-4 F to
+122 F) for short periods and -20 C to +35 C (-4 F to +95 F) for long term storage.
2-8
Preparing for Shipment
Follow the procedure below if it is necessary to return the ML2437A/38A to Anritsu.
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
2-5
Preparing for Shipment
Installation
1. Wrap the ML243xA to protect the finish.
2. Position the ML243xA in the original shipping container.
Note
If the original shipping container is no longer available, use a strong corrugated
cardboard container that is at least 15 cm larger than the ML243x8A.
3. Insert cushioning material between the ML243xA and the container. Pack the
cushioning material tightly in place while taking care not to put pressure on the RF
connector on the front panel.
4. Seal the container carefully; use shipping tape or an industrial stapler.
5. Return the container to the appropriate Anritsu service center. The address of your local
service center can be found at: https://www.anritsu.com/en-US/Contact-US/
2-6
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
Chapter 3 — Memory and Security
Considerations
3-1
Introduction
The ML2437A/38A Power Meters have three different types of memory devices:
Internal Flash Memory (8 MB EEPROM)
This memory space is used to store the instrument firmware for the main processor and DSP
factory calibration. Also stored in this memory is the model number and serial number.
During a firmware update, the old firmware is erased. The firmware does not contain any
user information or any variables generated during the execution of the code. The internal
flash memory is not user accessible.
RAM Memory used by the DSP microcomputer (640 KB)
This is volatile memory used to store many parameters needed for the normal operation of the
instrument along with current measurement data. It is initialized on power up and is
completely cleared when powered down. This memory is not user accessible.
RAM Memory as non-volatile RAM (1 MB)
Non-volatile memory is used to store many parameters such as the current instrument setup,
saved instrument setups, offset tables, calibration adjustment values, user-set parameters,
etc. The user cannot write to this memory directly, but can store and retrieve instrument
set-up parameters in this memory. It can be cleared by an instrument reset operation (see
below).
3-2
Secure Mode
Information such as the cal factor frequency needs to be removed from the power meter if the
power meter is moved out of a secure environment. This can be accomplished by using the
secure mode to completely wipe the non-volatile static RAM of all information.
The user sets the secure mode on the power meter. When the power meter is next turned on
the non-volatile static RAM is completely purged of all information. The power meter then
sets the factory defaults for the current settings. To set Secure mode on, use the following key
sequence:
System | Secure | ON
Secure mode can also be enabled via the SECURE GPIB command (refer to “SECURE (Secure
system state) ” on page 8-68.
To manually reset the status to factory default, use the factory reset button described below.
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
3-1
Clearing the Non-Volatile Static RAM
3-3
Memory and Security Considerations
Clearing the Non-Volatile Static RAM
Warning
The following procedure will permanently erase all user data, including saved
set-up data.
Turn the instrument on and use the following key sequence:
System | Setup | more | Preset | Factory
3-4
Anritsu Power Sensors EEPROM
Anritsu manufactures several different families of sensors. All families have an EEPROM
type of memory device in the power sensor.
All A,B,C sensors (except MA2490/1A and MA2411B series sensors)
These sensors all contain a 64 Kb (8 K x 8) EEPROM.
All D sensors (including MA2490/1A and MA2411B series sensors)
These sensors all contain a 128 Kb (16 K x 8) EEPROM.
EEPROM Contents
The EEPROM is used to store the following information
• Linearity data
• Temperature Correction Coefficients
• Sensor ID
• Factory cal factor data
• User cal factor table data
Only the user cal factor table data can be erased without the functionality of the sensor being
affected. This can be done by using the following key sequence:
Sensor | Calfactor | Edit | Clear
3-2
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
Chapter 4 — Connections
4-1
Front Panel Connectors
The front panel connectors are illustrated in the figure below. Detailed descriptions of each
connector follow.
Figure 4-1.
Front Panel Connectors
Calibrator Connector
This connector is a precision female N-Type, 50 Ohm connector that provides a precision,
traceable 0.0 dBm, 50 MHz reference signal for absolute calibration of the sensors. The
calibration signal can be turned on or off through the Cal/Zero menus. Use only compatible 50
Ohm N-Type connectors.
An optional rear panel Calibrator connector is offered as an alternative (see figure overleaf).
If the rear panel connector option is installed, the front panel connector is not installed. Refer
to Chapter 5, Procedures, for information on using the Calibrator output.
Sensor A Connector
This connector is a 12-pin circular precision connector to be used in conjunction with power
sensor cables. An optional rear panel Channel A connector is offered as an alternative (see
figure overleaf). If the rear panel connector option is installed, the front panel connector is not
installed.
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
4-1
Rear Panel Connectors
Connections
Sensor B Connector (ML2438A only)
This connector is a 12-pin circular precision connector to be used in conjunction with power
sensor cables. An optional rear panel Channel B connector is offered as an alternative (see
figure below). If the rear panel connector option is installed, the front panel connector is not
installed.
Only MA2400A Series sensors can be connected directly to the ML243xA Power
Meters. MA4700A and MA4600A Series sensors require the MA2499A or
MA2499B Anritsu Sensor Adapter. MP-Series (10-pin) sensors require an
MA4001A or MA4002B adapter and an MA2499B.
Note
4-2
Rear Panel Connectors
The Rear Panel connectors are shown in the figure below.
A
B
C
D
E
F
Made in USA
G
Figure 4-2.
Table 4-1.
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
Rear Panel Connectors
Rear Panel Connectors
Key
Item
Description
A
RS232 Serial
Connector
Serial control and data output commands are entered using the
same format as the GPIB interface. Refer to chapter 5 for more
information on using Serial Remote Operation. Allows
communication with an Anritsu synthesizer in Source Sweep
mode. Also allows service access for software upgrades. The
hardware handshake lines RTS and CTS are used to control the
flow of data.
B
Parallel Printer
Port
Provides an interface to a standard parallel printer. Compatible
printers include the Canon BJC80, HP340 Deskjet, and most
other 300 and 500 Series HP Deskjet printers.
4-2
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
Connections
Table 4-1.
Rear Panel Connectors
Rear Panel Connectors
Key
Item
Description
C
GPIB/ IEEE488
Connector
Standard General Purpose Interface Bus connector used to
connect through GPIB to other test equipment and a host
computer. The ML243xA is compatible with IEEE-488.1
requirements.
D
ID Number Label
The ML243xA ID number is affixed to the rear panel here. Please
use the complete ID number when ordering parts or
corresponding with the Anritsu Customer Service department.
E
AC Main Power
Input
85-264 VAC, 47-440 Hz, 40 VA maximum. The power meter
automatically configures itself for the voltage applied. Connecting
AC power here will turn the instrument on. Subsequently, the
instrument can be switched between the ON state and the
STANDBY state using the front panel ON/OFF button. The
optional battery can be fast charged when AC input voltage is
applied through this connector and all other power meter functions
are off.
F
Chassis Ground
Used as a convenient earth ground reference when DC line power
is applied. Used as an optional safety ground when operating
from battery power.
G
Sensor
Connectors
Alternate Sensor input connectors for Channels A and B. If the
rear panel optional connectors are installed, the front panel
connectors are not installed.
H
Sensor
Connectors
Alternate Sensor input connectors for Channels A and B. If the
rear panel optional connectors are installed, the front panel
connectors are not installed.
I
Calibrator
Connector
Alternate Calibrator output connector. If this rear panel connector
option is installed, the front panel connector is not installed. Refer
to Chapter 5, Procedures, for information on using the Reference
Calibrator output.
J
Output 1
Multi-purpose BNC connector is user-configurable for Modulation
Output (TTL), Analog Output 1 (volts/units), or Limits Pass/fail
(TTL). Supports pass/fail testing for channels 1 and 2. Also
configurable to output a real-time measurement signal from
sensor input A, suitable for leveling purposes.
K
Output 2
Multi purpose BNC connector is user configurable for Analog
Output 2 (volts/units), Blanking Zero (TTL), or Limits Pass/Fail
(TTL). Supports pass/fail testing for channels 1 and 2. Also
configurable to output a real-time measurement signal from
sensor input B, suitable for levelling purposes.
L
Input 1, Digital
Multi purpose BNC connector is user configurable for Blanking
Input (used to ARM measurements in triggering modes) or TTL
Trigger Input.
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
4-3
Rear Panel Connectors
Table 4-1.
Connections
Rear Panel Connectors
Key
Item
Description
M
Input 2, Analog
Multi-purpose BNC connector used for Volts per GHz connection.
Supports 0 to +20 V nominal input voltage with software
selectable scaling. V/GHz is used for automatic CAL FACTOR
correction by applying an external voltage, scaled to frequency.
The correct calibration factor for this frequency is automatically
interpolated and applied when in V/GHz calibration factor mode.
Different scaling may be applied to sensor A or B allowing for
measurement of frequency translation devices. Available
simultaneously with channel A and/or B data, the data rate is as
set on the channel. The default data rate is 20 ms in DEFAULT
measurement mode (with the default settling time of 0.1 %), and
programmable in PROFILE operation mode and CUSTOM
measurement mode.
N
DC Power Supply Used for 12-24 VDC input in the absence of AC line power. The
Input
optional battery can be fast-charged when the DC input voltage is
greater than or equal to 21 V and all other functions are off.
Fast-charge must be selected from the System menu. The
external DC Power Supply input line is protected by an internal
fuse.
4-4
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
Chapter 5 — Front Panel Operation
The ML243xA Power Meter is controlled from the front panel using the five main menu keys:
Sensor, Channel, Trigger, System, and Cal/Zero. This chapter explains the power-on
procedure and the features and functions of each of the menus. Refer to Appendix C for quick
reference Menu Maps.
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
5-1
Front Panel Controls
5-1
Front Panel Operation
Front Panel Controls
The front panel controls are shown in the figure below. The following sections provide more
detailed explanations of the menus and soft keys.
A
B
C
F
D
E
Figure 5-1. Front Panel Controls
Table 5-1. Front Panel Connectors
Key
Item
Description
A
Numeric Keypad
Provides the means for entering numeric data in the appropriate
menus as required for system configuration or calibration.
B
Graphic LCD with
Backlight
The LCD display settings are configured in the System menus.
The backlight can be turned on or off, or time-delayed, as required
to suit ambient conditions and battery drain. The backlight is
controlled through the System menus when operating from the
internal battery.
C
Soft Keys
Soft keys select submenus, toggle selections, control cursor
position, and allow data entry. A flashing cursor indicates when
numbers can be entered using the numeric keypad. Refer to the
following sections of this chapter for detailed information on using
the soft keys.
D
Power On /Off
Switches the power meter from STANDBY to ON, or ON to
STANDBY. Note that whenever AC power is applied, the power
meter defaults to the ON state. Subsequently, the instrument can
be switched between the ON state and the STANDBY state using
this front panel Power On /Off key.
When External or Internal (battery) DC power is first applied to the
instrument (no AC present) the power meter defaults to the
STANDBY state. It can then be switched to the ON state using
the front panel Power On /Off key.
5-2
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
Front Panel Operation
Table 5-1.
Power-On Procedure
Front Panel Connectors
Key
Item
Description
E
Clear Key
The clear (CLR) key performs various functions depending on
when it is pressed. For example, when editing an entry in a menu,
pressing the CLR key clears the digits. If in a menu screen,
pressing the CLR key returns to the previous menu level.
If the limits FAIL indicator HOLD audible alarm is sounding,
pressing the CLR key stops the alarm. The FAIL indication is not
affected by the clear key, and can only be cleared by turning fail
hold off. If the GPIB box is on the screen and the system is not in
a menu screen, and the system is in local mode (menus
available), and no GPIB operations are pending, then pressing the
CLR key clears the GPIB box off the screen.
F
Menu Keys
When pressed, the first level submenus appear on the display
directly above the soft key for that menu function. Refer to the
following sections of this chapter for detailed information on using
the menu keys.
5-2
Power-On Procedure
At power-on, the power meter performs a brief power-on self test (POST). After the POST, the
instrument loads the last used configuration and display settings. If a POST error occurs,
information and available options are displayed on the screen.
The following tests are performed during the power-on self test, and also when the GPIB
*TST? command is sent.
Table 5-2.
Power-on Self Test
Test sequence
Possible status
Flash EPROM code checksum
Pass or Fail
Flash EPROM personality data
checksum
Pass or Fail
Flash EPROM calibration data
checksum
Pass or Fail
Volatile RAM tests
Pass or Fail
Non-volatile RAM checksums
Pass or Fail
WARNING - Software version changed - all non-vol
stores reset
Current store failed - current store reset
Saved store(s) failed - failed store status changed to
not saved
WARNING - Secure mode clear memory - all non-vol
stores reset
Display
Pass or Fail
Keyboard
Pass or Fail
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
5-3
Power-On Procedure
Front Panel Operation
Failure and warning messages that can be displayed on the front panel are:
• Flash code csum
• Personality csumVolatile RAM
• Cal data csum
• Non-Vol RAM
• Software version - this is only a warning
• Current Setup
• Saved Setups
• Secure - Mem clear - this is only a warning
• Display
• Keyboard
• DSP error # - followed by a 4-digit hexadecimal error code
If an error, other than a DSP error, is encountered, the text: “Press ANY key to continue” is
displayed at the bottom of the screen. If only warnings are encountered, nothing is displayed
at the bottom of the screen, and the unit continues to initialize.
If a DSP error occurs, the text, "Restart unit. If error persists, contact Service Center." is
displayed and the unit will halt the self test. Make a note of the hexadecimal error code
displayed and contact your nearest Anritsu Service Center.
Self test error messages are also available over the GPIB, as a self test status string (see
STERR command in chapter 7).
5-4
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
Front Panel Operation
5-3
Sensor Menu
Sensor Menu
The Sensor menu has controls for sensor data processing.
Note
When editing an entry in a menu, pressing the CLR key clears the digits. If in a
menu screen, pressing the CLR key returns to the previous menu level.
Setup
Selects the data acquisition controls for the sensor. The following submenus are displayed.
SENSOR
Model ML2438A (dual channel) only. Select the sensor to be configured. Toggles
between Channel A and Channel B for all submenu functions.
OPTION
Only displayed if a Universal Power Sensor with Option 01 is connected to selected
input channel. This key selects between True RMS sensor operation (for WCDMA
measurements) and Fast CW (for TDMA/Pulse measurements).
MODE
Note
The MODE selection is not available in Profile or Source Sweep modes.
Select either Default, Modulated Average, or Custom.
Default is the sensor mode setting following system preset. It is the ML243xA simplest
operating mode. Measurement speed is automatically adjusted according to sensor
response times and the user-adjustable Settling %. Triggering controls, except for GPIB
trigger, are disabled when the sensor mode is set to Default. This is intended to
simplify basic power measurement by avoiding the necessity of specific trigger settings.
Modulated Average mode is used to stabilize the front panel digital readout. It is a
specialized sensor mode for either MA2440A or MA2470A Series power sensors. These
sensors are fast enough to demodulate the amplitude modulation of many RF test
signals. The Mod Average sensor mode is unnecessary for thermal power sensors.
The Custom sensor mode permits the highest measurement rates. Trigger controls are
available with this sensor mode. Trigger Delay (the time between the ML243xA receipt
of a valid trigger event and the start of sample integration) and Gate Width (the
duration of sample integration) controls are located in the Trigger menus.
When using universal power sensors only default mode is a available unless OPTION is
set to Fast CW. Fast CW can only be selected for sensors supplied with option 01.
Note
When measuring modulated signals with a diode sensor, ensure Modulated
Average is selected or measurement errors may result.
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
5-5
Sensor Menu
Front Panel Operation
HOLD [RGH]
Allows the operating range of the selected sensor to be set to the desired range. Select a
Range Hold value of 1 to 5, or Auto. When in Auto, the range changes to take the best
measurement automatically. Auto is the default setting following system preset.
Table 5-3.
Typical Range Hold Values for Diode Sensors
Range
Values
Range 1
above approximately –12 dBm
Range 2
-10 to -27 dBm
Range 3
-25 to -42 dBm
Range 4
-40 to -57 dBm
Range 5
below -55 dBm
SETTLE % [SENSTL]
Settle % per reading is available when the sensor mode is set to Default. The settling
time allows some control over the trade-off between speed and the extent to which a
measurement has settled to its final value. A 1 % settling value relates to
approximately 0.04 dB, 0.5 % relates to 0.02 dB and 0.25 % to 0.01 dB. The default
value after a system preset is 0.1 %, or about 0.004 dB. Increasing the Settle percent to
1 % or more will substantially increase measurement speed.
Note
SETTLE% affects GPIB speed. Consider this when optimizing GPIB performance.
Calfactor
Allows entry of the calibration correction factor. The calibration factor compensates for
mismatch losses and effective efficiency over the frequency range of the power sensor.
SENSOR
Model ML2438A (dual channel) only. Select the sensor to be configured. Toggles
between Sensor A and Sensor B for all submenu functions.
5-6
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
Front Panel Operation
Sensor Menu
SOURCE [CFSRC, CFVAL]
Three selections are available, Frequency, Manual, and V/GHz.
Frequency:
In this mode, correction data is read from the EEPROM in the sensor
and applied automatically to the measurement based on the user’s
input frequency. The EEPROM correction data value nearest to the
entered frequency is used to calculate the correction applied to the
signal. For greater accuracy, calibration factors are interpolated for
settings that are between the calibration factor data provided in the
sensor EEPROM. For example, if calibration factors exist for 1 and 2
GHz, then the calibration factor applied for 1.5 GHz will be a value
midway between the two.
Sensor linearity adjustments for temperature are also interpolated; If
the correction factor for 1.5 GHz at 25°C is 1 dB, and for 35 ° C is 1.1
dB, then at 30 °C a value of 1.05 dB will be used.
Note
Frequency or V/GHz are preferred methods as the sensors have internal linearity
correction which varies with frequency.
Manual Set:
Allows manual correction of sensor data either as a percentage or a
fixed dB value. An input frequency is also required to allow the correct
linearity correction factors to be applied.
V/GHz:
Most modern synthesized sources have a rear panel BNC connector
which outputs a voltage proportional to the synthesized frequency. The
V/GHz is supplied to the rear panel input connector of the ML243xA.
The SETUP submenu has controls for customizing the voltage and
frequency relationship.
Note
When the MA2499B Anritsu Sensor Adapter or the MA2497A HP Sensor Adapter
are used, the input frequency should be set to 50 MHz irrespective of the
measurement frequency. Linearity correction factors are not applied when the
adapters are being used.
FREQ [CFFRQ]
When the Cal Factor source is set to Frequency or manual, enter the input signal
frequency in GHz or MHz. The correct sensor calibration factor is automatically
interpolated and applied to the displayed power reading.
Note
You will see a live update of the Current Cal Factor only if that sensor is being used
on a channel. For example: If you are editing the Cal Factor Frequency on Sensor
B, but you only have channel 1 set to A and channel 2 off, you will not see the
"Current Cal Factor" being updated.
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
5-7
Sensor Menu
Front Panel Operation
USE TABLE [CFUSEL, CFUTBL, CFUUSE, CFUVLD]
Defines which calibration factor table is to be used. Can be set to Factory, table number
1-10, or Factory + table number. The maximum number of tables available is displayed
on the screen, and is never greater than 10. If a selected table has not been used before,
the user will be prompted to CLEAR or PRESET the table, or cancel the selection. If a
table is CLEARED, all entries are cleared except for a single entry of 100 % @ 50 MHz.
If a table is PRESET - the factory defined calibration factor table is copied into the
specified user calibration factor table. The CLEARED or PRESET table is saved
directly to the sensor. PRESET clears the ID string, while CLEAR leaves the ID string
as currently set.
The number of tables available is defined by the frequency range of the sensor and the
amount of factory calibration data stored.
Note
User defined Cal Factor tables are available for applications where user-supplied
calibration points are required. Additional cal factor frequencies can be entered in
a user table and used in conjunction with the factory table.
Delete:
Deletes the currently displayed table number.
Factory:
Selects the Factory calibration factor table. Pressing Factory and the +/key on the numeric keypad allows selection of a user-defined table in
addition to the factory table. This allows full factory calibration to be
active, and allows adjustments or corrections to be entered in the
user-defined table. If user table 1 was selected, the menu would show
‘Factory+1’ and the Status box on the readout display would show a
warning ‘*’ sign on the Cal Factor line (bottom text line in the box) to show
that non-standard calibration is being applied (CAL *F or CAL *V).
Enter:
Confirms the selection.
Note
Whichever set, or sets, of cal factors are used, the linearity and temperature
correction remains active at all times. Ensure the power meter is programmed with
the frequency of the signal being measured.
%/dB [CFUNITS]
Toggles the Current Cal factor display format from percentage to dB, and back.
EDIT [CFUADD, CFUSAV, CFUCT, CFUPT, CFULD, CFURD, CFUID]
Edit any of the available user calibration factor tables in the sensor. Options available
are CLEAR or PRESET the table, enter a new table identity string, change or delete
existing frequency/cal factor data pairs, or enter new frequency/cal factor data pairs.
All frequency/cal factor data pairs can have both frequency and calibration factor value
modified, except for the data pair at 50 MHz, which can only have its cal factor value
changed. All frequency/cal factor data pairs can be deleted, but there must always be
one data pair remaining. If there is a data pair at 50 MHz, this will be the data pair
that will remain.
5-8
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
Front Panel Operation
Sensor Menu
The user must ensure that the maximum number of cal factor data pairs entered into a
table is not exceeded. Sensors with a maximum frequency of up to 40 GHz will hold 90
pairs, while sensors with a maximum frequency of 50 GHz will hold 110 pairs.
Once all changes have been made, the SAVE soft key saves the changed data to the
sensor. If any user cal factor data is changed and not saved, any attempt to exit the cal
factor menu or select a new table will result in a prompt to discard or save the changes.
FACTOR [CFCAL]
When the Cal Factor Source is set to Manual, the operator is expected to enter the
calibration factor value in dB or % terms.
CAL ADJUST [CFADJ]
Sets a calibration factor to be used when performing a 0 dBm calibration and the
calibration factor source is set to 'Manual.' This value is the only factor applied when
performing a 0 dBm reference calibration. If the sensor calibration factor source is set
to V/GHz or Frequency, the sensor internal EEPROM correction value at 50 MHz is
used.
SETUP [CVSTF, CVSPF, CVSTV, CVSPV]
Sets up the Start and Stop frequencies and voltages when Source is set to V/GHz. This
tells the ML243xA how to determine the frequency of the swept signal based on the
applied rear panel voltage.
Averaging
Sensor data averaging. The available soft keys depend upon the operating mode
selected.
In Readout and Power vs. Time modes, the following soft keys appear:
SENSOR
Model ML2438A (dual channel) only. Select sensor A or B, in Power vs. Time or
Readout modes.
MODE [AVG AVGM]
Select OFF, AUTO, MOVING or REPEAT, in Power vs. Time or Readout modes.
AUTOMATIC averaging uses a MOVING type of average and increases the amount of
averaging as the noise level increases. The display updates at approximately 100 ms
intervals, however the data is available at the full rate. The display is slowed down to
prevent jitter and allow the user to follow the update.
Note
Automatic averaging also applies an algorithm to enhance settling at low power
levels (e.g., signal sources).
MOVING average allows the user to manually select the amount of averaging
regardless of the signal level. The display is continually updated while averaging.
When selected, the following soft key becomes available:
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
5-9
Sensor Menu
Front Panel Operation
NUMBER [AVG AVGM]
Sweep averaging number (1 to 512).
REPEAT averaging also allows the user to manually select the amount of averaging
regardless of the signal level, however the display is updated only when the NUMBER
of readings specified have been taken (1-512).
Note
Due to the nature of this method of operation, if the power level changes between
updates, the display update will not reflect the true input power for one
measurement only.
When a channel is set to a ratio, e.g., A–B or A/B etc., the repeat method
described above only operates if all sensors are set to the REPEAT mode.
Note
GPIB trigger commands automatically apply REPEAT averaging after TR2
commands to ensure ‘old’ samples are excluded from the measurement. However,
the user should be aware that due to the high speed of the meter, other
instruments in the ATE system may not be settled.
LOW LEVEL [AVGLL]
Select OFF, LOW, MEDIUM, or HIGH, Low Level Averaging, in Power vs. Time or
Readout modes. Sets the low level averaging window for the sensor. At resolution
settings of 0.01 and 0.001 dB, digital readouts may flicker due to the high reading rate
of the power meter. Low level averaging applies a low pass filter to post-average data
readings to achieve a more stable front panel display without slowing down the
response of the meter to larger changes in level. The three windows for LOW, MEDIUM
and HIGH low level averaging are ± 0.01, 0.02, and 0.05 dB.
For example: When a LOW setting of low level averaging is applied while stepping from
0 dBm to –1 dBm, the meter displays the final reading within 0.01 dB with no delay.
The final settling of 0.01 dB will settle over a short subsequent period of time, leading
to a stable high resolution readout.
With a HIGH setting of low level averaging, the settling window is increased (up to
approximately 0.05 dB) and the settling time is longer.
With low level averaging OFF, the meter displays the final reading instantly with no
further settling observed. Any jitter due to noise is reflected in the displayed reading,
which may be inconvenient for high resolution readings.
In Profile and Source sweep modes, the following soft keys appear:
STATE [GRSWS]
Graph averaging state, ON or OFF. When set to ON, the following additional soft keys
appear:
A NUMBER [GRSWP]
B NUMBER (ML2438A only) [GRSWP]
Sweep averaging number (1 to 512).
5-10
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
Front Panel Operation
Sensor Menu
RESET
Sweep average reset. If the graph sweep averaging state is ON, this key resets the data
points and restarts the sweep to sweep mode.
CURSOR [GRSWR]
Between cursor averaging ON or OFF. When ON, a digital readout of the average
power between the two cursors is displayed in the readout area of the PROFILE
display.
Offset
Allows an offset, in dB, to be applied to sensor data for the selected sensor.
SENSOR
Model ML2438A (dual channel) only. Used to select the sensor to be configured. Toggles
between Channel A and Channel B for all submenu functions.
TYPE [OFFTYP]
Selects the type of offset to be applied:
Off:
No offset applied.
Fixed:
A fixed dB offset VALUE is applied to the sensor data.
Table:
The tables are a set of frequency-against-dB offsets. The offset value used
from the table depends on the setting of the frequency correction source. If
the source is FREQUENCY, the entered frequency is used to calculate the
offset from the table. If the frequency correction source is V/GHz, the
frequency value calculated from the supplied ramp input is used to
calculate the offset from the table.
If the frequency does not match any frequency in the table, interpolation is
used to calculate the correct offset.
Note
Use Fixed or Table to compensate for a fixed attenuator on a sensor for measuring
higher power levels. A better method is to apply a Fixed cal factor in the User
tables as this is then taken into account in the Zero/Cal process.
Note
If the frequency is greater than the maximum frequency in the table, the offset
value from the maximum table frequency is used. If the frequency is less than the
minimum frequency in the table, the offset from the minimum table frequency is
used.
VALUE [OFFFIX OFFVAL]
Enter the offset value (dB) when Offset TYPE is set to Fixed. Valid range is –99.99 to
+99.99.
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
5-11
Sensor Menu
Front Panel Operation
TABLE [OFFTBL, OFFTBR, OFFTBU, OFFVAL]
Select the offset table number (1-5) when Offset TYPE is set to Table. When a table is
selected, additional soft keys become available:
EDIT:
This will bring up all of the selected offset table’s entries, with their
associated frequencies and offsets. Select an entry and enter the
frequency and offset using the keypad.
CLEAR
[OFFCLR]:
When an offset table is selected, CLEAR will set all of the table’s
elements to zero.
Duty cycle
Applies a duty cycle to the selected sensor. An offset will be applied based on the entered
value.
SENSOR
Model ML2438A (dual channel) only. Used to select the sensor to be configured. Toggles
between sensor A and sensor B for all submenu functions.
STATE [DUTYS]
ON or OFF
DUTY [DUTYS]
Delete, Enter, or Cancel. An offset will be applied based on the entered value. For
example, specifying a duty cycle of 50 % will alter the displayed readings by
approximately +3.01 dB.
Rng Hold [RGH]
This function will toggle the sensor between holding the present operating range and Auto
Ranging. Auto Ranging automatically selects the best range to take the measurement.
If either sensor is auto ranging, this key will force both sensors to hold their present
operating ranges. If either sensor is held within an operation range, this key will force both
sensors to Auto Range.
Note
5-12
Rng Hold is not available when System > Setup > mode is set to Source Sweep. In
this mode, AUTO ranging is used.
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
Front Panel Operation
5-4
Channel Menu
Channel Menu
The Channel menu controls the operation of a display channel. There are two display
channels, Channel 1 and Channel 2. Channel 1 appears at the top of the readout display and
channel 2 at the bottom. If a channel input configuration is turned off, the remaining channel
appears in the centre of the screen.
Note
When editing an entry in a menu, pressing the CLR key clears the digits. If in a
menu screen, pressing the CLR key returns to the previous menu level.
The Channel submenus are as follows:
Setup
The setup menu allows the user to set up the configuration of the display channels. The setup
parameters are:
CHANNEL
Selects the channel to be configured. Toggles between Channel 1 and Channel 2.
INPUT [CHCFG]
This is the sensor, combination of sensors, or rear panel BNC input that is used to
calculate the measured and processed value for this channel. For the ML2437A (single
input) power meter, the available options are A, External Volts, or OFF. For the
ML2438A (dual input) power meter, the options are A, B,
A – B, B – A, A/B, B/A, External Volts, or OFF.
UNITS [CHUNIT]
The units can be dB(m), Watts, dBV, or dBmV. If the External Volts input is selected,
the units are fixed to Volts.
RESOLUTION [CHRES]
The number of decimal places in which the results are displayed in Readout mode, with
certain limitations. If the units selected are in Watts or Volts, and the value goes down
to pW or V, the number of decimal places is forced to zero. If the number to be displayed
is too large for the number of decimal places selected, the decimal places displayed will
be reduced.
MIN/MAX [MNMXS GMNMX]
This selection turns on the Min/Max Tracking for the display channel selected. On the
top line of the data display, when not in menu mode, the min and max of the channel
data (after combination and unit conversion calculations) is displayed. The left hand set
of data is for display channel 1 and the right hand set for display channel 2.
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
5-13
Channel Menu
Front Panel Operation
In Profile mode, the Min/Max is between cursors only, as controlled by selecting
SINGLE or INFINITE through the
System > Graphics > TRACKING menu. SINGLE (default) is the most useful as it
provides a continuously updated readout of the Min/ Max points within the cursor
window. The INFINITE setting is used when the results needs to be collated over a
large number of samples.
Note
Use MIN/MAX to track variations in a measurement over time, or while adjusting
external devices or tuning over frequency.
RESET [MMRST]
This function resets the Min/Max (when ON) for the channel selected.
Rel 1 [REL]
After the relative power level is set by the operator, the Relative mode subtracts that value
from the current measured power. If selected when in Relative mode, the relative operation
for channel one is turned off.
Pressing the Rel 1 soft key when in Readout mode will subtract the last used relative value.
Hold down the key to retake this value. The readout will display 0.00 dBr. This relative value
will be used thereafter until it is replaced by another one in the same manner. This allows the
user to refer to a previously referenced value, without the meter resetting itself back to a 0.00
display.
Rel 2 [REL]
Relative mode control for Channel 2 is labelled Rel 2.
Limits
Pressing the Limits menu soft key displays the test limits for the selected channel. This menu
sets individual high and low pass/fail limits for the two display channels. These limits drive
the PASS/FAIL display flags and the PASS/FAIL TTL output if selected.
In Power vs. Time graphic mode and Readout digital mode, each fail of the limits produce a
separate fail flag and fail beep (if ON) and also drive the rear panel BNC (if enabled) for each
pass or fail reading. In PROFILE mode, each fail of the limits produce a fail beep (if ON) and
hold the fail output if any point in a sweep fails. If FAIL indicator HOLD is ON, both the
screen FAIL indicator and the BNC output are held in the fail state whenever the limits
specified for the channel have been exceeded, regardless of whether the reading subsequently
goes into pass or not. This state remains until FAIL indicator HOLD is turned OFF.
CHANNEL
The limits are set for the selected display channel unit type. The display channel units
selected when the limit was originally set or turned on become the limit units. If the
display channel units are changed, and the limits not altered, limit checking is turned
off for that channel. If the display channel units are subsequently returned to the same
units selected when the limit was entered or turned on, limit checking is turned on
again.
5-14
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
Front Panel Operation
Channel Menu
Whenever the limit units are active, limit checking is applied as follows: If the channel
value is greater than the high limit, and the high limit is turned ON, a FAIL is
indicated. If the channel value is below the low limit, and the low limit is ON, a FAIL is
indicated. Otherwise, if any limit is ON and a FAIL is not detected, PASS is indicated.
HIGH Limit [HLIM]
Sets the high limit. It is not necessary to enter the units as the limit value is checked
against the displayed value. Therefore, if the limits have been set for –10 dBm and the
display units are subsequently changed from dBm to Watts, the system still checks for
the reading to rise above –10, even though the display units type has been changed.
Table 5-4.
High Limit
Units
Min
Max
dBm
-99.99
+99.99
dBmV
-53.00
147.00
dBV
7.00
207.00
Watts
0.0
50.0
Setting a limit value automatically turns on the limit state, except when done via GPIB.
LOW Limit [LLIM]
Sets the low limit. It is not necessary to enter the units as the limit value is checked
against the displayed value.
HIGH State [HLIMS]
Select ON or OFF to enable or disable high limit checking.
LOW State [LLIMS]
Select ON or OFF to enable or disable low limit checking.
FAIL HOLD [FHOLD]
If FAIL HOLD is ON, both the screen FAIL indicator and the BNC output are held in
the fail state whenever the limits specified for the channel have been exceeded,
regardless of whether the reading subsequently goes into pass or not. This state
remains until FAIL HOLD is turned OFF.
BEEP [FBEEP]
If BEEP is ON, and FAIL HOLD is OFF, whenever the limits specified for the channel
have been exceeded, a single beep sounds.
If fail BEEP is ON and FAIL HOLD is ON, whenever the limits specified for the
channel have been exceeded, a beep will sound once every second until FAIL HOLD is
turned OFF, or the CLEAR key (CLR) is pressed.
The FAIL indication is not affected by the CLEAR key, and can only be cleared by
turning FAIL HOLD off. If a limit fail happens again, the alarm will sound again.
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
5-15
Trigger Menu
5-5
Front Panel Operation
Trigger Menu
The Trigger function in the ML243xA allows the user to define under what conditions
measurements are taken, and the time period they are taken over. For instance, the
READOUT mode can be configured to display the average power of the ON period of a square
wave, or an individual slot in a GSM burst.
The Trigger menus are always available in PROFILE operation mode, as selected from the
System menu. If PROFILE cannot be selected within the System > Setup submenu, change
the GPIB mode to ML24XX in the System > Rear Panel submenu.
In READOUT or Power vs. Time modes, the trigger setup menus are available if the channel
input configuration SENSOR > Setup > MODE is set to CUSTOM. A display channel using
more than one sensor (A–B for example) where either sensor is in CUSTOM mode, is assumed
to be in custom mode and can use triggering. Trigger setup is available only for the display
channels that meet the above criteria.
In PROFILE mode, the display shows an ‘x’ marking the trigger point plus the display trigger
delay time, updated for each new set of data. This trigger point mark rotates as the profile
data is updated, changing between '´' and '+' on each data update. On rapid updates, the
trigger point mark may appear like a star (S), as it is rotating so quickly. In manual, external
or GPIB triggered displays, the mark rotates at a slower rate and each true data update can
be seen.
This point can be moved across the x axis by the pre trigger percentage. If the trigger source
is either default, mod average or custom continuous, the trigger point has no meaning since
the system is continuously triggering. The mark does not appear in the Power vs. Time or
Source Sweep modes, as it is not applicable.
Trigger icons indicate the type of triggering selected and appear level with the related
channel on the far left of the screen. Trigger icons are not displayed if the system is in Profile,
Power vs. Time, or Source Sweep operation modes, if all sensors used in a channel input
configuration are in the DEFAULT measurement mode, or if the peakmeter is displayed.
Note
5-16
When editing an entry in a menu, pressing the CLR key clears the digits. If in a
menu screen, pressing the CLR key returns to the previous menu level.
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
Front Panel Operation
Trigger Menu
The trigger icons are shown in the figure below.
Modulated Average
MOD
Continuous
Manual
Rising Edge
Falling Edge
Internal A
INT
A
INT
A
Internal B
INT
B
INT
B
TTL
TTL
External
Figure 5-2.
Note
MAN
Trigger Icons
External trigger is only effective at 800 kHz or lower.
Only when a channel input configuration includes a sensor with a measurement mode that
requires an icon, will an icon be displayed.
Setup
This menu is used to set up the trigger conditions for the display channels. In readout display
mode with sensor mode set to custom, the trigger can be set to display channel 1 and 2
separately, or together as channel 1 & 2.
The channels are triggered simultaneously if the trigger conditions are set to 1 & 2. This
guarantees the trigger conditions are the same, and therefore the readings are taken at the
same time. In Readout and Power vs. Time modes, if the menu is exited with the trigger
selection at channel 1 & 2, this setup is used for trigger control. Otherwise, if the trigger
setup display is left with channel 1 or channel 2 displayed, the individual trigger settings are
used for trigger control.
Note
Simultaneous trigger channels guarantee identical sampling for both channels,
essential for accurate ratio (A/B) measurements.
CHANNEL [TRGMODE]
Select display channel 1 or 2 (or 1&2 when setting trigger conditions in Readout or
Power vs. Time modes).
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
5-17
Trigger Menu
Front Panel Operation
SOURCE [TRGSRC GTSRC]
The trigger sources are CONTINUOUS, Internal A, Internal B (ML2438A only),
EXTTTL, or MANUAL. When the trigger source is set to INT A or INT B (Internal A or
B) the power meter triggers on a rising or falling power level on the associated sensor.
See LEVEL for the setting of the trigger power level.
DELAY [TRGDLY GTDLY]
In Profile mode, DELAY sets the time delay (after the display trigger delay) to when
the system starts to take and display readings, represented by the left most cursor.
Enter 0.0 to 1.0 seconds, in ms or s.
Note
Changing the left most cursor, or the trigger delay time, updates the cursor or the
delay time value accordingly. In Profile mode, moving the cursor only allows
updates to the pixel resolution of the display. In Power vs. Time mode, the delay
and width can be used to alter the update rate.
In Readout mode (CUSTOM sensor mode), the value entered for DELAY is applied
after a trigger event, and before samples are taken. Enter 0.0 to 1.0 seconds, in ms or
s.
WIDTH [TRGGW GTGW]
Enter 100 ns to 7.0 s (the default is 20 ms). In Profile mode, WIDTH is the gate time the
system uses to perform a cursor average measurement. The time interval is
represented by the space between the left most cursor and the right most cursor.
Changing either cursor, or the gate width value, updates both the cursors and the gate
width value.
In Readout mode, this value defines the measurement gate width. A measurement is
presented as the average of all data taken in this gate width.
In Power vs. Time mode, the delay and width can be used to alter the update rate or
sample rate.
Note
The averaging function averages a number of gate WIDTHS, so for a given
averaging number, larger WIDTHS will take longer to AVERAGE. Narrower widths
will average faster (but may yield a less-settled measurement).
EDGE [TRGXTTL GTXTTL]
When set to External TTL, the power meter triggers on a TTL level rising or falling.
This selection sets the trigger for either a rising or falling edge.
5-18
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
Front Panel Operation
Trigger Menu
ARMING [TRGARM GTARM]
Sets the trigger arming, unless the trigger source is set to EXTTTL. When ARMING is
set to Blanking ON, only samples taken when the rear panel Digital Input BNC is
active will be averaged in the measurement. The polarity of the rear panel Digital
Input BNC signal can be set (high or low) using the System > Rear Panel > BNC > TTL
LEVEL menu setting.
Use Arming to synchronize to other equipment or modulation/burst
synchronization. This is a simple way to inhibit measurements during user-defined
periods without entering actual time periods.
Note
When ARMING is set to Blanking OFF, all samples are read irrespective of the level on this
BNC.
-9
GSM BURST
FROM GENERATOR
dBm
-50
BURST TRIGGER SYNC
FROM GENERATOR
TTL
Figure 5-3.
Typical Arming Diagram
1. Connect to the rear panel digital input.
2. Select Trigger > Setup > ARMING > Blanking ON.
3. Set the polarity of the blanking (System menu)
Example power meter reading: –9.16 dBm.
TYPE [TRGTYP GTTYP]
The Type selection (RISE or FALL) sets the trigger for a rising or falling edge. When
the trigger source is set to INTA or INTB (Internal A or B) the power meter triggers on
a power level which is rising or falling.
LEVEL [TRGLVL GTLVL]
The Level selection sets the internal trigger level. When the trigger source is set to
either INTA or INTB (internal sensor A or B) the channel triggers on a power level (in
dBm) given by the sensor. This value must not take any cal factors or offsets that the
meter applies into account.
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
5-19
Trigger Menu
Front Panel Operation
Trig 1
If Trigger Channel 1 SOURCE is set to Manual, this softkey initiates a measurement
for channel 1.
Trig 2
If Trigger Channel 2 SOURCE is set to Manual, this softkey initiates a measurement
for channel 2.
Trig 1&2
If Trigger Channels 1 and 2 SOURCE are set to Manual, this softkey triggers both
channels simultaneously.
Note
The effective range is approximately -30 dBm and is only active in DC ranges 1
and 2.
The following figure shows a typical trigger timing diagram. Note that the display
trigger delay is only present when in Profile operation mode, and helps in setting the
‘window’ position along the signal.
PRETRIGGER %
CURSOR
1
CURSOR
2
GATE
WIDTH
DELAY
INCOMING SIGNAL
FROM SENSOR
DISPLAY TRIGGER DELAY
(PROFILE MODE)
DATA COLLECTION TIME
(PROFILE MODE)
TRIGGER POINT
Figure 5-4.
Sample Trigger in Graphic Mode
The Data Collection Time (collection period) is only present when in Profile operation
mode (System > Profile > PERIOD), and is the period of time displayed on the profile
graph.
The Gate Width is the section of the signal in which the measurements are performed.
In Profile mode, this is the time between Cursor 1 and Cursor 2 and is used to provide
the Between Cursor Average measurement.
Display Trigger Delay (System > Profile > DELAY) is the delay after the trigger point.
5-20
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
Front Panel Operation
Trigger Menu
The Pretrigger % (System > Graphics > PRE TRG%) is only used in the Profile mode,
and shows a percentage of the data collection time as pretrigger information. If the
display trigger delay is less than the pretrigger delay period, there will be no Pretrigger
information as it will be before the trigger point itself.
Setting the display trigger delay to the length of the data pulse causes a trigger on the
first pulse, but displays the second pulse with valid “pretrigger information.” This is the
best method for repetitive signals and can be used to verify signal repetition intervals.
Note
External trigger is only effective at 800 kHz or lower.
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
5-21
System Menu
5-6
Front Panel Operation
System Menu
The System menus control the operating modes, display visibility, sound, rear panel
functions, and battery state of the ML243xA Power Meter. Note that the soft keys will appear
differently depending upon the operation mode selected with the Setup soft key below.
Note
When editing an entry in a menu, pressing the CLR key clears the digits. If in a
menu screen, pressing the CLR key returns to the previous menu level.
Setup
This menu selects the operation mode, allows system setups to be saved or recalled, and
provides two options to reset the system parameters to the default setup.
MODE [OPMD]
Select between Readout, Power vs. Time, Source Sweep and Profile operation modes. If
only Readout is available, check the System > Rear Panel > GPIB > Mode setting. This
setting must be ML24XX for Profile, Power vs. Time and Source Sweep modes to be
available.
Note
When using the ML243xA Series Power Meter with an MA2499A or MA2499B
Sensor Adapter, only Readout and Power vs. Time modes are allowed.
SAVE [*SAV SYSLD SYSRD SYSLNM]
Save the current instrument setup in one of 10 memory locations.
RECALL [*RCL SYSLD SYSRD SYSLNM]
Recall a saved instrument setup from one of 10 memory locations.
LINK [LINK]
There are two trigger conditions saved; one for Profile mode and one for Readout mode.
Normally, Profile mode trigger conditions can be changed without affecting the trigger
conditions used in Readout mode. With LINK set to ON, the Profile mode trigger
conditions are used for both Profile and Readout modes.
In Profile mode, the user can view what is being measured with the selected trigger
conditions, but only over a limited dynamic range, as it only uses the two DC ranges of
the signal channel. Profile mode measurement rate is also limited by sweep speed.
With LINK readout/profile trigger set to ON, switching to Readout mode uses the same
trigger conditions, but allows the full dynamic range of the meter to be used, as well as
providing full GPIB speed on data acquisition.
5-22
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
Front Panel Operation
System Menu
When moving between Readout and Profile modes, with LINK enabled, the value used
for “sample delay” is modified using the “display trigger delay.” In Readout mode, the
“sample delay” and “display trigger delay” values are combined as “sample delay,”
whereas in Profile mode they are both available separately.
Note
With LINK set to ON, Readout mode is temporarily forced to Custom mode, and
the default and Mod Average modes are inhibited. To use these modes, deselect
LINK.
FAST
Fast recall of a saved instrument setup from one of the 10 memory locations. In FAST
system recall mode, a single key press recalls a saved setup. A message across the lower
area of the screen will prompt for keypad keys 1-9, or 0, to be pressed to recall setups
1-10 (if saved setup data is available in the selected location). The -exit- softkey or any
other menu key will exit fast recall mode.
PRESET
Resets the system parameters to the default setup.
RESET [*RST]
This selection will reset the system setup. The offset tables and
the GPIB interface will not be affected.
FACTORY [FRST]
This selection will reset the system setup, including the offset
tables and GPIB interface.
Profile
This soft key becomes available when the System > Setup > MODE is set to Profile. Profile
operation mode includes the following display controls:
CHANNEL [GRMD]
Select Channel 1 or Channel 2. The channel selected will be displayed on the left of the
screen, above the middle value of the y axis and is used for all Profile data displays.
PERIOD [GRPRD]
Sets the time period over which the system collects data and scales the data into the
profile graph after a trigger event. Enter the data collection period in ms or s. See
System > Graphics > Pretrig % to move the t=0 (trigger event position) of the displayed
waveform.
Note
PERIOD sets the x-axis time.
DELAY [DTRGD]
Specifies the period of time after a trigger event to delay the start of the display
window. For the trigger to line up with the marked trigger point on repetitive
waveforms, the delay period should be either zero, or set to integer multiples of 1/PRF
(Pulse Repetition Frequency). Enter the delay period in ms or s.
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
5-23
System Menu
Front Panel Operation
DATA HOLD [GRPIX]
This selects how the graph is displayed on the screen. Select from NORMAL,
Min&Max, Min, or Max. This is useful for tracking peak levels over a period of time or
detecting glitches.
Note
If either Min&Max, Min, or Max is selected, the display will keep the “old” data and
may appear stationary. The DATA HOLD mode in use is displayed on the left of the
screen, below the middle value of the y axis.
With Min & Max selected, the minimum and maximum points for each sample are
shown. If Connect Points is ON (default) (SYSTEM > Graphics > CONNECT), a vertical
bar is drawn between these points. See CLEAR, under CONTROL to restart the
process.
Min displays only the minimum for this sample position until reset by returning to
NORMAL. Max displays only the maximum for this sample position until reset by
returning to NORMAL.
Power vs. Time
This soft key becomes available when the System > Setup > MODE is set to Power vs. Time
mode. Power vs. Time mode displays measurements in a chart-like format showing history
over a period of time. The measurements displayed are taken under the conditions of the
Readout mode, and can therefore include all triggering and correction settings set up in that
mode.
Power vs. Time operation mode includes the following display control:
CHANNEL [GRMD]
Select Channel 1 or Channel 2. The channel selected will be displayed on the left of the
screen, above the middle value of the y axis.
DATA HOLD [GRPIX]
Selects how the graph is displayed on the screen. Select from NORMAL, AVG,
Min&Max, Min, or Max.
TIME [GRDDT]
Sets the data hold time, from 1 minute to 24 hours.
5-24
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
Front Panel Operation
System Menu
Source Sweep
This soft key becomes available when the System > Setup > MODE is set to Source Sweep.
The Source Sweep mode provides interconnection between a signal source/generator and the
power meter. Using simple techniques, this can provide swept power-accurate measurements
over any frequency range at very high speed. The sweep data is available over GPIB and can
provide a simple low cost scalar analyzer function.
Anritsu MG3690 Series Synthesized Sweep Generator
AUX I/O
AUX I/O
- HORIZ OUT (1)
- SEQ SYNC OUT (3)
10 MHz
REF
OUT
FM/ M
IN
HORIZ
OUT
PULSE
TRIG
IN
AM
IN
AM
OUT
PULSE
VIDEO
OUT
10 MHz
REF
IN
FM/ M
OUT
PULSE
SYNC
OUT
ML2430A Series Power Meter
DIGITAL
INPUT 1
ANALOG
INPUT 2
EXT
ALC
IN
SERIAL
I/O
EFC
IN
IEEE-488 GPIB
AUX I/O to BNC Cable
Anritsu 68/69000 Synthesized Sweep Generator
HORIZ
OUT
10 MHz
REF IN
NOTE: USE SLOW BLO FUSES ONLY
10 MHz
REF OUT
!
CAUTION
AUX I/O
HEAVY WEIGHT
110
220V
2.5A
110V
5A
220
> 18 kg
HORIZ
OUT
LINE
SELECT
!
ML2430A Series Power Meter
DIGITAL
INPUT 1
ANALOG
INPUT 2
CAUTION
DO NOT OPERATE
WITH POWER CORD
UNGROUNDED
SEQ
SYNC
OUT
EXT
ALC
IN
INPUT
90 - 132VAC
180 - 264VAC
48 - 440Hz
DWELL
IN
IEEE-488 GPIB
V/GHz
OUT
SEQ
SYNC
OUT
SERIAL
I/O
BNC Cables
Figure 5-5.
Source Sweep Mode Interconnection Example
If the source used does not provide a blanking output, the blanking signal may be disabled as
follows: select System > Rear Panel > BNC. Select PORT until INPUT 1 (digital) is selected,
then select TTL Level to alter the active state of the blanking signal expected. Setting the
TTL Level to LOW will allow the Source sweep to progress without a Blanking signal. This is
useful for third party sources or simple VTO systems. If a Source Sweep is later selected
which does provide a blanking signal, remember to restore the polarity of this signal to HIGH
or an incorrect display will result. Operating a source sweep which has BANDSWITCH
blanking delays in it without an appropriate blanking signal may lead to glitches in the
resulting measurement at the bandswitch points (simple VTO systems do not usually have
bandswitch points).
Note
Anritsu MG3690-series synthesizers provide both HORIZ OUT and SEQ SYNC
OUT signals via the AUX I/O 25 pin D-connector using Anritsu cable part number
806-97. Refer to the signal source manual for rear panel connection details.
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
5-25
System Menu
Front Panel Operation
Source sweep operation mode includes the following display controls:
CHANNEL [GRMD]
Select Channel 1 or Channel 2. The channel selected will be displayed on the left of the
screen, above the middle value of the y axis.
DATA HOLD [GRPIX]
This selects how the graph is displayed on the screen. Select from NORMAL,
Min&Max, Min, or Max.
With Min & Max selected, the minimum and maximum points for each sample are
shown. If Connect Points is ON (SYSTEM > Graphics > CONNECT), a vertical bar is
drawn between these points. Min displays only the minimum for this sample. Max
displays only the maximum for this sample.
Note
If either Min&Max, Min, or Max is selected, the display will keep the “old” data and
may appear stationary. The DATA HOLD mode in use is displayed on the left of the
screen, below the middle value of the y axis.
MODE [SRCMOD]
Source sweep mode: FREQUENCY or POWER.
START [SRCSTFRQ SRCSTPWR]
Sweep start frequency (MHz or GHz) or power (dBm).
STOP [SRCSPFRQ SRCSPPWR]
Sweep stop frequency (MHz or GHz) or power (dBm).
Note
When the power meter is communicating with a signal source/generator over the
serial interface, if the source frequency power level or the frequency itself is
changed, the source sweep display will be updated where appropriate.
Control
The Control menu adjusts cursor position and toggles the readout display in Profile, Power
vs. Time and Source Sweep modes, and provides control over display scaling.
SWAP << >> [CUR]
SWAP selects which cursor to move. The presently selected cursor is defined by a
triangular marker at the top of the cursor line. Press the << soft key to move the
selected cursor left, and the >> soft key to move the selected cursor right. Trigger delay
and Gate Width are related to the cursor positions. This feature aids in measurement of
pulsed signals. Changing either cursor, or adjusting the Gate width value, updates both
the cursors and the gate width value.
When enabled through the System > Sound > CURSOR menu selection, if a cursor is
moved into an illegal space such as the edge of the screen or the end of valid data
(trigger point on the left of the screen) a warning beep will sound.
5-26
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
Front Panel Operation
System Menu
SCALE [GRYT GRYB]
Adjust the Y-axis of the graph using TOP dB Value and BOTTOM dB Value
parameters in the SCALE submenu. AUTO scale is based on the min and max of the
previous sweep.
READOUT [GRDATA GRDRQ]
The supplemental data readout is displayed or removed with the READOUT soft key.
The readout provides display data depending on the graph mode and the data hold type
selected, as shown below.
ACTIVE CURSOR
AVERAGE READING
BETWEEN CURSORS
Figure 5-6.
1 -10.61 dB
2 -12.63 dB
P -0.00 dB
t
8.85 ms
AV -17.41 dB
Sample Readout Display
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
5-27
System Menu
Front Panel Operation
Profile Mode
Data hold = NORMAL:
1
cursor 1 reading
2
cursor 2 reading
△P
Power difference between cursor 1 and cursor 2
△t
Time difference between cursor 1 and cursor 2
AV
Between cursor average if ON
Data hold = MIN (or MAX):
1
cursor 1 minimum reading, or maximum if MAX mode
2
cursor 2 minimum reading, or maximum if MAX mode
△P
Power diff between cursor 1 and cursor 2 minimums
(or maximums if MAX mode)
△t
Time difference between cursor 1 and cursor 2 minimums
(or maximums if MAX mode)
Data hold = MIN&MAX:
1
cursor 1 MIN reading
cursor 1 MAX reading
2
cursor 2 MIN reading
cursor 2 MAX reading
△t
Time difference between cursor 1 and cursor 2
Power vs. Time Mode
Data hold = NORMAL or AVERAGE:
1
cursor 1 reading
2
cursor 2 reading
△P
Power difference between cursor 1 and cursor 2
T1
Time at cursor 1
T2
Time at cursor 2
Data hold = MIN (or MAX):
5-28
1
cursor 1 minimum reading, or maximum if MAX mode
2
cursor 2 minimum reading, or maximum if MAX mode
△P
Power diff between cursor 1 and cursor 2 minimums
(or maximums if MAX mode)
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
Front Panel Operation
T1
Time at cursor 1
T2
Time at cursor 2
System Menu
Data hold = MIN&MAX:
1
cursor 1 MIN reading
cursor 1 MAX reading
2
cursor 2 MIN reading
cursor 2 MAX reading
△t
Time difference between cursor 1 and cursor 2
Source Sweep mode
Data hold = NORMAL or AVERAGE:
1
cursor 1 reading
2
cursor 2 reading
△P
Power difference between cursor 1 and cursor 2
X1
X axis at cursor 1
X2
X axis at cursor 2
Data hold = MIN (or MAX) :
1
cursor 1 minimum reading, or maximum if MAX mode
2
cursor 2 minimum reading, or maximum if MAX mode
△P
Power diff between cursor 1 and cursor 2 minimums
(or maximums if MAX mode)
X1
X axis at cursor 1
X2
X axis at cursor 2
Data hold = MIN&MAX:
1
cursor 1 MIN reading
cursor 1 MAX reading
2
cursor 2 MIN reading
cursor 2 MAX reading
CLEAR [GPRST]
Available in Profile, Source Sweep and Power vs. Time modes when the DATA HOLD
representation selection is not set to NORMAL (or AVERAGE for Power vs. Time).
Pressing the CLEAR key restarts the min/max collection.
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
5-29
System Menu
Front Panel Operation
LINK CURSOR [CURLK]
Links the screen cursors in Profile and Power vs. Time modes so that when one is
moved, both are moved. When the cursors are linked, a horizontal bar is drawn
between them on the screen. If one cursor is moved, the other cursor moves with it to
maintain their relative positions and time interval between them. When the cursors are
linked, the relative time positions are altered by adjusting the gate width in the
TRIGGER > SETUP > WIDTH submenu.
HOLD [HOLD]
In Profile, Power vs. Time, and Source Sweep modes the graph HOLD function allows a
graph to be held and printed. The key action is a toggle action, with the warning
message Graph Display HELD displayed at the top of the screen when HOLD is active.
Whenever measurement setup parameters are changed, graph hold will automatically
be released.
AUTO scale [GRAUTO]
Auto scale for all graphic modes (Profile, Source Sweep and Power vs. Time). In Profile
and Source Sweep modes, auto scale will be based on the min and max of the previous
profile or sweep.
Display
Controls the characteristics of the LCD display.
BACKLIGHT [DBLGHT]
Controls the LCD backlight during internal battery operation. Can be ON, OFF, or
timed to go off after a specified period to save battery life. The backlight is always on
during AC or external DC power operation.
Contrast DOWN [DCONTD, DCONT]
Reduces the display contrast. Adjust to suit ambient conditions.
Contrast UP [DCONTU, DCONT]
Increases the display contrast. Adjust to suit ambient conditions.
TIMED [DBLTIM]
Sets the time limit when the backlight will turn off if the BACKLIGHT setting is set to
TIMED. Enter a value from 0.0 to 100.0 minutes.
5-30
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
Front Panel Operation
System Menu
PEAKMETER [DPEAK]
Turns on the peakmeter display for Sensor A, Sensor B, or both Sensors A and B. The
peakmeter display will eclipse any trigger icons. The peak meter display range covers
12 dB. When above the displayed maximum or below the displayed minimum, the
range is switched by 10 dB in the appropriate direction.
Note that in the event that the channel is displaying an alternative measurement (for
example, external volts from the rear panel BNC) the peak meter will continue to
represent the Sensor A and/or B data. This is useful for monitoring an external voltage
on the meter, while peaking up a response being monitored by a sensor, such as RF
output.
FREQ [FROFF]
Turns FREQuency offset display ON or OFF. When ON, a continuous indication of the
frequency (used for Cal Factor) is displayed in small text at the top of the display along
with any sensor offset (if applied).
TEXT [TEXT, TEXTS]
GPIB user TEXT display ON or OFF. When ON, a user-defined text string can be
displayed at the top of the display area. The text string can only be defined over the
GPIB.
Sound
Controls system sounds.
KEY [KEYCK]
Turns the audible key click on or off.
EDIT [ENTERR]
Turns the audible edit error tone on or off.
LIMIT 1 [FBEEP]
Limit Fail beep on channel 1 on or off.
LIMIT 2 [FBEEP]
Limit Fail beep on channel 2 on or off.
CURSOR
CURSOR out of screen beep. If a cursor is moved into an illegal space, such as the edge
of the screen or the end of valid data, a warning beep is sounded.
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
5-31
System Menu
Front Panel Operation
Print [PRINT]
This selection prints the screen and various operational settings through the rear panel
printer port.
ANRITSU Power Meter ML2437A s/n: 97180010
Firmware: 2.02
Sensor A: NOT FITTED
Sensor Measurement Setup
Measurement mode
Cal factor
Averaging mode & number
Low level averaging
Offset type & value
Settle % per reading
Range hold
Sensor zeroed
Measurement Channel Setup
Trigger
Trigger
Trigger
Trigger
source
sample delay
gate width
arm
1: (A)
2: OFF
Continuous
1.00ms
20.00ms
Blanking OFF
Off
Off
Off
High limit
Low limit
Limits test
1:
Readout
------
Measured value
Figure 5-7.
A:
Default
Frequency (50.00MHz)
Auto
Low
Off
0.10%
Off
No
Sample ML2430A Series Printout
Battery
Controls battery setup when the optional battery pack is installed.
AUTO [BAUTS]
Enables or disables the automatic power off feature. Automatic power off can be used to
conserve battery power when operating from the internal battery.
TIME [BAUTT]
When operating from the internal battery, Time sets the number of minutes that the
instrument will run before powering off in absence of any key activity. Enter a value of
10 to 240 minutes.
5-32
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
Front Panel Operation
System Menu
STATUS
Displays the installed battery type, remaining capacity (%), estimated operating time
remaining (minutes), and the battery’s full charge capacity (mAh).
Note
Immediately after power-on, the “estimated operating time remaining” displayed
may not be genuine, as the battery requires a few minutes to calculate the present
rate of discharge. An accurate indication will be displayed only after a few minutes
of continuous operation.
CHARGE
Available only when the instrument is being powered by AC line power or external DC
power greater than 21 volts. This selection starts the battery charging cycle. Note that
the instrument will shut down during the charging cycle, and restart automatically
when the charging is completed. A series of 10 beeps signals completion of the charge
cycle.
Rear Panel
Controls for rear panel connections are located in the Rear Panel submenu.
GPIB
Sets the GPIB address and emulation modes.
ADDRESS [ADDR]
Set the GPIB address for the power meter. The default is 13.
MODE [EMUL]
Selects the power meter emulation mode. Select from
ML24XX (native), HP436A, HP437B, HP438A, or ML4803A
modes.
BUFFER [BUFF]
If BUFFER Enabled is TRUE (default): In the ML243X
native mode, 488.2 GPIB operation, when a request for data
is made the response is put in an output buffer ready to be
read by the controller. If another data request is made and
the previous data has not been read out of the output buffer;
the new data is queued after the original request. In this
mode of operation the GPIB response buffering enable is
TRUE, and following the 488.2 specifications, the response
should be read when ever a request for data is made. If
BUFFER Enabled is FALSE: In this mode when ever a
request for data is made, (except by serial poll) the output
buffer is cleared and the only data in the output queue will
be the response to the last data request made. The output
buffer is cleared once a valid GPIB data request command
has been recognized.
Note
BUFFER Enabled TRUE is the default. Use FALSE when programming simple
command sequences to read data and you do not want to bother with decoding
status or keeping track of multiple results or readings.
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
5-33
System Menu
Front Panel Operation
RS232
Sets the serial communication parameters.
5-34
MODE [RSMODE]
Selects External Communication or Source IF. External
Communication allows GPIB type commands to be sent to the
power meter over the serial interface from a local computer or
a remote computer via a modem. Source IF allows the power
meter to communicate with an Anritsu synthesizer when the
operation mode is set to Source Sweep.
BAUD [RSBAUD]
Sets the serial port BAUD rate. Select from 1200, 2400, 4800,
9600 (default), 19200, or 38400. The other RS232 serial
parameters are fixed at 8 bits, 1 stop bit, and no parity.
MODEM
This menu controls how a modem will react when the power
meter attempts to connect to a remote computer. It allows
entry of a PHONE number, redial COUNT and redial DELAY,
and permits INITialization of a connected modem.
PHONE number
[MODPH]
The phone number can be up to 40 digits. When the number is
being dialed, a dot (.) will be interpreted as a 2-second delay in
the dialing sequence; a minus sign (–) will be interpreted as
wait for another dialing tone.
Redial COUNT
[MODRED]
If the dialed number does not connect, because it was not
answered or was engaged, then the power meter will try to
redial the same number according to the count specified. This
has a minimum value of 0, maximum value of 10 and default
value of 5.
Redial DELAY
[MODDEL]
If the dialed number does not connect, and is to be redialled,
this value specifies the delay in minutes before redialling. This
has a minimum value of 1 minute, maximum value of 10
minutes and a default value of 5 minutes.
INITialize Modem
[MODINIT]
This is a single shot command to reinitialize a connected
modem. As at power on, if this command is executed with a PC
connected directly to the power meter, then a string of modem
commands will be seen by the PC.
AUTO
Sets up the power meter to autodial if there is a LIMITS test
failure, sensor RANGE error, or the instrument POWER is
cycled.
LIMITS [MODLIM]
If this is set, and the limits fail, then the number specified in
the “phone number” field will be dialed. Remote
communications can then continue as normal.
RANGE [MODRNG]
If this is set, and there is a signal channel range error, then
the number specified in the “phone number” field will be
dialed. Remote communications can then continue as normal.
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
Front Panel Operation
System Menu
POWER [MODPWR]
If this is set, and the power cycles on the meter, then the
number specified in the “phone number” field will be dialed.
When a connection is established, an SRQ will be sent to the
host PC. Remote communications can then continue as
normal.
BNC [OBMD, OBCH, OBVST, OBVSP, OBDST, OBDSP, OBCH, OBPL, OBACM, OBCH,
OBZL, IBBLP]
Configures the input and output rear panel BNC connectors.
PORT
Output 1 or 2: Select the output port to configure (see MODE below).
Input 1
Select what type of Blanking input you are providing (see TTL
LEVEL below) on Input 1.
Input 2
Selects input 2 for V/GHz or External volts input. You cannot
configure the V/GHz or External volts input port here. To configure
V/GHz set Sensor > CalFactor > Source to V/GHz. To use the
External Volts Input set Channel > Setup > Input to EXT V.
MODE
OFF
(output ports only)
(output set to ground) port 1 or 2
Analog OUT
(analog scaled output) port 1 or 2 provides an output voltage
proportional to the measurement.
RF Blanking
(output 2 only) provides a logic level output during the ZERO
process. This can be used to switch off RF from external sources.
PASS/FAIL
port 1 or 2 logic level output
Signal channel
A or B
(port 1 or port 2) provides a real time output from the signal
channel. Being real time, it shows modulation, etc., and is taken
after the signal has been through range amplifiers. It is not directly
proportional to the measurement.
Levelling A or
B
(range 1 or 2) (port 1 or 2). This is similar to the signal channel A or
B outputs, except it connects to range 1 or 2 only of the signal
channel. See below for more information on levelling.
ACMod output
(port 1 only) is a TTL signal synchronized to the internal chopper
(when used) of the signal channel. This signal can be used for
synchronization with external sources or when viewing AC range
(chopped) signals.
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
5-35
System Menu
Levelling
outputs
Front Panel Operation
To allow the power meter to be used in a levelling loop, the signal
channel output is available on the rear panel. The levelling loop will
be broken every time the signal channel autoranges. To overcome
this, the outputs of ranges 1 and 2 can be made directly available on
the rear panel BNC connector. This feature is only available as a
NON DRAWN option. It can be selected from the System > Rear
Pane l >BNC menu - PORT 1 for sensor A and PORT 2 for sensor B.
Levelling A(1) selects range 1 on sensor A. If the hardware is not
available, 0 volts will be set on the appropriate output when
selected.
For signal levels below –25 dBm on a diode sensor, the leveling
outputs will not be valid as the signal channel operates in chopping
mode below this level.
TTL LEVEL
(Input port 1
only)
When in Readout or Power vs. Time operation mode, this selects the
blanking input type, HIGH active or LOW active, you are providing.
The blanking input will be used if the Trigger > Setup > ARMING is
set to Blanking ON and the Sensor > Setup > Mode is set to Custom.
When in Profile operation Mode, the blanking input is ignored.
When in Source Sweep operation Mode, if the Blanking input is set
to HIGH, the ML24xxA uses the digital input to sync to. Your
sweeper must provide a Sequential Sync output which is connected
to the digital input of the meter.
If Blanking input is set to LOW, the ML24xxA does not use the
digital input and therefore can be connected to a sweeper which does
not provide a Sequential Sync output. The ML24xxA will use the
Horizontal Ramp input only.
Printer [PRNSEL]
Configures the rear panel printer port. Select from the listed compatible printers which
include, but are not limited to, the following:
HP DeskJet 340
Canon BJC80
Other 300, 500, 600 Series and later HP printers are typically compatible.
For proper operation with the ML243xA, the Canon BJC80 printer must be set to the
EPSON LQ emulation mode. Refer to the printer manual for instructions on setting the
emulation mode.
Graphics
This menu presents additional graphic display controls:
CONNECT [GRCP]
This control is normally ON and causes the data between samples to be interpolated
and lines drawn between sample points. When OFF, the sample points only are
displayed as pixels.
5-36
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
Front Panel Operation
System Menu
TRACKING [GRTMM]
The number of scans of graph data between resetting the tracked min and max when in
graph mode. Select SINGLE or INFINITE.
Note
These options allow either the min/max of each sweep to be displayed (single) or
the conventional method for tracking variation of levels over an extended period of
time (infinite).
REF LINE [GRFS]
Causes a dotted horizontal line to be drawn at the reference point on the graph screen;
normally OFF.
PRE TRG% [GRPTP]
Percentage of the screen that displays pretrigger information at the best resolution
available. The display shows an ‘x’ marking the trigger point on the time axis.
Data before the actual trigger event is not available. The trigger reference point (x)
indicates the active trigger point after the DELAY setting in the System > Profile
menu. Providing sufficient delay has been set, the PRE TRG% can be used to move this
reference to anywhere on the screen. The amount of valid data displayed before the
trigger reference point is dependent on the System > Profile > DELAY setting.
Secure [SECURE]
Normally OFF. When the system is powered on the ML243xA returns to the state it was in
when it was powered off. This includes all of the offset tables, calibration adjust values, etc.
If Secure is set to Clear memory, non-volatile memory is disabled and all stored values are
reset to the factory defaults when the system is powered on. As long as this selection is set to
Clear memory, the system will load the presets (see Appendix A, Section A-3) every time it is
turned on.
Identity [*IDN, OI]
This selection will display the installed firmware version, the instrument serial number, and
the instrument type (model number).
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
5-37
Cal/Zero Menu
5-7
Front Panel Operation
Cal/Zero Menu
The Cal/Zero menu establishes the 0.0 dBm reference calibration and zeroing of the sensors.
Refer to Chapter 5 for specific procedures.
Zero/Cal
This function zeros and then sets the 50 MHz, 0.0 dBm reference of the connected sensor. In
dual sensor systems with both sensors connected, sensor A or B must be selected.
Cal 0 dBm [CAL]
References the connected sensor to 0.0 dBm at 50 MHz. In dual sensor systems with both
sensors connected, sensor A or B must be selected.
Zero [ZERO]
Zeros the connected sensor. Zeroing a power sensor compensates for noise and thermal EMF
of the device under test. It is recommended prior to taking important power readings in the
bottom 20 dB of a power sensor’s dynamic range. In dual sensor systems with both sensors
connected, sensor A or B must be selected.
RF ON/OFF [RFCAL]
Turns the RF calibrator ON or OFF.
Ext V [VZERO]
Zeros the rear panel multi-purpose BNC connector used for Volts per GHz connection (Analog
Input). This will calibrate the units to read zero volts on this BNC. During this operation the
connector should either not be connected to anything, or should be connected to a 0 Volt
source.
The rear panel voltage can be viewed by selecting CHANNEL > INPUT > VOLTS, although
this does not have to be selected in order for the function to operate.
This calibration is non-volatile and does not normally need to be performed. In the case of
offsets being introduced by the user’s setup, it is possible to leave the BNC cable connected to
zero out system offsets, however the offset zero range is limited to approximately 100 mV.
5-38
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
Chapter 6 — Procedures
This chapter presents some common procedures for use with the ML243xA Power Meter.
These procedures refer to the ML243xA front and rear panel connectors and front panel keys
and menus as explained in Chapter 3, Connections, and Chapter 4, Front Panel Operation.
The operator should be familiar with the front and rear panel layouts and with the use of the
keys and menus before attempting these procedures.
6-1
Power Measurement
To perform a power measurement, follow these steps:
1. Connect the sensor(s) as described in Chapter 3, Connections.
2. Configure the meter for the application. Refer to Chapter 4, Front Panel Operation, for
specific configuration options. The simplest operation is obtained with SENSOR >
SETUP > MODE set to DEFAULT. Power readings are continuous with the default
setting.
3. Zero the sensor(s) as described below.
4. Calibrate the sensor(s) as described on the following page.
5. Measure power.
6-2
Zeroing the Sensor
Zero the sensor before making power measurements, particularly when operating within the
lower 20 dB dynamic range of the power sensor. If frequent low level measurements are being
made, it is advisable to zero the sensor regularly.
To zero the sensor, connect it to the UUT (Unit Under Test) test port, and remove RF power
from the connection to a level 20 dB below the tangential noise floor of the power sensor. For
–70 to +20dBm dual-diode power sensors, this level is less than –100 dBm.
It is preferable to leave the sensor connected to the UUT test port so that ground noise and
thermal EMF are zeroed out of the measurement. Alternately, in order of preference, the
sensor can be connected to:
• A grounded connector on the UUT,
• The ML243xA Calibrator connector,
• Disconnected from any signal source.
When a new sensor is attached, the message SENSOR x NOT ZEROED (where x = A or B as
appropriate) is displayed. If a sensor is removed and then reconnected, the message is not
displayed.
The sensor can either be zeroed, or zeroed and calibrated in the same operation.
To zero the sensor without calibration, press the Cal/Zero front panel key and the Zero soft
key, then select the appropriate sensor.
Note that if only one sensor is connected, the A-B selection is not displayed and the zeroing
process begins immediately.
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
6-1
Sensor Calibration
Procedures
The message changes to SENSOR x ZERO. On successful completion of the zeroing operation,
the buzzer sounds. Sensor calibration should be performed next.
If the sensor fails the zeroing operation, the message SENSOR x ZERO fail nxnnn is
displayed. The hexadecimal error code 'nxnnn' indicates the detailed reason for the failure,
which is usually due to excessive RF noise.
The sensors can also be zeroed using the GPIB ZERO command (see Chapter 6, “GPIB
Operation”).
6-3
Sensor Calibration
Referencing power sensors to the ML243xA 50 MHz, 0.0 dBm calibrator is recommended.
Sensors should be zeroed before being calibrated, either as a separate operation or in
conjunction with calibration.
To reference the sensor, connect the sensor to the ML243xA 50 MHz, 0.0 dBm reference
output connector labelled CALIBRATOR or another 50 MHz, 0.0 dBm reference.
When the sensor is first attached, the message SENSOR x NOT ZEROED (where x = A or B
as appropriate) is displayed. Perform the sensor zeroing procedure described in Section 5-3 to
zero the sensor.
To calibrate the sensor after zeroing, press the Cal/Zero front panel key and the Cal 0 dBm
soft key, then select the appropriate sensor.
Note that if only one sensor is connected, the A-B selection is not displayed and the zeroing
process begins immediately.
On successful completion of the calibration operation, the buzzer sounds.
If the sensor fails the calibration operation, the message SENSOR x CAL 0 dBm invalid is
displayed.
Any error conditions encountered during calibration, for example the presence of extraneous
noise or RF signals, will result in an error message on the front panel display.
The sensors can also be calibrated using the GPIB CAL command (see Chapter 6, GPIB
Operation).
Note
6-4
When a Universal Power Sensor with option 1 fitted is changed from T-RMS mode
to F-CW mode the user should perform a new zero/cal.
Sensor Zero/Cal
Sensors must be zeroed before being calibrated. The Zero/Cal function completes both
operations in sequence.
To zero and calibrate the sensor, connect the sensor to the ML243xA 50 MHz, 0.0 dBm
reference output connector labelled CALIBRATOR.
When the sensor is first attached, the message SENSOR x NOT ZEROED (where x = A or B
as appropriate) is displayed.
Press the Cal/Zero front panel key and the Zero/Cal function key, then select the appropriate
sensor. The message changes to SENSOR x ZERO. Note that the power meter automatically
switches the reference calibrator OFF during the zeroing operation.
6-2
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
Procedures
Performance Verification
If only one sensor is connected, the A-B selection is not displayed and the zeroing process
begins immediately.
On successful completion of the zeroing operation, the calibration process begins.
On successful completion of the calibration operation, the buzzer sounds and the message is
cleared.
If the sensor fails either operation, the message SENSOR x ZERO fail nxnnn or Sensor x Cal
fail nxnnn is displayed. The hexadecimal error code 'nxnnn' indicates the reason for the
failure.
The sensors can also be zeroed and calibrated using GPIB commands (see Chapter 6,” GPIB
Operation”).
6-5
Performance Verification
The performance of the power meter’s individual signal channel inputs can be verified using
an Anritsu Range Calibrator. Contact your Anritsu Customer Service representative for more
information.
6-6
Printer Connection
See Chapter 3, Connectors, for the location of the parallel port connector on the rear panel.
Connect a parallel printer cable from the ML243xA rear panel 25-pin D-sub connector to the
printer.
Select System > Print to begin printing. See Chapter 4, Front Panel Operation, for specific
printer connector configuration options.
Printing can also be initiated in ML24XXA (native) mode using the GPIB PRINT command.
6-7
GPIB Remote Operation
The ML243xA Power Meter can be operated remotely through a General Purpose Interface
Bus (GPIB) connection to a host computer/controller. See Chapter 3, Connectors, for the
location of the GPIB connector. The GPIB connector is configured through the System > Rear
Panel > GPIB submenu. See Chapter 4, Front Panel Operation, for specific GPIB connector
configuration options that can be set from the front panel. Refer to Chapter 7, GPIB
Operation, for a listing of the available GPIB commands.
If the ML243xA is addressed, and the Remote Enable and Local Lockout (REM and LLO)
lines are not set, the front panel menus are still available, even if the unit is communicating.
As long as the ML243xA is GPIB addressed, the GPIB status box will be displayed on the
front panel whether the remote line is set or not.
If the GPIB box is on the screen and the system is not in a menu screen, and the system is in
local mode (menus available), and no GPIB operations are pending, then pressing the CLR
key clears the GPIB box off the screen.
Note
GPIB remote operation is not available when the ML243xA Series Power Meter is
operating from the internal battery.
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
6-3
Serial Remote Operation
6-8
Procedures
Serial Remote Operation
The ML243xA Power Meter can be operated remotely through the rear panel serial connector
(See Chapter 3, Connectors, for the location of the serial connector). Whereas GPIB has
restrictions on total cable length and cable length between instruments, RS232 serial
communication is not as limited. The GPIB can also be prone to electrical interference and is
not easily electrically isolated, while RS232 can be isolated using optical couplers. Serial
interface remote operation can be useful if the testing is to be done in the presence of high
electrical fields and like environments.
While most standard serial cables will suffice, a 9-pin null-modem serial interface cable is
available from Anritsu as an optional accessory (part number 2000-1544). Note that the
hardware handshake CTS and RTS lines are used to control the flow of data in and out of the
power meter and must be available in the cable as hardware handshaking is always enabled.
The DTR and DSR lines are connected together within the meter.
Note
Table 6-1.
Serial interface remote operation is not available when the ML243xA Series Power
Meter is operating from the internal battery.
ML243xA Power Meter Serial Connector Pinouts
PIN
SIGNAL
1
NOT USED
2
RX data
3
TX data
4
DTR handshake signal
5
signal ground
6
DSR handshake signal
7
RTS handshake signal
8
CTS handshake signal
9
NOT USED
The serial interface baud rate can be set using the System > Rear panel > RS232 menu
selection or the RSBAUD command. Available baud rates are: 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600
(default), 19200, and 38400. Other parameters are predefined as: 8 bits, no parity and 1 stop
bit and cannot be changed.
Commands are entered as with the GPIB interface, conforming to the command format for
the operation (emulation) mode selected. All GPIB commands are supported. There are some
additional commands, specific to the serial interface, that are prefixed with an exclamation
mark (!). In the emulation modes, when running under GPIB, the measured data is always
available when the meter has been addressed to talk. In serial mode, the meter cannot be
addressed to talk, but measurement data can still be obtained by using the GPIB trigger
commands TR1 and TR2 in the HP437 and HP438 emulation modes, and T and I in the
HP436 emulation mode.
All GPIB type commands and command strings should be terminated with a new line
character (0A hex). The special serial mode commands do NOT require a termination
character.
6-4
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
Procedures
RS232 Modem Support
Requested data is returned in the same format as with GPIB, but with a preceding 'R' and a
terminating new line character. SRQs are available, and are output as SRQ message 'S'
followed by a terminating new line character. When the SRQ message has been received, an
"!SPL" command (equivalent to the GPIB serial poll) can be issued. The power meter will
respond with the serial poll data message which is a single character preceded by 'P' and
terminated by a new line character.
A device clear message !DCL can be sent to clear the power meter input and output message
queues, and terminate any GPIB or serial actions pending.
At power on, factory reset, in response to the MODINIT command, and after the INIT key in
the modem menu is pressed, the following sequences will be output:
1. +++ath\r\r
2. at&h1&r2x4v1q0f1s0=1e0\r\r
There will be a delay between the two sequences.
These sequences will initialize an attached Hayes-compatible modem. This is the only type of
modem supported.
Note
6-9
It is recommended that there is only one serial command in each command string.
Terminate each command with a newline character.
RS232 Modem Support
The ML243xA Power Meter can be operated remotely through a modem connected to the rear
pane serial connector (See Chapter 3, Connectors, for the location of the serial connector)
using the GPIB/RS232 command set. The menu selection System > Rear panel > RS232 >
MODE must be set to EXT COMMS.
To initiate communications with the power meter from a remote computer, communications
must be established between the two modems. Once this is done, the modems become
transparent to the user, and GPIB/RS232 commands can be entered as if the power meter is
connected directly to the remote computer.
The power meter can also be configured to automatically dial a specified number if one or
more predetermined error conditions are met.
When an instrument state change occurs that initiates an AUTODIAL sequence, the power
meter will send an escape sequence "+++" to the modem. It will then output commands to
determine if there is a modem connected and, if there is, whether it is connected through to
another modem. If a modem is found and it is not connected to a remote modem, the power
meter will dial the number specified in the "phone number" field. When the connection to the
remote computer is established, the power meter will send the serial SRQ message.
When an autodial sequence is initiated, different sets of characters will be seen on the remote
PC depending on what is connected to the power meter serial port.
Note
Serial interface remote operation is not available when the ML243xA Series Power
Meter is operating from the internal battery.
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
6-5
RS232 Modem Support
Table 6-2.
Procedures
Character Sequences
Connected Device
Character Sequence
Computer connected directly
"+++at\r\rS\n"
Modem offline from phone network
Sequence will be seen if remote connection
established
modem status data followed by "S\n"
Modem connected through to remote computer
"+++S\n"
GPIB/RS232 Modem Commands
The following table lists the GPIB/RS232 Modem Commands and the special serial interface
only commands:
Table 6-3.
Command
Modem and Special Serial Interface Commands
Parameter
Definition
!BYE
RS232-type command only, allows the remote PC to
instruct the power meter to tell its local modem to
hang-up. This ensures that when communication is
completed, the modems at both ends of the line can
be disconnected and the telephone line released.
!DCL
RS232 type command only. Clears all buffered
GPIB/RS232 messages waiting to be processed.
Clears all buffered GPIB/RS232 data waiting to be
output. Stops any pending actions.
!SPL
RS232 type command only. Allows a GPIB type
serial poll to be requested in response to an SRQ
from the power meter. This will return the instrument
status register and clear the SRQ bit within that
register. The *CLS command should be used to clear
the rest of the register.
MODDEL
<value>
Modem redial delay time, 1 to 10 minutes (default =
5 min.)
MODINIT
Initialize connected modem
MODLIM
<TRUE | FALSE>
Autodial enable for limits failure
MODPH
<string>
Phone number - up to 40 characters
MODPWR
<TRUE | FALSE>
Autodial enable for power on
MODRED
<value>
Modem redial count, 0 to 10 (default = 5)
MODRNG
<TRUE | FALSE>
Autodial enable for range failure
The RS232-type commands (!BYE, !SPL and !DCL) do NOT require terminating. All other
commands or command strings require a new line character to terminate.
Refer to the System Menu explanation in chapter 4 for information on using the front panel
menus to configure modem operation. Refer to Native GPIB Commands in chapter 6, for
information on using GPIB commands to configure modem operation.
6-6
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
Procedures
RS232 Modem Support
Modem Compatibility and Commands
The ML243xA Power Meter firmware supports Hayes-compatible modems. The commands
used are as follows:
Table 6-4.
Modem Compatibility Commands
Command
Definition
+++
modem escape sequence
atz
reset modem to factory defaults
at&h1&r2x4v1q0f1s0=1e0
initialize modem for power meter use
atd “number”
dial “number”
Serial Interface Remote Operation Example
This section presents an example of Autodial using a terminal emulator on a remote
computer ( \n = newline, \r = carriage return).
1. Initialize local modem, using the same setup as the power meter:
at&h1&r2x4v1q0f1s0=1e0\r
&h1
transmit data flow control - use CTS
&r2
receive data flow control - use RTS
x4
full result code setting
v1
result codes in verbal mode
q0
result codes displayed
f1
local data echo OFF
s0=1
auto answer after 1 ring
e0
local command echo off
The modem should respond:
OK\n\r
2. Dial power meter:
atd<phone number>\r
When the modem finally connects to the power meter modem, the response will be:
CONNECT\n\r
There might be additional information after “CONNECT” but before the line
termination characters.
3. The remote computer is now connected to the power meter. The power meter can now be
asked to identify itself:
*IDN?\n
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
6-7
RS232 Modem Support
Procedures
The response from an ML2438A operating in native mode will be:
RANRITSU,ML2438A,<serial number>,<firmware version>
4. To set a limit for channel 1 and to have the power meter autodial a remote computer
when this limit fails, send the following sequence:
LLIM 1,-12DBM
Sets low limit on channel 1 to -12dBm
LLIMS 1,ON
Turn low limit testing ON for channel 1
MODLIM ON
Set meter to autodial when any limits fail
MODPH <phone
number>
Set phone number to be auto-dialed
MODRED 3
Set redial count to 3
MODDEL 2
Set delay between each attempt to dial to 2 min.
5. Disconnect from power meter and wait for limit failure:
!BYE
Instruct power meter to hang-up its modem
Wait at least 1 second.
+++
wait at least another second.
The local modem will now respond:
OK\n\r
The local modem can now be told to hang up using the command:
ATH0\r
Again the local modem will respond
OK\n\r
6. When a limits failure occurs, the power meter will instruct its modem to dial the
previously set up phone number. As the connection is being established through to the
remote computer, a sequence of status messages will be reported by the modem to the
computer, ending with a final message of:
CONNECT\n\r
There might be additional information after “CONNECT” but before the line
termination characters.
7. After connection has been established, the power meter will send an SRQ to the remote
computer. The SRQ message is:
S\n
To determine what has caused the SRQ, the status register in the power meter must be
read. The status register in the meter is an 8-bit register. There are two ways to do this.
6-8
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
Procedures
RS232 Modem Support
a. Read the status register using the equivalent of a GPIB serial poll. Send the
message:
!SPL
Note
There is NO terminator to this message.
The power meter will respond:
Px\n
x is the ASCII character determined by the value in the meter status register.
x = “B” gives a status register value of 01000010 binary. Comparing this with the status
byte description in Section 6-7 of the manual will show that the SRQ and limits error
bits are both set.
b. Alternatively the status register can be read directly using the command:
*STB?\n
This will respond:
Ry\n
y can be up to 3 digits and is the decimal representation of the status register.
y="66" gives a status register value of 01000010 binary. Comparing this with the status
byte description in section 6-7 of the manual will show that the SRQ and limits error
bits are both set.
Once the status register has been read, it must be cleared to allow further SRQ
messages to be sent. Before the status register is cleared, further autodial actions
(limits failure or sensor range error) should be disabled to prevent any unnecessary
autodial attempts by the meter when already connected to a remote PC. To clear the
status register, use the command:
*CLS\n
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
6-9
Profile Operation Mode
6-10
Procedures
Profile Operation Mode
The ML243xA Power Meter can be used to view signals in Profile, Readout, Power vs. Time
and Source Sweep modes. This section describes setting up and viewing signals in the Profile
mode. Profile mode allows the viewing of a single channel (1 or 2 as set up in the Channel
menu) plotted against time.
To view the time profile of a signal, enter the PROFILE mode via SYSTEM > SETUP >
MODE (toggles through READOUT, PROFILE and Power vs. Time). Parameters needed to
set up a PROFILE display are:
Note
To operate the Universal power sensors in profile mode Option 1 must be fitted.
Activate option 1 mode before selecting profile mode under the SENSOR > Setup
OPTION FAST CW menu.
1. TRIGGER > SETUP provides access to a special TRIGGER configuration options. The
default mode is CONTINUOUS which provides for a non-synchronized, oscilloscope
type display. This type of display is useful for general monitoring of a signal and
showing its variation over time. The settings for the DELAY and gate WIDTH provide
the points at which the measurement is triggered and read out of the cursor. The other
options are similar to other triggering modes.
2. SYSTEM > PROFILE sets up the channel (1 or 2) to be displayed and the time-axis, as
well as the way that the data is displayed (for example, monitoring the minimum or
maximum data over time). Note that in all cases, the PROFILE > CHANNEL selection
(1 or 2) relates to a measurement channel set up in the CHANNEL menu, not directly
to the A or B sensors.
Note
If the DATA HOLD mode is set to display min or max data, as opposed to the
default (NORMAL), the display will continue to track the min/max until the DATA
HOLD mode is returned to NORMAL.
3. SYSTEM > CONTROL provides control over the readout and CURSORs as well as the
scaling of the display. From the CURSOR menu (using the << and >> arrows) the
positions of the readout cursors can be adjusted. The cursors directly relate to the
DELAY and gate WIDTH parameters in the TRIGGER > SETUP menu, but allow for
visual movement of the parameters on the display itself. The TRIGGER > SETUP
menu requires direct entry of the actual parameters when the timing criteria is known.
Note
Dynamic range is limited in Profile mode to DC ranges only. For maximum dynamic
range, measured signals need to be repetitive (not single-shot) when profiling over
less than 30 ms width. For collection periods longer than 30 ms, single-shot
profiles can be measured over the full dynamic range.
Typical Setup
A typical situation with no triggering (CONTINUOUS):
1. Select SYSTEM > SETUP > PRESET to reset the instrument to the standard default
conditions (see Appendix B for a listing of the system defaults).
6-10
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
Procedures
Profile Operation Mode
2. Connect sensor A to the signal source.
3. Select SYSTEM > SETUP and press MODE to select PROFILE.
4. Press CLR or any other menu key to return to the display screen. The display now
shows a power profile of sensor A on channel 1.
5. Press SYSTEM > CONTROL to get access to the cursor. Press << and >> to move the
selected cursor, and SWAP to select the other cursor.
Note
With a CONTINUOUS trigger such as this, there will most likely not be specific
points of interest, so the movement of the cursors is rather arbitrary.
If modulation is applied to the signal, or its power level altered, the signal should
change on the display. The signal may not be visible if it is not in the default range
which covers +20 to –50 dBm.
Scaling
In the example above, if the measured power signal is not visible because the power is too
high or low, the scaling can be altered as follows:
1. Press SYSTEM > CONTROL > more > SCALE. There are now soft keys for TOP and
BOTTOM dB levels, referring to the top and bottom of the screen, and AUTO SCALE,
which will optimize the displayed graph.
2. Enter new values so that the measured power signal is visible. The TOP value must
always be higher than the BOTTOM value.
3. When finished, press another soft key or CLR to return to the display.
Cursor Readout
To display the CURSOR READOUT box on the screen, press SYSTEM > CONTROL > more >
READOUT. This is a toggle action and will display or remove the cursor data readout box
from the display.
The readout shows a digital representation of data at the two cursor positions on the
currently displayed channel, along with the differences in power (D p) and time (D t). The
value of D p represents the selected cursor reading minus the other cursor reading, and D t
represents the time difference between the two cursors. If SENSOR > AVERAGING >
between CURSOR averaging is on, the average reading between the cursors is displayed at
the bottom of the readout.
Note
If continuous trigger is selected, or the display is changing while trying to read the
readout, select TRIGGER > MANUAL to stop the display update. The readouts are
updated whenever the signal trace is updated, or if the cursors are moved. It is
possible to link the movement of the cursors so they move at the same time. This
is useful if measurements need to be taken at specific times between the cursors,
as with channelled signals.
To link the cursors, select SYSTEM > CONTROL > more > more > LINK CURSR. When the
cursors are linked, a line is drawn on the display connecting the two cursors and they will
move together as one. This is discussed more fully in the Triggered Measurements section
below.
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
6-11
Profile Operation Mode
Procedures
Range Hold may be selected to limit dynamic range and prevent small range change
disturbances on very high speed signals. Use Range Hold 1 for measurements down to -25
dBm, and Range Hold 2 up to –10 dBm. If the display update is turned off via GPIB, only the
average is updated.
Triggered Measurements
Since non-triggered measurements are of limited use in the PROFILE mode, most
applications require triggering. For example:
1. Provide a 1 kHz square wave modulated signal to sensor A, and set TRIGGER > SETUP
> MODE to Internal A (Int A). This causes the PROFILE sweep to wait until a certain
power level is present on the sensor before starting the sweep.
2. The DELAY and WIDTH parameters, as discussed above, are the positions of the two
CURSORS. These can be set to specific locations; for example, if the signal is a 1 kHz
square wave, setting the DELAY to 250 µs places the cursor in the first cycle at the
midpoint of one of the phases. Setting the WIDTH to 500 µs sets the other CURSOR to
exactly one half-cycle later, thus allowing display of the power levels in the two phases
of the signal.
Note
If the modulation is turned off, then the trigger conditions will not be met and the
sweep will not continue to be updated. This is useful to ‘freeze’ a display. To
display a CW signal again, re-select CONTINUOUS trigger in TRIGGER > SETUP
> MODE.
Note
In some conditions, it is useful to view triggered signals independent of signal
levels. In these cases, provide an external trigger source into the rear panel
TRIGGER input to trigger such a measurement.
3. The dynamic range in PROFILE mode is limited to the top two ranges (the DC ranges)
of the meter. The lowest measurable power is approximately –40 dBm (diode sensors
only). If the displayed range is restricted, check that RANGE HOLD is not applied.
Note
If RANGE HOLD 1 is applied, the lower limit will be approximately –30 dBm. If
RANGE HOLD 2 is applied, the maximum level will be limited to approximately –10
dBm. In most triggered situations, range hold should be set to AUTO.
Note
The unique method of range changing applied in this mode means that the change
between range 1 and 2 is effected in less than 2 ms. In most cases it is not
noticeable, although there may be a slight discontinuity visible when using very
small collection periods.
Note
Due to the range-change method, if a triggered signal is not repetitive the range
change may not settle instantly, and the displayed result may be in error. This is
generally true for x-axis times of less than 6 ms where it takes more than one pass
to completely update the display.
6-12
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
Procedures
Profile Operation Mode
Control of x-axis - Width of Profile - Sample Time
The control of the time-frames over which the PROFILE is gathered is very precise, but there
are certain restrictions. With care it can be used to display the profile of signals down to
typically 100 ns or better.
1. Select SYSTEM > PROFILE. The first two items in the menus have already been
covered (selection of channel 1 or 2, and the method of display, min max). The last two
selections control the data collection PERIOD (the time span of the window). The
default period is 10 ms, and it can be adjusted down to 100 ns and below. If you are still
displaying the 1 kHz square wave, enter a period of 3 ms. The display will zoom in to
show more detail of the pulses.
Note
Thermal sensors have rise and fall times of <15 ms. Do not use a thermal sensor
for fast signal profiles. Typical MA2470A and MA2440A Series sensors have rise
times of <4 µs. Fall time is typically <10 µs, except at low power levels. Consider
this when looking at fast signals.
2. Note that the cursors have remained at their set positions in time, that is, when altering
the time axis the cursors stay at their set positions in terms of time - NOT POSITION
ON THE SCREEN. This is very important when measuring specific points or peaks in a
signal.
3. By altering the DELAY parameter, the PROFILE can be made to look at a segment of
time long after or very close to the trigger point. That is, by setting the DELAY to
100 ms, the PROFILE will show the 100th pulse (and onwards) of a 1 kHz square wave.
By setting to ZERO, the profile will show data immediately after the trigger has
occurred. This is the DISPLAY TRIGGER DELAY and is denoted by a small ‘x’ on the
PROFILE display. This marks the point on the display where data is taken at the time
DISPLAY TRIGGER DELAY is placed. For example, for the 1 kHz square wave, the
pulse edge would occur at the ‘x’ point whenever the DISPLAY TRIGGER DELAY is a
multiple of 1 ms. The x-axis nomenclature always denotes this point with a time of
ZERO (t=0), this allows the user to always consider time intervals relative to the
display trigger which is usually the point of interest.
Note
For smaller values of display trigger delay, it is possible that the display will cover
time intervals (on the left of the display) for which there is no data. In these
conditions, the cursors are normally prevented from displaying data taken there as
it will be in error (there is no data). The position of ‘x’ is nominally 10 % of the
screen. This can be altered to any percentage the user requires in the
SYSTEM > more > more > GRAPHICS preferences menu as the PRETRIGGER
percentage. It can also be set to ZERO to remove pretrigger data and prevent
confusion in cases of small display trigger delays.
Profile can display A, B, or A–B measurements. Note that in the case of a ratioed
measurement (A–B), the data is calculated as a straight dB difference (not a
LINEAR mw difference). This is not the same as a MODULATED POWER
AVERAGE measurement.
4. As well as the CURSOR readouts described above, the POWER AVERAGE method can
be used to display the average power between the two cursors. This is performed as a
TRUE AVERAGE and is the actual average of all the data points between and
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
6-13
Profile Operation Mode
Procedures
including the cursors. By placing the cursors on the top of a pulse, the flat top power
can be measured. By placing the cursors with a period of the pulse, the average power
of the pulse is calculated. This is more accurate than a simple duty cycle calculation
which makes assumptions about the pulse shape. Use the SENSOR > AVERAGE menu
to enable this readout method.
Note
The display resolution is 200 pixels. Consider this effect on the resolution of timing
data. For example, a 1 millisecond PROFILE window would have a cursor
resolution on the display of 5 microseconds.
The LIMITS test functions on PROFILE data, and can be configured to BEEP on
fail conditions.
Advanced Triggering and Setup Options
The other aspects of triggering allow for fine tuning of the trigger conditions. This includes:• Selection of HIGH or LOW going edge in External TTL.
• Level setting on Internal A or B trigger, as well as polarity - HIGH or LOW going.
• ARMING via an External BLANKING input. When ARMING is set to Blanking ON,
only samples taken when the rear panel Digital Input BNC is active will be averaged in
the measurement. The polarity of the rear panel Digital Input BNC signal can be set
(high or low) using the System > Rear Panel > BNC > TTL LEVEL menu setting. When
ARMING is set to Blanking OFF, all samples are read.
• In the SYSTEM > more > more > GRAPHICS menu, there are options for:
(a) CONNECT points. With this ON (default) the data points are connected with vectors to
resemble a real time trace. When OFF, the data points are displayed as data points only, with
no connecting line. This can give a faster display update, however, it may be confusing as
near vertical lines will have very few points defined within them.
(b) If Tracking min/max is selected for the CHANNEL being used for the PROFILE, it is
possible to configure the tracking min/max to display the min and max values for all the data
BETWEEN THE CURSORS. This provides easy access to peak values within a time-window;
for example, the top of a pulse.
When set to SINGLE it is updated EACH SWEEP and reflects the min and max values only
within that sweep.
When set to INFINITE, it maintains the min/max from the point it is started until it is reset,
updating the MAX if it sees a HIGHER measurement within the CURSOR window, and
updating the MIN readout if or when it sees a lower value than that which it has already.
This option, in the SYSTEM menu, is only a preferences option and not the main control for
the feature.
6-14
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
Procedures
Source Sweep Mode
The control for the min/max remains in the CHANNEL menu (CHANNEL > SETUP>-more->
MIN/MAX > RESET). The user should select the way he wants to work and leave it. In most
cases the SINGLE (default) is the most useful as it provides a continuously updated readout
of the min and max points within the cursor window. The INFINITE setting is used when the
results need to be collated over a large number of samples. In order to RESET the INFINITE
configuration, use the CHANNEL menu.
Note
6-11
In the triggered modes, such as Internal A or B and External TTL, the SENSOR >
SETUP > Range HOLD feature can still be applied to restrict dynamic range if
required.
Source Sweep Mode
This feature allows the ML243xA Power Meter to be synchronized to an RF source using the
Horizontal ramp (to Analog Input) output on the RF source. The ML243xA can also optionally
use a Sequential Sync (to Digital Input) output on the RF source.
To enable the Seq Sync input for RF sources that do provide this output (the default), set the
System > Rear Panel > BNC > Input Port 1 > TTL LEVEL to HIGH. This way the device will
use both the Horizontal Ramp and Seq Sync inputs to sync to the sweep.
To disable the Seq Sync input for RF sources that do not provide this output, set the System >
Rear Panel > BNC > Input Port 1 > TTL LEVEL to LOW. This way the device will only use
the Horizontal Ramp to sync to the sweep.
Frequency Sweep Mode
When the sensor/cal factor source is set to V/GHz in Source Sweep mode, the start and stop
voltages are assumed to be 0 and 10V, and the start and stop frequencies are taken from the
System > Source sweep menu.
Calibrate the V/GHz setup by setting 0 and 10v and the frequencies (F1 and F2) that these
voltages correspond to (sweep width). This method activates real-time cal factor correction on
a swept basis (including any user cal factor tables) providing swept power measurements.
Note that V/GHz output should not be used, as this limits the range of the signal applied to
the meter when sweeping narrow widths. The fixed 0-10V ramp should be used to ensure
correct sweep operation.
In normal operation, leave the CalFactor > SOURCE set to V/GHz as this instructs the meter
to apply cal factor correction proportional to the input ramp, and ensures that the whole
sweep of data is cal factor corrected in real time at every data point. If the CalFactor > Source
is set to Manual or Frequency, a single frequency cal factor will be applied through the sweep
(or a manually entered value). This may be useful for some applications where the sweep
signal is used for others purposes (for example, power sweep, etc.).
Power Sweep Mode
In this mode the Ramp input is scaled to Start and Stop power settings. The start and stop
voltages are assumed to be 0 and 10V, and the start and stop power settings are taken from
the System > Source sweep menu.
Make sure the Sensor > CalFactor > SOURCE is set to Frequency or Manual. In power sweep
mode V/GHZ is not used.
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
6-15
Source Sweep Mode
Procedures
Source Sweep Graph
The annotation at the bottom of the screen is manually entered (there is currently no digital
connection between the power meter and the source), and these can be entered through the
SYSTEM > Source sweep > more- Start and Stop softkeys. Note that the scaling for the 10V
ramp input is not directly applied to the bottom of the screen; the user is able to enter this
directly and may include effects of frequency translation devices.
The other controls remain similar to the Profile graphic mode. SYSTEM > Control provides
access to most other functions used during measurement, such as CURSOR movement and
control, SCALING, and READOUT from the cursor. Note that the “between cursor average”
has no meaning in Source Sweep mode, and in place of this the frequency of the measurement
is indicated instead (x1 and x2). The readout is only updated while the system is sweeping.
Averaging may be applied by selecting SENSOR > Averaging and setting the STATE to ON.
An averaging number may then be applied for either sensor independently. Averaging is
‘EXPONENTIAL’ in character so changes in response (for example, adjusting tuning of a
filter) will gradually settle to their final measurement value over a period of time. A larger
number will take longer to settle. Good measurements may be achieved down to –45 dBm (65
dB dynamic range) with an average value as low as 4. Values up to 64 and higher produce
significantly lower noise readings. All averaging is performed on a true linear basis.
System > Source Sweep > Data Hold can be used to select the way in which data is plotted.
Using Min/Max variation (both minimum and maximum) can be shown on the display. Using
Max effectively provides a peak hold. If the display of swept power is not what is expected,
check the setting of AVERAGE and the DATA HOLD mode in case it is affecting the data
processing.
Note
As with other graphic modes, improved speed can be achieved in ATE systems by
disabling the graphic draw function for the LCD through the menus using SYSTEM
> more > more > Graphics > CONNECT. Setting CONNECT to OFF displaces the
line-drawing between samples, and improves update rate. Similarly, for ATE
systems, the READOUT should be disabled for fastest throughput as this can all
be handled within the controller (PC). Sensor range hold is not available in this
mode of operation as auto ranging is selected.
Using an Anritsu Synthesizer
The ML243xA can be connected directly to the Anritsu MG3690- and 68/69000-Series
Synthesized Signal Generators using a special RS232 cable (Anritsu part number C37399).
To use this remote connection, the System > Setup mode must be set to Source sweep, and the
System > Rear panel > RS232 mode must be set to SOURCE IF. The RS232 mode can also be
changed using the GPIB command RSMODE.
When set up in this manner, all sweep frequency and power parameters will be
communicated from the source to the meter. If the source frequency power level or the
frequency itself is changed, the source sweep display will be updated where appropriate.
Using the MG3690-Series Synthesizer
The MG3690-series synthesizer can be used for source sweep mode. Option 06, Analog sweep,
must be installed in the synthesizer for this functionality.
6-16
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
Procedures
Power vs. Time Mode
Using the 68/69000-Series Synthesizer
To communicate with an Anritsu 68/69000-series synthesizers, the synthesizer model and
firmware must be later than the levels shown below for each model.
680xxB - 3.39,
681x5B - 1.32,
692xxA - 1.26,
693x5A - 1.31
681xxB - 3.44,
682x5B - 1.30,
693xxA - 1.35,
682xxB - 2.41,
683x5B - 1.34,
690x5A - 1.21,
683xxB - 2.50,
690xxA - 1.21,
691x5A - 1.24,
680x5B - 1.26,
691xxA - 1.26,
692x5A - 1.24,
Contact your nearest Anritsu Service Center for a firmware upgrade if necessary.
6-12
Power vs. Time Mode
The ML243xA Power vs. Time mode is a graphical chart display of one of the display
channels, as selected in the SYSTEM > PWR vs. TIME menu. The triggering setup is as set
for Readout mode operation.
Power vs. Time mode provides a chart display on a timed basis where the x-axis of the graph
is defined in units of time. The user specifies the sweep period and, within this sweep period,
each pixel depicts all the measurements taken within a 200th of the sweep period.
The data can be displayed as a maximum value only, a minimum value only, maximum and
minimum values, the average of all the readings during the time slot period, or the latest
measured value. These display modes are selected in the SYSTEM > Pwr Vs Time menu,
DATA HOLD representation. Measurement setup, i.e., trigger, etc., is selected the same way
as in Readout mode. The minimum sweep time is 1 minute, and the maximum sweep time is
24 hours.
6-13
User Cal Factors
All MA24XXA-D Power Sensors have an internal EEPROM containing correction and
calibration factors programmed into the sensor at the factory. This “cal factor” data is used
when the power meter is set up to use frequency or volts per GHz calibration factors. The
correction is in linearity (across the dynamic range) and sensitivity (across frequency).
The ML243xA has the capability to define sets of calibration factor data and store them in the
sensor. A user-defined cal factor table can be used on its own, or in conjunction with the
factory-defined cal factor table. Linearity correction is not affected provided the meter cal
factor frequency is set correctly.
Note
This feature is also available when using Anritsu MA4700A/ MA4600A sensors
with the Anritsu MA2499B Sensor Adapter. Since the MA4700A/ MA4600A
sensors do not contain an EEPROM, the user cal factors are stored in the
MA2499B adapter EEPROM.
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
6-17
User Cal Factors
Procedures
Depending on the amount of factory calibration data stored in the sensor, there can be up to
10 user-defined cal factor tables. A “user” cal factor table consists of up to 90 frequency/cal
factor data pairs for sensors up to 40 GHz or 110 frequency/cal factor data pairs for sensors up
to 50 GHz, plus a 7-character identity text string. User cal factor tables are fully interpolated,
and can be used to apply correction for attenuators placed in front of the sensor. In this
situation, determine the attenuation factors and use them in addition to the Factory cal
factors. The number of frequency/cal factor data pairs in the factory defined table depends on
the sensor being used.
The cal factor tables for a particular sensor are not maintained by the meter, but are held in
the sensor. This means that when moving a sensor (perhaps with an associated attenuator or
calibration record) from one meter to another, the calibration stays valid. It is not necessary
to re-setup the new meter.
Note
A * in the displayed status box by the Cal Factor indicator, signifies User Cal
Factors are active. User Cal Factors are maintained in the sensor.
The first time a sensor is used with the ML243xA, a slight delay may be experienced when
the sensor is first plugged in. This is caused by the firmware preparing the sensor to accept
user cal factor tables. After first initialization, user cal factor tables will have only a single
entry at 50 MHz, 100 %.
Cal factor tables are accessed through the Sensor > CalFactor > USE TABLE front panel
menus (Chapter 4), or through GPIB commands.
Example Procedure
Use the key sequence Sensor > Cal Factor > EDIT to get to the table edit menu. Use the
TABLE key to select the table, then the EDIT key to edit that table. Press the INSERT key to
enter frequency and cal factor data pairs.
For example, in order to enter the frequency/cal factor pairs 1 GHz @ 100 %, 2 GHz @ 101 %,
3 GHz @ 98 % and 4 GHz @ 98 %, step through the keys in the following sequence:
FREQ, 1, GHz.Entr
FACTOR, 100, %
FREQ, 2, GHz. Entr
FACTOR, 101, %
FREQ, 3, GHz. Entr
FACTOR, 98, %
FREQ, 4, GHz. Entr
DONE
The frequency/cal factor pairs can be entered in any order. Each time a new frequency is
entered, a new data pair is formed. As the data pairs are entered, they are sorted into
frequency ascending order.
Readout Mode
In Readout mode, the bottom text line in the Status box indicates what type of calibration
factors are being used. At any time, if anything other than the factory supplied cal data is
applied, the Status box display shows a warning ‘*’ sign on the Cal Factor line to show that
non-standard calibration is being applied. For example:
6-18
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
Procedures
Optimizing Readings
CAL F = frequency cal factors using factory defined table
CAL V = volts per GHz cal factors using factory defined table
CAL M = manual cal factor
CAL *F = frequency cal factors employing a user defined table
CAL *V = volts per GHz cal factors employing a user defined table
This is because the application of user cal factors can completely change the calibrated
response of the Sensor.
6-14
Optimizing Readings
This section presents information on how to get the fastest readings from the ML243xA
Power Meter when operating under GPIB control. Refer to Chapter 6, GPIB Operation, for
specific command descriptions.
Measurement speed depends greatly on the type of measurements being taken, the power
level, and the amount of settling used.
Note
All results shown in this section are from DOS programs running on a 200 MHz
controller using IEEE 488.2 GPIB function calls. The timings (readings/second)
presented in this section are for illustrative purposes only.
Using the default system set up (system preset), the “O 1” command is used to retrieve one
reading from channel 1 ten times (channel 1 = Sensor A).
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
6-19
Optimizing Readings
Procedures
C code example:
/* Reset the unit */
Send(0, 13, “*RST”, 4L, NLend);
/* Ask for 10 readings */
for(i=0; i<10; i++)
{
Send(0, 13, “O 1”, 3L, NLend);
Receive(0, 13, buffer[i], 20, STOPend);
}
Table 6-5.
Power Levels and Reading per Second
Settling (%)
Power Level (dBm)
Readings/s
0.1
0
150
0.1
-30
150
10.0
-30
150
There are, however, methods of improving the speed of the measurement without having to
change the power level or settling time.
DISP ON/OFF command
Using the DISP command the readout display can be turned OFF, yet data can still be
acquired from the readout channels.
C code example:
/* turn display off */
Send(0, 13, “DISP OFF”, 8L, NLend);
/*Ask for 10 readings */
for(i=0; i<10; i++)
{
Send(0, 13, “O 1”, 3L, NLend);
Receive(0, 13, buffer[i], 20, STOPend);
}
Table 6-6.
Power Levels and Reading per Second
Settling (%)
Power Level (dBm)
Readings/s
0.1
0
160
0.1
-30
160
10.0
-30
160
The 0.1 % settling on –30 dBm power level results were not improved because of the amount
of time needed to settle to 0.1 % on –30 dBm.
6-20
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
Procedures
Optimizing Readings
FAST ON/OFF command
Using the FAST command limits the types of measurements that can be taken. As some
processes are turned off, higher measurement speeds can be achieved. FAST will not operate
when sent via RS232. When THE FAST ON command is selected, the readout display is also
turned OFF.
Using FAST mode only increases speed when asking for one measurement at a
time, using the ‘Receive’ command.
Note
C code example:
/* send fast mode ON*/
Send(0, 13, “FAST ON”, 7L, NLend);
/* Setup the power meter into talk addressed. In this mode*/
/* we can read from power meter without readdressing each */
/* time. */
Receivesetup(0,13);
/* Now read 10 readings */
for (loop = 0; loop < 10; loop++)
{
RcvRespMsg(0,buffer,STOPend); }
Table 6-7.
Power Levels and Reading per Second
Settling (%)
Power Level (dBm)
Readings/s
0.1
0
150
0.1
–30
150
10.0
0
610
10.0
–30
250
The 0.1 % settling on –30 dBm power level results were not improved because of the time
needed to settle to 0.1 % at –30 dBm.
Using Buffered Requests
Using the buffered Output channel ON command, even faster measurement speeds can be
achieved. By using the ON command instead of the O command x number of times, extra
processing is removed, resulting in improved speed.
Note
Using FAST mode here will not increase the speed as this mode only works when
asking for one measurement at a time (i.e., the ‘O’ command only.)
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
6-21
Optimizing Readings
Procedures
C code example:
/* Reset unit and ask for 200 buffered readings n channel 1 */
Send(0, 13, “*RST; ON 1, 200”, 15L, NLend);
/* use a large buffer size (4K for 200 readings) */
Receive(0, 13, buffer, 4096, STOPend);
Table 6-8.
Power Levels and Reading per Second
Settling (%)
Power Level (dBm)
Readings/s
0.1
0
216
0.1
–30
202
Changing Measurement Modes
By changing the sensor measurement mode to Custom, the ML243xA can be precisely
configured to meet the needs of the specific application.
In this example, the Trigger Gate Width has been reduced to 1 ms, Channel 1 is set to Sensor
A, and Channel 2 is off.
C code example:
/* reset unit. Custom measurement mode, 1 ms TRGGW */
/* Auto averaging Sensor A Channel 2 off*/
/* Use FAST mode*/
Send(0, 13, “*RST; FAST ON; SENMM A, CUSTOM; TRGGW 1 ms”, 51L,
NLend);
Receivesetup(0,13);
/* Fast mode, therefore do not send ‘O 1’ for data, just read.*/
for(i=0; i<10; i++)
RcvRespMsg(0,buffer,STOPend);
Table 6-9.
Power Levels and Reading per Second
Power Level (dBm)
Readings/s
0
240
–30
240
6-22
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
Procedures
Optimizing Readings
An Example Program in C
#include <stdio.h>
/* include the NI 488.2 GPIB include file */
#include “DECL.H”
/* LINK with MCIB.LIB */
/* Compiled with BorlandC++ 2.0 */
void main()
{
int i;
char buffer[10][20];
/* clear buffer */
memset(buffer,0,200);
SendIFC(0);
if ( ibsta & ERR )
{
printf(“GPIB error\nibsta: %0x\niberr: %i\n\n”, ibsta,
iberr);
exit(1);
}
/* Setup ML2430A at address 13 */
/* FAST mode (output readout channel 1)
Send(0, 13, “*RST; FAST ON”, 13L, NLend);
/* Loop 10 times and store readings */
for(i=0; i<10; i++)
Receive(0, 13, buffer[i], 20, STOPend);
/* display readings.. */
for(i=0; i<10; i++)
printf(“Reading %i = %s”, i+1, buffer[i]);
}
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
6-23
Operator Maintenance
6-15
Procedures
Operator Maintenance
The ML243xA does not require any operator maintenance. All repairs must be performed by
qualified service personnel only.
Software Loader Instructions
The latest version of the firmware can be downloaded from the Anritsu website at
http://www.anritsu.com
1. Copy appropriate self-extracting zip file to empty directory.
2. Double click on zip file icon. This will extract all files to the current directory.
3. Connect PC com port 1 or 2 to power meter using Null modem cable (Anritsu p/n
2000-1544). As a minimum you need TX & RX (pins 2 & 3) swapped and RTS & CTS
(pins 7 & 8) swapped.
4. Ensure the Powermeter is powered-on.
5. Put power meter into bootload mode. Select SYSTEM> more> more> more>. Press the
blank softkey twice, and select "BOOTLOAD". The power meter is now in bootload
mode, waiting for input from the PC.
6. If using COM1 for bootload, double click on DOS batch file icon "Q_BOOTQ1" for
ML243xA or "Z_BOOTQ1" for ML240xA. If using COM2 then use files ending in Q2.
7. If PC will not run dos batch files, open DOS window in the directory where the files are
stored and type: "bootload q 1 quart_fl" return. If using com2 change 1 to 2 in the
command line. If loading ML240xA, change quart_fl to zippy_fl.
8. While loading, the powermeter screen will turn off, and the PC screen will show the files
being loaded, and a counter indicating progress.
9. Wait approximately 5 minutes for the bootload process to complete.
10. When finished, the power meter will restart, and the PC program will indicate that it
has finished.
Note
6-24
Do not remove power from the product while loading firmware. This is not
recoverable without returning the power meter to a customer service centre.
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
Chapter 7 — Measurement Examples
7-1
Example 1: Standard CW Power Measurements
This first example will explain everything you need to know about the ML2430A Series Power
Meter when making standard carrier wave power measurements. However, the power meter
is capable of much more and examples 2 to 11 explore its functionality in greater depth.
1. Switching on
Turn the ML2430A on using the front panel ON/OFF button.
2. Preset the meter to a known state
A Preset returns the ML2430A to its default settings. It is recommended that this is
carried out before each new measurement type and whenever the meter is reconfigured
for a new measurement. To preset, press [System] > [Setup] > [-more-] > [PRESET] >
[Factory]
Having performed a Preset, the Measurement screen is displayed:
Figure 7-1.
Measurement Screen
Select the correct power sensor for your measurement. Consider points such as power
range, frequency range, connector type, and speed of response required.
See the appendix for a table of power sensor model numbers, power and frequency
ranges.
3. Zero the sensor
Zeroing the power sensor removes any residual DC offset on the sensor/meter
combination. After a zero the measurement noise floor is minimized. It is recommended
that you always zero the sensor at the beginning of each measurement session and
prior to taking important power readings in the bottom
20 dB of its dynamic range.
Anritsu recommends that during Zeroing, the sensor is connected to the device under
test having ensured it is not emitting any power (see 5. Connections). If this is not
possible, then the sensor should be zeroed to the CALIBRATOR socket on the ML2430A
front panel. The third option would be to Zero with the sensor in free space i.e. not
connected to anything.
Press [Cal/Zero] > [Zero]
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
7-1
Example 1: Standard CW Power Measurements
Measurement Examples
The ML2430A will take a few seconds to perform the Zero and will beep when finished.
The Measurement screen is displayed and returns a value of approximately -75 dBm
for a standard diode sensor or –40 dBm for a thermal sensor.
4. Calibration
At the beginning of a measurement session, it is good practice to calibrate the sensor.
Connect the sensor to the CALIBRATOR connector on the ML2430A front panel and
press [Cal/Zero] > [-Cal 0 dBm].
The ML2430A will take a few seconds to perform the calibration and will beep when
finished.
To validate that the meter is working correctly, you may choose to now measure the 0
dB calibration signal. Press [Cal/Zero] > [-more-].
Check that the left-hand soft key reads RF ON. If it reads RF OFF, press
[RF ON] to toggle the setting to RF ON. A correctly functioning instrument will return
the following screen:
Figure 7-2.
5. Connections
Connect the power meter to the device under test via the sensor. Ensure:
• you are using the appropriate sensor for the measurement you wish to make
• the sensor is fitted with the correct connector for the device you wish to test.
See the appendix for a table of power sensor model numbers, power and frequency
ranges.
Anritsu do not recommend the use of adapters between the power source and the sensor
since this can introduce measurement errors.
6. Applying a calibration factor
The accuracy of a measurement is affected by the frequency response of the individual
sensor. To correct for the sensor frequency response you can enter into the meter the
calibration factor for the measurement frequency. This calibration factor data is stored
in an EEPROM in the power sensor body.
Press [Sensor] > [Cal Factor].
7-2
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
Measurement Examples
Example 1: Standard CW Power Measurements
The following screen is displayed.
Figure 7-3.
Some text on the screen appears in upper case. This indicates which soft key to select to
change the item’s setting. For example, to change the Input signal FREQuency, press
the FREQ soft key.
Press [FREQ] and using the keypad, input the Input Signal Frequency of the device
under test. The soft keys at the bottom of the screen will now change.
Depending on the frequency type, press [GHz.Entr] or [MHz.Entr]. To return to the
Measurement screen, press any hard key.
Figure 7-4.
You are now measuring power. Your Measurement screen should now look something
like this:
However, you may wish to modify the measurement in the following ways:
Changing the way measurement units and decimal resolution are displayed on the
screen.
The default setting for the ML2430A is to display units in dB[m] and resolution to two
decimal places. To change this, press [Channel] > [Setup].
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
7-3
Example 1: Standard CW Power Measurements
Measurement Examples
To change the display units, press [UNITS] and toggle the setting by repeatedly
pressing the soft key until the measurement unit you require is displayed. Available
units are; dBm, W, dBmV and dBmV.
Figure 7-5.
To change the resolution, press [-more-] to display further soft keys and then press
[RESOLUTION]. Toggle this setting until the resolution you require is displayed.
Figure 7-6.
7. Keeping track of minimum and maximum measurements.
You may have a requirement to track a device’s highest and lowest power
measurements over time. Press [Channel] > [Setup].
The Channel Set Up screen is displayed. Press [-more-] to display further soft keys.
Press [MIN/MAX]. The display changes to:
Figure 7-7.
7-4
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
Measurement Examples
Example 1: Standard CW Power Measurements
You will notice the new line “RESET tracked min/max.” The Min/Max feature can be
reset to record a new time frame at any point — just select [RESET] from the Channel
Set Up options. To return to the Measurement screen, press any hard key.
The Measurement screen now displays a minimum and maximum range.
Figure 7-8.
8. Correcting for the effects of an Attenuator or Coupler.
Offset values can be either specified in dB or can be obtained from five different
Frequency-against-dB Offset Tables. To enter an offset value press [Sensor] > [-more-]
[Offset].
The Sensor Offset screen is displayed.
Figure 7-9.
To apply an offset, press [TYPE]. Toggle this setting until the offset you require is
displayed (see below).
Fixed Offset: If you require a fixed offset, press [TYPE] until “Fixed” is displayed. The
soft keys at the bottom of the screen will now change. Press [VALUE] and using the
keypad, input the dB value of the offset. Press [ENTER].
Offset from Table: Tables enable an offset to be applied that is frequency dependent.
The table must be entered into the memory of the meter before it can be applied. See
the Miscellaneous Features section of this guide for further information.
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
7-5
Example 1: Standard CW Power Measurements
Measurement Examples
To return to the Measurement screen press any hard key.
Figure 7-10.
Note that box A in the top right hand corner of the screen now indicates that an
OFFSET has been applied to the Sensor.
9. Using measurement limits
When using limits, if the power from the device under test falls outside a pre-defined
range, the meter will inform you — visually, audibly or both.
Press [Channel] > [LIMITS]
The following screen is displayed:
Figure 7-11.
7-6
[-more-]
To access further soft keys.
[HIGH Limit]
The upper test value. If the power remains below this value, the
Measurement screen will show PASS alongside display. If the
power rises above this value, the screen will show FAIL.
[LOW Limit]
The lower test value. If the power remains above this value, the
Measurement screen will show PASS alongside the display. If the
power drops below this value, the display will show FAIL
[HIGH State]
This setting is automatically set to ON when an upper test value is
entered. Toggle the setting on or off.
[LOW State]
This setting is automatically set to ON when a lower test value is
entered. Toggle the setting on or off.
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
Measurement Examples
Example 1: Standard CW Power Measurements
[FAIL HOLD]
When set to ON, if the power falls outside the range defined in
High Limit and/or Low Limit the Measurement screen will show
FAIL alongside the value. This will remain until the setting is
toggled off.
[BEEP]
When set to ON, if the power falls outside the range defined in
High Limit and/or Low Limit, an audible beep will sound. If [FAIL
HOLD] is ON and a fail has occurred, a beep will sound every
second until [FAIL HOLD] is turned off or you press [CLR].
10. Defining a relative power measurement
You may have a requirement not to measure the actual power output of a device but to
express the current power relative to a previously measured power. To do this, it is
necessary to define an absolute reference value.
Let us assume the actual power output at a given time is 10 dBm. You want to track
any change in power above or below 10 dBm. Press [Channel] > [Rel 1]
The display will change to 0.00 dBr and will measure future power LESS the
10 dBm absolute value.
Figure 7-12.
Note that the measurement unit has changed to dBr.
If at any point you wish check the absolute value stored in the meter, press [Rel 1]
again. If at any point you wish to change the absolute value, press [Rel 1] for
approximately 2 seconds. This will then replace the stored absolute value with the
current measurement.
To check the absolute value, press [Rel 1] once. To re-define the absolute value, press
[Rel 1] for approximately 2 seconds.
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
7-7
Example 2: Measuring Modulated Carrier
7-2
Measurement Examples
Example 2: Measuring Modulated Carrier
The Anritsu power sensors MA2440A and MA2470A are fast responding diode sensors. When
measuring signals with an average power greater than –25 dBm and an amplitude
modulation component, all diode sensors will normally give incorrect measurement results.
This is because the diode is not detecting in its square law region.
A special feature of the Anritsu diode sensors and power meters is the ability to correctly
measure amplitude modulated carriers with average powers greater than
–25 dBm. This is possible because the diodes are fast responding and have a large video
bandwidth. This means they demodulate signals that are within this bandwidth.
This property is used in the modulation average mode to give accurate average power
readings at high power levels with modulated signals.
Modulation average is not required when making measurements with thermal sensors.
To change the measurement mode, press [Sensor] > [Setup] > [MODE].
Figure 7-13.
The Measurement screen will now display a stable reading. A modulation icon reminds you
that this mode is active.
Figure 7-14.
7-8
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
Measurement Examples
7-3
Example 3: Optimizing Measurements at Low Power Levels
Example 3: Optimizing Measurements at Low Power
Levels
When measuring power levels in the bottom 20 dB of a sensor’s dynamic range, Anritsu
recommends that prior to the measurement, you perform a Zero. If possible, this should be
done with the sensor connected to the device under test (having first ensured it is not
emitting any power).
When measuring power, readings are subject to a certain amount of noise. To minimize this,
averaging increases as the power level reduces. However, at the bottom 20 dB of a sensor’s
dynamic range, this effect of noise increases. The meter automatically increases the amount
of averaging for low power measurements. However, you may choose to select a high level of
averaging. This will be at the expense of measurement speed. To do this, it is necessary to
move from Automatic Averaging (the default factory setting) to another method — either
Moving or Repeat.
Moving mode:
This mode allows you to manually select the number of averaging
readings taken (between 1 reading and 512 readings) regardless of the
power level. A reading rate of 512 indicates the highest level of
averaging and is recommended when measuring at low power. The
display is continually updated whilst averaging.
Repeat mode:
This mode is similar to Moving Average but the display is only updated
once the specified number of readings has been taken. One drawback
to this mode is that if the reading rate is set to 512 and the power level
changes before all readings have been taken, the display will not
reflect the true input power.
1. Changing the averaging mode
To change the averaging mode, press [Sensor] > [AVERAGING].
The following screen is displayed:
Figure 7-15.
This screen reflects the default factory setting. To change the averaging mode, press
[MODE]. Toggle this setting until the mode you require is displayed.
To enter a reading rate, press [NUMBER] and using the keypad, input the rate
(between 1 and 512). Press [ENTER].
2. Apply Automatic Low Level averaging.
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
7-9
Example 3: Optimizing Measurements at Low Power Levels
Measurement Examples
Automatic Low Level averaging smooths the display but only if the reading is
comparatively stable. The default factory setting is LOW and will take out fluctuations
of + 0.01 dB.
Figure 7-16.
To change this setting to MEDIUM (+ 0.02 dB), HIGH (+ 0.05 dB) or to turn it OFF,
press [LOW LEVEL].
Figure 7-17.
Typical display for measurement of low power levels.
7-10
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
Measurement Examples
7-4
Example 4: Using Both Channels
Example 4: Using Both Channels
In the previous examples, measurements have been made on only one channel — channel 1.
However, it is possible to measure power on two channels. Possible applications for this
feature when using only one sensor might be to display the measurement in dBm on channel
1 and Watts on channel 2 or with two sensors to measure power at different points in a test
system.
When two channels are in operation, the displays are aligned one above the other.
Figure 7-18.
To activate channel 2, press [Channel] > [Setup].
The following screen is shown:
Figure 7-19.
Press [CHANNEL]. The screen now shows the configuration for channel 2. Note that the
Input Configuration is set to OFF and is therefore inactive.
In order to activate channel 2, it is necessary to specify the type of input (sensor, combination
of sensors or rear panel BNC input) that will be used. This will vary depending on the model
of power meter you are using. To allocate an input for channel 2, press [INPUT]. Toggle the
setting until the input type you require is displayed.
Table 7-1. Input options for the ML2437A
Input
Meaning
A
Take input from sensor A
External Volts
Take input from rear panel BNC, “Input 2, Analog”
OFF
Default value – Channel is inactive
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
7-11
Example 4: Using Both Channels
Measurement Examples
Table 7-2. Input options for the ML2438A
Input
Meaning
A
Take input from sensor A
B
Take input from sensor B
A-B
Subtract sensor measurement B from sensor measurement A and
display result on current channel *
B-A
Subtract sensor measurement A from sensor measurement B and
display result on current channel *
A/B
Divide sensor measurement A by sensor measurement B and display
result on current channel.*
B/A
Divide sensor measurement B by sensor measurement A and display
result on current channel.*
External Volts
Take input from rear panel BNC, “Input 2, Analog”
OFF
Default value – channel is inactive
* These ratios are expressed in either logarithmic or linear terms but the mathematical
calculation is always performed on the linear values. Please refer to the Operation Manual for
further details.
When using the Channel Menu options to change settings such as Units, Resolution,
Min/Max etc. make sure that you are effecting the changes on the correct channel. Change
from channel 1 to channel 2 by using the [CHANNEL] soft key.
A preset will return the power meter back to its default setting i.e. one channel only.
7-12
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
Measurement Examples
7-5
Example 5: Using Two Sensors
Example 5: Using Two Sensors
The Dual Input ML2438A allows for two sensors to be used simultaneously with the
Measurement screen showing both readings one above the other. One possible application for
this feature might be to measure the forward and reflected power on an antenna.
Channel 1 might be configured to show the measurement from sensor A with channel 2
showing the measurement from sensor B. The resulting Measurement screen may look like
this:
Figure 7-20.
Figure 7-21.
An offset has been applied to compensate for the coupling factor of the through line coupler.
In this example, sensor A is allocated to channel 1 and sensor B is allocated to channel 2. This
allocation can be changed as shown in Example 4.
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
7-13
Example 5: Using Two Sensors
Measurement Examples
When using the Sensor Menu options to change settings such as Mode, Calibration Factor,
Averaging etc. make sure that you are effecting the changes on the correct sensor. Change
from sensor A to sensor B by using the [SENSOR] soft key.
Additional soft keys are included in the Cal/Zero Menu options — [Sensor A] and [Sensor B].
Select as appropriate.
After a Preset, channel 1 is allocated to sensor A and channel 2 is inactive.
7-14
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
Measurement Examples
7-6
Example 6: Gain Compression Measurement
Example 6: Gain Compression Measurement
A common application for a two input power meter is for gain compression measurements on
amplifiers. In this example, we will measure the 1 dB compression point for an amplifier with
20 dB gain.
Figure 7-22.
Connect your measurement system as shown above. Allocate sensor A to channel 1 and
sensor B to channel 2 (see Example 4 and 5) The signal source should be set to a suitable CW
frequency to test the amplifier. Follow the procedures described in Example 1 to zero and
calibrate the sensor and to enter the correct calibrator factor frequency for this measurement.
The source power level should initially be set to a power at which the amplifier is on its
linear, small signal gain region. In this case, -30 dBm. Your measurement screen may look
something like this:
Figure 7-23.
A is displaying the output power of the amplifier. B is displaying the input power to the
amplifier. (Note a signal splitter has a nominal path loss of 6 dB.)
We can display the gain of the amplifier directly if we set channel 1 to A/B (see Example 4).
Press [Channel] > [Setup] > [Input].
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
7-15
Example 6: Gain Compression Measurement
Measurement Examples
Your Measurement screen will now display the following:
Figure 7-24.
Note the small signal gain of the amplifier. Now increase the signal source power slowly.
When the amplifier begins to compress the displayed gain will start to decrease. Increase the
source power until the gain has dropped by 1 dB, in this example to 19 dB.
Channel 2 now shows the input power at which the amplifier is in 1 dB compression. To
display the amplifiers output power at 1 dB compression, press [Channel] > [Setup] > [Input]
and select Input A.
The above routine can be simplified by defining the A/B small signal gain reading to be 0.00
dBr.
Return the source to –30 dBm. Now set the A/B display of gain to 0 dB by pressing [Channel]
> [Rel 1].
Increase the power of the signal source until the display reads –1.00 dBr. The amplifier is
now at its 1 dB compression point. Input and output powers at 1 dB compression can be
viewed as before.
Figure 7-25.
7-16
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
Measurement Examples
7-7
Example 7: Measuring Pulse Signals With a Duty Cycle
Example 7: Measuring Pulse Signals With a Duty Cycle
In this example, we will be measuring the power output of a repetitive 500 ms pulse with a
10 ms pulse period.
Figure 7-26.
In normal measurement mode the ML2430A power meter measures and displays average
power. When the signal to be measured is a repetitive pulse, an average power reading will
display average power over time and not the pulse power. By entering the duty cycle of the
pulse, the meter can mathematically correct to display the pulse power. This technique
assumes rectangular pulses with flat pulse tops.
Duty Cycle = Pulse Width / Pulse Period x 100 %
In the above example:
Duty Cycle = 0.5 ms / 10 ms x 100 % = 5 %
Press [Sensor] > [-more-] > [Duty cycle].
The following screen is displayed:
Figure 7-27.
Press [STATE] and toggle the setting by pressing the soft key until the display reads ON.
Press [DUTY] and using the keypad, input a duty cycle of 5 %. Press [Enter]. To return to the
Measurement screen press any hard key.
When measuring duty cycles with long pulse repetition frequencies, it may be necessary to
apply the Modulated Average mode (see Example 2, Measuring Modulated Carrier). Press
[Sensor] > [Setup] > [MODE].
Toggle this setting until Mod Average is displayed.
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
7-17
Example 7: Measuring Pulse Signals With a Duty Cycle
Measurement Examples
The following screen is displayed:
Figure 7-28.
Note
7-18
Note that box A in the top right hand corner of the screen now indicates that a Duty
Cycle percentage has been applied to the Sensor.
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
Measurement Examples
7-8
Example 8: Profiling Pulse Signals
Example 8: Profiling Pulse Signals
The ML2430A Series Power Meter can be used to view signals graphically as well as digitally.
In this example, we will measure a pulse with a duration of 500 ms and a pulse period of
10 ms.
Figure 7-29.
Display trigger delay is a time delay from the trigger point to the time when the power meter
starts to collect data. It can be used to view the complete rising edge of a pulse which would
otherwise be on the extreme left of the instrument display.
Data collection period is the length of time for which data is captured. It also defines the time
axis settings.
1. Changing from Readout to Profile mode
Press [System] > [Setup].
The following screen is displayed:
Figure 7-30.
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
7-19
Example 8: Profiling Pulse Signals
Measurement Examples
Press [MODE] and toggle this setting until "Profile" is displayed. Press any hard key to
display the Measurement screen.
Figure 7-31.
2. Set up the triggering attributes.
Press [Trigger] > [Setup].
The following screen is displayed:
Figure 7-32.
Press [SOURCE] and toggle this setting until the trigger source you require is
displayed:
Int A
Take trigger from sensor A
Int B
Take trigger from sensor B (ML2438A only)
EXTTTL
Take trigger from an external source
MANUAL
User triggers measurement from front panel soft key
CONTINUOUS
Automatic continuous trigger on completion of measurement cycle
For this example, toggle this setting until "Int A" is displayed.
To set the trigger for a falling edge, press [-more-] > [TYPE] and toggle this setting until
"Fall (Int A)" is displayed. Press [LEVEL] if you wish to change from the default trigger
level of –15 dB.
7-20
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
Measurement Examples
Example 8: Profiling Pulse Signals
To display the Measurement screen, press any hard key.
The pulse is displayed on the screen and the display readout box on the right-hand side
shows:
Table 7-3.
Display Meanings
Item
Meaning
1
the power measurement at cursor 1
2
the power measurement at cursor 2
p
the power difference between cursors 1 and 2
t
the time difference between cursors 1 and 2
AV
the average power between cursors 1 and 2
3. Changing the axis scaling
In order to display the waveform clearly, it may be necessary to amend the X and Y axis
settings. To change the time axis, press [System] > [Profile] > [Period].
The entered value of Data Collection Period determines the time axis scaling. Using the
keypad, input a period value that will result in the display of the required number of
pulses. Press either [ms.Enter] or [us.Enter]. In this example, a period of 10 ms will
result in the display of one pulse cycle. To change the power axis, press [System] >
[Control] > [-more-] > [SCALE].
Press [TOP] and/or [BOTTOM] to set the dB values as required. Press [Enter] to accept
the values. Alternatively, rather than entering top and bottom values, you can select
[AUTO SCALE].
4. Introducing a delay to the trigger point display.
The Measurement screen currently shows the trigger point of the pulse as occurring on
the extreme left-hand side of the graph. It may be useful to show a leading edge to the
pulse thus displaying activity prior to the trigger point.
Press [System] > [Profile] > [Delay]
and using the keypad, input a delay of 9.5 ms. Press [Enter] to accept the value. The
Measurement screen now shows activity prior to the trigger point.
Figure 7-33.
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
7-21
Example 8: Profiling Pulse Signals
Measurement Examples
Using the cursors
Cursors are used to define the points at which or between which power is measured. To
take a measurement at a single point, position one cursor. To take a measurement
between two points, use both. They are depicted as vertical dashed lines. The active
cursor is depicted in two ways:
• by a triangular end cap on the end of the dotted line.
• by a hyphen against the cursor number in the display readout box (see
Components of the Profiling Screen).
By positioning the cursors, the display readout box will show the average power
measured between the two cursors.
Position the cursors approximately 10 % inside the start and finish of the pulse. This
will help to stabilize the reading.
When Profile mode is first used, both cursors sit at the extreme right hand side of the
display. To move a cursor, press [System] > [Control].
To move the active cursor, press [<<] or [>>]. To activate the other cursor, press
[SWAP].
If you had multiple pulses displayed on the screen and wished to compare identical
timed power readings, the cursors can be linked and then moved as a pair along the
waveform. To link the cursors, press [System] > [Control] > [-more-] > [-more-] > [LINK
CURSR].
If the cursors are now moved using [<<] or [>>], they move as a pair.
5. Displaying the Readout box
This box can be toggled on and off by pressing [System] > [Control] > [-more-] >
[READOUT].
6. Displaying the average power in readout mode
The average power between a set of cursors is shown at the bottom of the Display
Readout box. However, to display the average power in readout mode, press [System] >
[Setup] > [-more-].
Press [LINK] and toggle this setting until "ON" is displayed. To return to readout
mode, press [-back-] > [MODE]. Toggle this setting until "Readout" is shown. To display
the resulting screen, press any hard key.
Figure 7-34.
7-22
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
Measurement Examples
7-9
Example 9: Displaying GSM-TDMA Bursts
Example 9: Displaying GSM-TDMA Bursts
The principle for viewing and measuring GSM-TDMA bursts is similar to that for profiling
pulse signals. In this example, we will be measuring three GSM-TDMA bursts in an eight-slot
frame.
1. Changing from Readout to Profile mode
Press [System] > [Setup].
The following screen is displayed:
Figure 7-35.
Press [MODE] and toggle this setting until "Profile" is displayed.
2. Set up the triggering attributes
Press [Trigger] > [Setup]
The following screen is displayed:
Figure 7-36.
Press [SOURCE] and toggle this setting until the trigger source you require displays.
Int A
Take trigger from sensor A
Int B
Take trigger from sensor B (ML2438A only)
EXTTTL
Take trigger from an external source
MANUAL
User triggers measurement from front panel soft key
CONTINUOUS
Automatic continuous trigger on completion of measurement
cycle
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
7-23
Example 9: Displaying GSM-TDMA Bursts
Measurement Examples
In this example, the power meter is triggered from a TTL pulse which must be
connected to rear panel connector marked INPUT 1 DIGITAL. This pulse is generated
by the base station, or signal source, at the start of each 8-burst frame.
To set the trigger for a TTL pulse, press [Trigger] > [Setup] > [SOURCE] and toggle this
setting until "EXTTTL" is displayed. To display the Measurement screen, press any
hard key.
Figure 7-37.
The frame is displayed on the screen and the display readout box on the right-hand side
shows:
Table 7-4.
Display Meanings
Item
Meaning
1
the power measurement at cursor 1
2
the power measurement at cursor 2
p
the power difference between cursors 1 and 2
t
the time difference between cursors 1 and 2
AV
the average power between cursors 1 and 2
3. Changing the axis scaling
In order to display the waveform clearly, it may be necessary to amend the X and Y axis
settings. To change the time axis, press [System] > [Profile] > [Period].
The entered value of Data Collection Period determines the time axis scaling. Using the
keypad, input a period value that will result in the display of the required number of
time slots. Press either [ms.Enter] or [us.Enter]. In this example, a period of 5 ms will
result in the display of one frame (equals eight time slots).
To change the power axis, press [System] > [Control] > [-more-] > [SCALE].
Press [TOP] and/or [BOTTOM] to set the dB values as required. Press [Enter] to accept
the values.
Alternatively, rather than entering top and bottom values, you can select [AUTO
SCALE].
7-24
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
Measurement Examples
Example 9: Displaying GSM-TDMA Bursts
4. Introducing a delay to the trigger point display
The Measurement screen currently shows the trigger point of the pulse as occurring on
the extreme left-hand side of the graph. It may be useful to show a leading edge to the
pulse thus displaying activity prior to the trigger point.
Press [System] > [Profile] > [Delay] and using the keypad, input a delay of 4.5 ms. Press
[Enter] to accept the value.
The Measurement screen now shows activity prior to the trigger point.
Figure 7-38.
5. Using the cursors
Cursors are used to define the points at which or between which power is measured. To
take a measurement at a single point, position one cursor. To take a measurement
between two points, use both cursors. They are depicted as vertical dashed lines. The
active cursor is depicted in two ways:
• by a triangular end cap on the end of the dotted line.
• by a hyphen against the cursor number in the display readout box (see
Components of the Profiling Screen).
By positioning the cursors, the display readout box will show the average power
measured between the two cursors.
Position the cursors approximately 10 % inside the start and finish of the pulse. This
will help to stabilize the reading.
When Profile mode is first used, both cursors sit at the extreme right hand side of the
display. To move a cursor, press [System] > [Control].
To move the active cursor, press [<<] or [>>]. To activate the other cursor, press
[SWAP].
If you wish to compare the different burst power readings, the cursors can be linked
and then moved as a pair along the waveform. To link the cursors, press [System] >
[Control] > [-more-] > [-more-] > [LINK CURSR].
If the cursors are now moved using [<<] or [>>], they move as a pair.
6. Displaying the Readout box
This box can be toggled on and off by pressing [System] > [Control] > [-more-] >
[READOUT].
7. Displaying the average power in readout mode
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
7-25
Example 9: Displaying GSM-TDMA Bursts
Measurement Examples
The average power between a set of cursors is shown at the bottom of the Display
Readout box. However, to display the average power in readout mode, press [System] >
[Setup] > [-more-].
Press [LINK] and toggle this setting until "ON" is displayed.
To return to readout mode, press [-back-] > [MODE]. Toggle this setting until "Readout"
is shown. To display the resulting screen, press any hard key.
Figure 7-39.
7-26
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
Measurement Examples
7-10
Example 10: Power Versus Time Data Logging
Example 10: Power Versus Time Data Logging
To take power measurements over a user-defined period of time, press [System] > [Setup]
The following screen is displayed:
Figure 7-40.
Press [MODE] and toggle this setting until "Power v Time" is displayed. Press any hard key
to display the Measurement screen.
Figure 7-41. Power versus Time Measurement Screen
1. Changing the axis scaling
The data display time axis shows the length of time over which you wish to take
measurements. Press [System] > [PwrVsTime] > [TIME].
Using the keypad, enter the required time. Press either [hr.Enter] or [min.Entr].
To change the power axis, press [System] > [Control] > [-more-] > [SCALE].
Press [TOP] and/or [BOTTOM] to set the dB values as required. Press [Enter] to accept
the values.
Alternatively, rather than entering top and bottom values, you can select [AUTO
SCALE].
2. Selecting the data hold representation
The data hold representation allows you to specify how you would like these
measurements displayed on the screen. Press [System] > [PwrVsTime].
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
7-27
Example 10: Power Versus Time Data Logging
Measurement Examples
The way the power meter measures power versus time is to divide the data display time
period into 200 blocks of time. For example, with a data display time period of 200
minutes, the duration of each block of time would be 1 minute. If the display time were
100 minutes, each block of time would be of 30 seconds duration.
Press [DATA HOLD] and toggle the setting by repeatedly pressing the soft key until
the representation type you require is displayed.
Normal: This is the default setting and returns the last measurement taken within
each block of time.
Figure 7-42.
Average: This looks at all the measurements within the block of time and returns the
average power.
Figure 7-43.
7-28
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
Measurement Examples
Example 10: Power Versus Time Data Logging
Min: This looks at all the measurements within the block of time and returns the
minimum power.
Figure 7-44.
Max: This looks at all the measurements within the block of time and returns the
maximum power. The Measurement screen is similar to that achieved with Min.
Min/Max: This looks at all the measurements within the block of time and returns both
the minimum and the maximum power. Both readings are connected on the graph by a
line which results in a similar display to that shown below.
Figure 7-45.
Press any hard key to return to the Measurement screen. The display readout box on
the right-hand side shows a combination of:
Table 7-5.
Display Meanings
Item
Meaning
1
the power measurement at cursor 1
2
the power measurement at cursor 2
p
the power difference between cursors 1 and 2
t
the time difference between cursors 1 and 2

the time at cursor 1
T2
the time at cursor 2
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
7-29
Example 10: Power Versus Time Data Logging
Measurement Examples
3. Using the cursors
Cursors are used to define the points at which or between which power is measured. To
take a measurement at a single point, use one cursor. To take a measurement between
two points, use linked cursors (see below). They are depicted as vertical dashed lines.
The active cursor is depicted in two ways:
• by a triangular end cap on the end of the dotted line.
• by a hyphen against the cursor number in the display readout box (see
Components of the Profiling Screen).
By positioning the cursors, the display readout box will show the power or time
measured at each cursor and also the power or time difference between the cursors,
depending upon the data hold mode selected.
To move a cursor, press [System] > [Control].
To move the active cursor, press [<<] or [>>]. To activate the other cursor, press
[SWAP].
If you wished to compare identical time duration power readings, the cursors can be
linked and then moved as a pair along the waveform. To link the cursors, press
[System] > [Control] > [-more-] > [-more-] > [LINK CURSR].
If the cursors are now moved using [<<] or [>>], they move as a pair.
4. Displaying the Readout box
This box can be toggled on and off by pressing [System] > [Control] > [-more-] >
[READOUT].
7-30
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
Measurement Examples
7-11
Example 11: Frequency Measurements Using a Separate Source
Example 11: Frequency Measurements Using a Separate
Source
In the previous examples, we have been working with variable power on a fixed frequency. In
this example, we will be measuring power against swept frequency.
Between the frequency start point and the frequency stop point (i.e. 1 GHz to 2 GHz), you can
take a power measurements at each point and plot the power between them. This is a
frequency response measurement.
1. Connecting the meter to the device under test
Prior to starting this type of measurement, it is necessary to connect the power meter to
the signal source using BNC cables.
Figure 7-46. SIgnal Source (Rear Panel) Anritsu 68000 or 69000 Series
2. Selecting Source Sweep mode and defining frequencies.
Press [System] > [Setup].
The following screen is displayed:
Figure 7-47.
Press [MODE] and toggle this setting until "Source Sweep" is displayed.
Press [System] > [Source sweep] > [-more-].
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
7-31
Example 11: Frequency Measurements Using a Separate Source
Measurement Examples
Press [START] and using the keypad, input the frequency at which the sweep starts.
Press [Enter] to accept the value.
Press [STOP] and using the keypad, input the frequency at which the sweep stops.
Press [Enter] to accept the value.
The following screen is displayed:
Figure 7-48.
Note that the frequency axis reflects the Start and Stop settings. Each time you
measure at different frequencies, it is necessary to re-input the [START] and [STOP]
values.
To achieve the maximum dynamic range, apply the highest levelled output power for
the source as possible i.e. +20 dBm.
3. Changing the power axis
To change the power axis, press [System] > [Control] > [-more-] > [SCALE].
Press [TOP] and/or [BOTTOM] to set the dB values as required. Press [Enter] to accept
the values.
In Source Sweep mode, you are unable to measure levels of less than -50 dBm.
In Source Sweep mode, the calibration factor is handled in a different manner since it is
defined by the current frequency of the source. Press [Sensor] > [Cal Factor].
Press [SOURCE] and toggle the setting by repeatedly pressing the soft key until the
V/GHz is displayed.
To display the Measurement screen, press any hard key.
Figure 7-49.
7-32
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
Measurement Examples
Example 11: Frequency Measurements Using a Separate Source
The response of the device under test is displayed on the screen and the display readout
box on the right-hand side shows:
Table 7-6.
Display Meanings
Item
Meaning
1
the power measurement at cursor 1
2
the power measurement at cursor 2
p
the power difference between cursors 1 and 2
x1
the frequency at cursor 1
x2
the frequency at cursor 2
4. Using the cursors
Two cursors are used to define the points at which or between which power is
measured. They are depicted as vertical dashed lines. The active cursor is depicted in
two ways:
• by a triangular end cap on the end of the dotted line.
• by a hyphen against the cursor number in the display readout box (see
Components of the Profiling Screen).
By positioning the cursors, the display readout box will show the average power
measured between the two cursors.
When Profile mode is first used, both cursors sit at the extreme right hand side of the
display. To move a cursor, press [System] > [Control].
To move the active cursor, press [<<] or [>>]. To activate the other cursor, press
[SWAP].
To measure the power difference between the cursors, link them first.
Press [System] > [Control] > [-more-] > [-more-] > [LINK CURSR].
If the cursors are now moved using [<<] or [>>], they move as a pair.
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
7-33
Example 11: Frequency Measurements Using a Separate Source
7-34
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
Measurement Examples
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
Chapter 8 — GPIB Operation
The majority of the GPIB commands have equivalents in the front panel menu settings. Note
that GPIB operation is not available when the power meter is running from the internal
battery (option 2000-996-R). The ML243xA Power Meter supports the IEEE 488.2–1992
GPIB standard in ML24XXA (native) mode (HP emulation commands are not GPIB 488.2
compliant). For further information about GPIB programming, refer to the IEEE 488.1/2
Standards documents.
8-1
Data I/O Formats
All ML24XXA (native) GPIB 488.2 commands that use parameters must have a space
between the command header and the first parameter, and all subsequent parameters must
be separated by a comma (,). Multiple commands may be sent on the same line, but must be
separated by a semicolon (;).
The format for ML243xA (native) GPIB commands is:
<command header><space><parameter 1>,<parameter n>,...
HP and ML4803 emulation commands on the other hand, do not have to have a space
between the command header and the parameter, or commas between the parameters.
The format for HP emulation commands is:
<command header><parameter 1><parameter n>...
The end of the command text must be terminated with either a line feed character (0Ah,
decimal 10) or a GPIB End of Transmission State (EOI), or both.
Data input and output formats and templates referred to throughout this chapter are
delimited with the less-than and greater-than characters (< >). Optional parameters and
suffix characters are delimited with brackets ([ ]). These characters are not part of the data
and are only used in this text to distinguish the data elements they represent.
All the commands which allow a level to be set as a value argument are floating point values
which can use the E-0x convention or a suffix multiplier. The GPIB standard [units]
convention (SEC for seconds, MS for milliseconds, etc.) IEEE codes and formats have been
implemented for the suffix units and multipliers. The suffix unit is always allowed but is not
required and is shown in brackets where appropriate.
The table below lists the numeric data suffix mnemonics for the ML243xA Power Meter.
These mnemonics are used when entering numeric data with GPIB commands (use of these
codes is optional).
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
8-1
Data I/O Formats
GPIB Operation
Commands which are not floating point, but integer, are:
Table 8-1.
Numeric Data Suffix Mnemonics
Suffix Multipliers
Suffix Units
Definition
Mnemonic
Definition
Mnemonic
1E18
EX
Decibels
DB
1E15
PE
dB ref to 1 mW
DBM
1E12
T
dB ref to 1 mV
DBUV
1E9
G
Megahertz
MHZ
1E6
MA
Percent
PCT
1E3
K
Seconds
SEC
1E-3
M
Seconds
S
1E-6
U
Volts
V
1E-9
N
Watts
W
1E-12
P
Hertz
HZ
1E-15
F
1E-18
A
All of the Status enable type commands (*SRE for example)
Stored numbers (i.e., 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5)
Offset table numbers (i.e., 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6...)
GPIB addresses (1 to 30)
User Averaging number in the AVG command (1 to 512)
Display contrast number (1 to 12).
The ML243xA data formats are summarized below:
<NR1>
This notation represents ASCII integer values. A comma (,) is used to separate multiple
values sent in a single command input or output string.
Examples of values that can be represented by <NR1> notation:
1
0
–29,179
<NR2>
This notation represents ASCII floating point values in decimal point format. A comma (,) is
used to separate multiple values sent in a single command's input or output string.
Examples of values that can be represented by <NR2> notation:
1.0
–0.00015
12.743, –180.07
8-2
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
GPIB Operation
Data I/O Formats
<NR3>
This notation represents ASCII floating point values in exponential format (scientific
notation). A comma (,) is used to separate multiple values sent in a single command's input or
output string.
Examples of values that can be represented by <NR3> notation:
1.0E9
7.056E3
9.0E2,3.42E2
<NRf>
This notation is used to signify that data can be in either <NR1>, <NR2>, or <NR3> format as
described above. Examples of values that can be represented by <NRf> notation:
1.0E9
10.005
83,4.5E2,234.9901
<String>
This notation represents a string of 7-bit ASCII characters (including non printable
characters) that is delimited (surrounded) with either single quotes (' ') or double quotes (“ ”).
The string can include text formatting characters such as linefeed, space, or carriage return.
Note that if a double quote character must be sent as part of the string, then it must be
followed by an additional double quote. Alternatively, the string can be sent using single
quotes as shown in the “cal_file” example below. Examples of data represented by <String>
notation are:
“1/15/98"
”Save “”cal_file"" now."
'Save “cal_file” now.'
<Arbitrary ASCII>
This notation represents undelimited 7-bit ASCII text. The end of the text must be
terminated with the line feed character (0Ah, decimal 10) or a GPIB End of Transmission
State (EOI), or both. This requirement makes it necessary for <Arbitrary ASCII> text to be
transmitted only at the end of a program or response message, that is, at the end of a multiple
input or output statement.
Example of data represented by <Arbitrary ASCII> notation:
Anritsu,MA2410A,123456,1.0<0A^EOI> The example shows a sample response from the
*IDN?, 488.2 common query. In the example, the instrument identifies itself as an Anritsu
MA2410A, with serial number 123456, and software version 1.0 installed. Note that decimal
10 (0Ah character) must be sent with the EOI to signal end of transmission.
<Arbitrary Block>
This notation represents data transmitted as 8-bit data bytes (00-FF hex, 0-255 decimal,
notation is <DAB>). Useful for transmitting large blocks of formatted ASCII or binary data or
unformatted binary data. The data stream is immediately preceded by a variable length
ASCII header that is encoded with the number of data bytes to be sent. The header always
starts with the (#) character.
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
8-3
Query Commands
8-2
GPIB Operation
Query Commands
Many ML24XXA (native) GPIB commands have an equivalent query command that will
return a current value or setting. Query commands and their returned strings are provided
with each command where applicable.
A complete listing of valid query commands and returned strings is provided in Appendix C.
8-3
GPIB PC Card Setup
The following GPIB driver configuration set up is recommended for reliable GPIB
communication with the ML243xA Power Meter. The set up is expressed in the terms used by
the National Instruments GPIB ISA and PCI cards and drivers for Windows and DOS.
GPIB Device Template
The ML243xA default primary address is 13. Separate device templates for the primary
address of each device can usually be set up separately. The settings for the device template
for the ML243xA are shown in the table below.
Table 8-2.
Template Settings
Item
Setting
Set EOI with EOS on write
YES
Type of compare on EOS
8 bit
EOS byte
0x0A (10 decimal)
Send EOI at end of write
YES
Readdressing
YES
Secondary address
NONE
GPIB Card Settings
The recommended GPIB card settings for use with the ML243xA are shown in the table
below.
Table 8-3.
item
Settings
Terminate read on EOS
No
Set EOI with EOS on writes
YES
Type of compare on EOS
8 bit
EOS byte
0x0A (10 decimal)
Send EOI at end of write
YES
System controller
YES
Assert REN when SC
YES
Enable Auto Serial polling
NO
NI card. Cable length for HS488
OFF
8-4
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
GPIB Operation
8-4
Using 488.1 GPIB
Using 488.1 GPIB
IEEE 488.1 level commands are in the form of data byte codes with the attention (ATN) line
set. A separate function is normally provided to drive these commands from a GPIB program.
A typical GPIB driver library call for 488.1 and 488.2 is given for each of the following
commands. Refer to the IEEE 488.1 and IEEE488.2 device driver manuals for full definitions
of the responses, and to find the actual command format for your GPIB driver library.
Device Clear (DCL) and Selected Device Clear (SDC)
These commands clear the GPIB device interface and have the following effects:
• All buffered messages waiting to be processed are cleared.
• All buffered data waiting to be read from the device is cleared.
• Stop any pending actions.
For example, if a request for data has been sent, and the system is waiting for the reading to
be triggered, the system would wait until the reading has been provided before any further
GPIB commands can be processed. The device clear will clear the data request so further
GPIB commands after the device clear has completed can be actioned.
Typical device library calls are 488.1 'ibclr' and 488.2 'DevClear'.
Device trigger (GET)
This command triggers a GPIB device. An action predefined by the setup of the device being
triggered will take place. On the ML243xA, the device trigger provides a trigger of the type
defined by the GTn commands previously sent and a reading put into the output buffer for
each display channel that is not OFF. In Profile mode, the profile display for the selected
channel only is output. Typical device library calls are 488.1 'ibtrg' and 488.2 'Trigger'.
Goto local (GTL)
This command forces the device out of remote mode and into local operation mode. The local
operation keys and menus are now available.
Typical device library calls are 488.1 'ibloc' and 488.2 'EnableLocal'.
Interface clear (IFC)
This is part of the GPIB initialization and forces the board to the controller in charge. Typical
device library calls are 488.1 'ibsic' and 488.2 'SendIFC'.
Local lockout (LLO)
Sends the local lockout to all devices. The local lockout disables the 'LOCAL' key on all the
devices.
Typical device library calls are 488.1 'ibconfig' plus correct option and 488.2 'SendLLO'.
Serial poll
This command will clear any SRQs and read the status byte of the device.
Typical device library calls are 488.1 'ibrsp' and 488.2 'ReadStatusByte'.
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
8-5
Using 488.2 GPIB
8-5
GPIB Operation
Using 488.2 GPIB
The IEEE 488.1 GPIB standard was updated in 1987 to 488.2 to better enforce
standardization of GPIB communication. This section explains the fundamentals of 488.2
GPIB operation and how it is implemented in the ML243xA Power Meter. Refer to the full
IEEE 488.2 standard for more detailed information.
8-6
488.2 Command Format
All commands should follow the basic format:
<MNEMONIC><white space><comma separated message parameters><terminator>
<white space> = Normally a space character, but can be any of the white space characters
listed in the 488.2 manual.
<terminator> = A line feed character (for example, \n in ‘C’ or VBLF in Visual Basic). An EOI
(End Of transmission Interrupt) can be used as the last character instead of the line feed.
Example: AVG A,MOV,64
A number of commands can be put into one program message by separating the commands
with semicolons. Example:
CHCFG 1,A;CHCFG 2,B-A;CHUNIT 1,W;CHUNIT 2,DBM;OPMD DIGIT
Status Byte
The 488.2 standard added two extra predefined bits to the status byte, these bits are the
Event Status Bit (ESB) and the Message AVailable bit (MAV).
Event Status Bit (ESB)
In 488.2 there is an event status register (ESR) that allows the state of the GPIB interface to
be monitored. All the bits in this register are defined. These bits are:
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PON
URQ
CMD
EXE
DDE
QYE
RQC
OPC
Table 8-4.
Event Status Register (ESR)
Bit
Description
PON
Power On bit. This bit is set on power up of the device only.
URQ
Not used in the ML243xA
CMD
Command error. Received an illegal command.
EXE
Execution error. Could not execute a command. For example, a parameter is
out of the allowable range, or requesting graph data while in readout mode.
DDE
Device Dependent Error. The specific error can be found by using the
ERRLST command.
QYE
Query Error.
RQC
Request Control. GPIB controllers only.
8-6
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
GPIB Operation
Table 8-4.
488.2 Command Format
Event Status Register (ESR)
Bit
Description
OPC
Operation Complete. When a program message that includes the *OPC
command has been completed, and the GPIB interface is idle, with any
responses read out of the output buffer this bit is set. For example, if the last
command in a configuration sequence is *OPC, the OPC bit in the event
status register will be set when that configuration list has been completed.
If an event causes a bit in the ESR to be set and the corresponding bit in the Event Status
Enable byte (ESE) is set, the ESB bit in the status byte will be set. This can cause an SRQ
(see Section 6-8) if the ESB bit in the Status Register Enable byte (SRE) is set. For example,
to get an SRQ on an unrecognized command do the following:
1. Set the CMD bit in the event status enable byte, and set the ESB bit in the status
register enable byte. Send:
*ESE 32;*SRE 32
2. Now if an unrecognized command is sent to the ML243xA, an SRQ will be given. Send:
asdf
3. An SRQ will be indicated.
4. To clear the SRQ do a serial poll, this should return the decimal value 96, bit 6 for the
SRQ and bit 5 for the ESB. The SRQ will be cleared.
5. To read the Event Status Register (ESR), send:
*ESR?
6. This will put 32 (or 160 if PON is set) in the output buffer to be read.
Message Available Bit (MAV)
This bit is set if there is any data in the output buffer waiting to be read, and can be used to
ensure that only the latest reading is used. Upon receiving a request for data, the next
reading taken is put in the output buffer. The data in the output buffer should always be read
when data is available to ensure that old data is never left behind. The advantage of this
method is that if the MAV bit is not set, the controller can not read old data, therefore data
can only be read after it has been requested. Example:
1. In Readout display with the output buffer empty and the MAV bit not set, configure the
ML243xA to give an SRQ on data becoming available by setting bit 4 in the Status
Register Enable byte (SRE):
*SRE 16
2. Request data from display channel 1 by sending:
O 1
3. The SRQ will be set with the new reading which will now be in the output buffer ready
to be read. The data should now be read so that the MAV bit will be cleared. If the data
is not read, or the output buffer not cleared, and another request for data is made this
data will be buffered after the previous data.
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
8-7
488.2 Command Format
GPIB Operation
Getting a Reading
The 488.2 standard requires that the data can only be read from the device after it has been
requested. Any data requested from the device is made available to be read, and is stored in
an output buffer.
As long as there is data in the output buffer to be read, the Message AVailable (MAV) bit in
the status byte is set. This bit allows data to be requested and, as soon as the data is
available, the MAV bit is set, from which a service request can be produced (SRQ).
The ML243X allows this output buffer to be turned off using the BUFF OFF command. In
this mode of operation, if a number of data requests are made with out reading the data after
each request, only the last data requested is available. Note that this does not include the
serial poll request which is handled independently.
Service Request Status (SRQ)
The System Service Request Status byte available over GPIB by a serial poll is defined as
follows:
Figure 8-1.
Service Request Status
RGH
If a sensor goes over or under the operating range, this bit is set. This bit can be used to set an
SRQ by setting the same bit in the SRE register using the *SRE command. For more detail,
see the STATUS command. This bit can only be cleared by sending a *CLS command.
LIM
If a channel pass/fail limit fails, this bit will be set. This bit can be used to set an SRQ by
setting the same bit in the SRE register using the *SRE command. For more detail, see the
STATUS command. This bit can only be cleared by sending a *CLS command.
MAV
If data is available in the output queue, this bit is set. This bit can be used to set an SRQ by
setting the same bit in the SRE register using the *SRE command. This bit is only cleared
when there is no data waiting to be transmitted.
ESB
If any of the event register bits are set and the corresponding event status enable bits are set
the ESB bit in the status byte will be set. This bit can be used to set an SRQ by setting the
same bit in the SRE register using the *SRE command. The ESB bit is cleared when the ESR
is read by using the *ESR? Command.
8-8
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
GPIB Operation
8-7
Functional Groups
Functional Groups
Throughout the ML24XXA (native) mode section of this chapter, the distinctive, white on
black text, in the upper corner of each command description area, indicates the Functional
Group to which the command belongs (Figure 6-1). All ML24XXA (native) commands are
presented by Functional Group in Appendix C, GPIB Quick Reference.
The Functional Groups are:
BNC
Commands in this group are used to configure the rear panel BNC inputs and outputs.
Calibration
The CALIBRATION group commands are used for the 0.0 dBm reference calibration and
zeroing of the power sensors.
Channel
The CHANNEL command group controls the configuration of the two channels. When both
channels are activated, Channel 1 appears at the top of the display and Channel 2 at the
bottom. If one channel is turned off, the remaining channel appears in the centre of the
screen.
Data Output
Commands in this function group are used to place data on the GPIB to be read by the
controller.
Display
These commands control characteristics of the display, including the peakmeter reading
display and contrast adjustments.
GPIB 488.2
This group contains the GPIB 488.2 mandatory commands. Refer to the IEEE 488.2-1987
Standards documents for further information.
GPIB Setup
The commands in this group control the GPIB Address, GPIB command set emulation mode
(ML24XXA, ML4803A or HP Emulation), and other parameters.
GPIB Trigger
Commands in this group are used to configure GPIB triggering and setup the GPIB Group
Execute Trigger (GET) and TR commands (TR0, TR1, TR2, TR3). Note that these commands
are exclusive to GPIB, and do not have equivalent front panel operations.
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
8-9
Functional Groups
GPIB Operation
Profile Setup
The PROFILE SETUP function group commands change how the profile is displayed on the
screen. Note that the Display Trigger configuration commands (DTRGD and GRPRD) in this
group do not change how the system triggers, only where the graph is drawn after a trigger
has occurred. Refer to the TRIGGER group functions to configure the measurement
triggering.
Sensor
The SENSOR group commands select the data acquisition controls for the selected sensor.
System
The SYSTEM group commands control the overall functionality of the ML243xA Power
Meter, including the system operation mode, cursor control, display configuration, sound,
printing, battery control and status, rear panel configuration, graphics, system security, and
system identity.
Trigger
The TRIGGER group functions are used to program the triggering of measurement data.
TRIGGER group commands are available in PROFILE operation mode, and in READOUT
mode if the SENSOR > SETUP > MODE submenu is set to CUSTOM.
In CUSTOM, the channels are triggered simultaneously if the trigger conditions are set to 1
and 2. This guarantees the trigger conditions are the same, and therefore the readings are
valid if taken at the same time.
Changes to the trigger configurations can be made using these GPIB commands regardless of
the power meter operating mode, but will not come into play until the unit is configured to
use triggers.
8-10
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
GPIB Operation
8-8
ML24xxA Native Commands
ML24xxA Native Commands
This section provides an alphabetical listing of the GPIB commands (mnemonics) used to
program the Model ML243xA Power Meter in ML24XXA (native) mode. The emulation mode
can be set through the front panel SYSTEM > more > more > Rear panel > GPIB > MODE
menu (see Chapter 4, Operation) or through the GPIB command EMUL.
All ML24XXA (native) GPIB commands that use parameters must have a space between the
command header and the first parameter, and all subsequent parameters must be separated
by a comma (,). Multiple commands may be sent on the same line, but must be separated by a
semicolon (;).
The format for ML24XXA (native) GPIB commands is:
<command header><space><parameter 1>,<parameter n>,...
The end of the command text must be terminated with a line feed character (0Ah, decimal 10)
or a GPIB End of Transmission State (EOI), or both.
*CLS (Clear GPIB status bytes)
Syntax:
*CLS
Remarks:
This command performs a status data structure clear command. The event
status register and the status register are cleared except for the MAV bit.
*CLS does not clear the output buffer.
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
8-11
ML24xxA Native Commands
GPIB Operation
*ESE (Event Status byte Enable)
Syntax:
*ESE <val>
val: 8-bit mask
Remarks:
Sets the Standard Event Status Enable Register bits.
Bit 7: Power ON, when there has been a transition from a power OFF
state to a power ON state.
Bit 5: Command Error. This bit is set when an incorrect GPIB code is
sent to the power meter.
Bit 4: Execution Error. This bit is set when incorrect data is sent to the
power meter, e.g., ADDR 57 would result in an Execution Error as the
allowable address value range is 1 to 30.
Bit 3: Device Dependent Error (DDE). This bit is set true whenever a
measurement error occurs. Device Dependent Errors are:
ZERO fail - Zero attempted for a sensor and failed.
CAL 0 dBm fail - 0 dBm value to far out.
Display channel number goes out of displayable range Displayable range is -270 dBm to +220 dBm.
Illegal log calculation for a channel - When a channel input
configuration combines sensors, the combination is done in
linear units. If the result of the combination produces a
negative linear value and the displayed units are log
(i.e., dB) this would be an illegal logarithmic operation.
Printer error - A print was requested and this error was
returned.
Request for data from a channel with no sensor connected.
Bit 0: Operation Complete. This bit is set when the *OPC command
completes and can be used to tell the controller the unit has completed
those commands just sent. See *OPC and *OPC? for more details.
All other bits are not used. The bits above are 488.2 common bits. The
ERRLST command will return an error list giving the state of the DDE
causes.
Related
*ESR?, *ESE?, ERRLST
commands:
8-12
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
GPIB Operation
Figure 8-2.
ML24xxA Native Commands
IEEE 488.2 Standard Status Structures
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
8-13
ML24xxA Native Commands
GPIB Operation
*ESE? (Return Event status register enable mask)
Syntax:
*ESE?
Remarks:
Returned format: <unsigned character>
When converted to an 8-bit binary number, this byte yields the bit
settings of the register.
*ESR? Event status register request
Syntax:
*ESR?
Remarks:
Return the value of the standard event status register. Afterwards the
event status register are cleared. The returned format is: <unsigned
character>. When converted to a 8-bit binary number, this byte yields
the bit settings of the register.
*IDN? (Request device identification)
Syntax:
*IDN?
Remarks:
Returned format:
<Company name>,<model>,<serial>,<firmware version>
*OPC (Operations complete)
Syntax:
*OPC
Remarks:
The ML243xA generates the OPC event in the standard event status
register when all pending operations have finished. An operation is
complete when all input messages before the command have been
completed and any responses have been read out of the output buffer.
Example:
RGH A, 1; RGH B, 3; *OPC
Will set the Operations Complete bit in the Event Status Register once
the Range Hold commands have completed.
*OPC? (Operations complete Output '1')
Syntax:
*OPC?
Remarks:
Places a single ASCII character '1' on the GPIB output queue when the
conditions for the *OPC command are met. An operation is complete
when all input messages before the command have been completed and
any responses have been read out of the output buffer.
Example:
RGH A, 1; RGH B, 2; *OPC?
Returns a ‘1’ on the GPIB output when it has finished setting the range
hold commands.
8-14
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
GPIB Operation
ML24xxA Native Commands
*RCL (Recall a stored setup)
Syntax:
*RCL <val>
val:
1 to 10
Remarks:
The ML243xA can store up to 10 instrument configurations for
convenient recall. The configuration parameters stored are:
Sensor Setup, Channel Setup, and Trigger Setup.
This command sets the ML243xA to a configuration previously stored in
memory locations 1 through 10. Trying to recall a setup that has not
been saved will set the execution bit in the event register (EXE in ESR).
Related
commands:
*SAV
*RST (Reset Device)
Syntax:
*RST
Remarks:
Resets the ML243xA to the default configuration (see Appendix A,
Section A-3). Offset tables are not cleared. The GPIB address and
emulation settings are not changed, and the input queue, output queue,
and status registers on the GPIB are not cleared. This command
produces the same result as the front panel key sequence System >
Setup > PRESET > RESET.
*SAV (Save configuration)
Syntax:
*SAV <val>
val:
1 to 10
Remarks:
Saves the configuration of the power meter into the memory location
specified. Sensor Setup, Channel Setup, and Trigger Setup are saved
along with all other instrument parameters.
Related
commands:
*RCL
*SRE (Setup service request enable register)
Syntax:
*SRE <val>
val:
8-bit mask
Remarks:
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
Sets the Service request enable register bits.
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
8-15
ML24xxA Native Commands
GPIB Operation
*SRE? (Return Service Request Enable register)
Syntax:
*SRE?
Remarks:
Returns the Service Request Enable register.
*STB? (Return Status Byte register)
Syntax:
*STB?
Remarks:
Returns the status byte value with bit 6 replaced with the MSS value.
MSS is the GPIB Master Summary Status, and indicates that the device
has at least one reason for requesting service. Although the MSS
message is sent in bit position 6 of the device’s response to the *STB?
query, it is not sent in response to a serial poll and should not be
considered part of the IEEE 488.1/2 status byte. MSS = the Status Byte
(STB) OR’ed with the Service Request Enable register (SRE). Unlike the
*ESR? Command, this command does not clear the register afterwards.
*TRG (Perform the GPIB 'Group Execute Trigger' command)
Syntax:
*TRG
Remarks:
Performs a 'GET' command. The GT0, GT1 and GT2 commands set the
response to the GET or *TRG commands. When the ML2430 Series is
triggered using this command or the 488.1 hardware trigger, a trigger
and output for each display channel that is not OFF gives a response in
the output queue. If both display channels are displayed, there will be
two messages in the output queue to be read out.
Related
commands:
GT0, GT1, GT2
*TST? (Self Test)
Syntax:
*TST?
Remarks:
Performs a self test and returns 'SUCCESS' or 'FAILED.'
NOTE: This command will restart the sweep in Power vs. Time mode.
Related
commands:
STERR
8-16
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
GPIB Operation
ML24xxA Native Commands
ADDR (Change GPIB address)
Syntax:
ADDR <val>
val:
1 to 30
Remarks:
Once the address has been changed, the ML243xA will no longer
respond to the old address. The power meter default address is 13.
Query:
ADDR?
Returned String:
ADDR <val>
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
8-17
ML24xxA Native Commands
GPIB Operation
AVG (Sets up averaging for a sensor)
Syntax:
AVG <s>, [<mode>],[<val>]
s: A or B
mode:
OFF
MOVMoving
RPTRepeat
AUTOAutomatic
val: ASCII string representing an integer, 1 to 512.
Remarks:
MOVING average gives an update to the meter every sample/gate
(normally 20 ms).
REPEAT averaging only returns a reading when the number of readings
specified by <val> have been taken (1-512).
AUTOMATIC averaging uses a MOVING type of average. The display
updates at approximately 100 ms intervals, however the data is
available at the full rate. The display is slowed down to prevent jitter
and allow the user to follow the update. Since AUTOMATIC averaging
automatically chooses an average number with the averaging mode set
internally to MOVING, the USER averaging number is not used.
However, if a value is entered in the same command as the one which
changes to AUTO averaging, it will also update the USER averaging
number.
Example:
AVG A, AUTO, 64
This command will set the system to AUTO averaging and the USER
averaging number to 64. But, the Auto Averaging measurement system
does not use the USER averaging number.
Note:
The AVG mnemonic can be sent to just change the <mode> of averaging
(MOV, REPEAT etc.) without sending a number, but there must be a
following COMMA to indicate the <val> parameter is not being sent.
See the first example below.
The AVG mnemonic can also be sent to just change the User Average
Number <val> (1 to 512) without changing the averaging mode, but
there must be a COMMA to indicate the <mode> parameter is not being
sent. See the last example below.
Query:
AVG? <S>
Returned String: AVG <S>,<MODE>,<VAL>
8-18
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
GPIB Operation
ML24xxA Native Commands
AVGLL (Auto low level averaging)
Syntax:
AVGLL <s>,<mode>
s: A or B
mode:
OFF
LOW
MEDIUM
HIGH
Remarks:
Sets the low level averaging window for the sensor. At resolution
settings of 0.01 and 0.001dB, digital readouts may flicker due to the
high reading rate of the ML243xA. Low level averaging applies a low
pass filter to post-average data readings to achieve a more stable front
panel display without slowing down the response of the meter to larger
changes in level. The three windows for LOW, MEDIUM and HIGH low
level averaging are ±0.01, 0.02, and 0.05 dB.
For example: When a LOW setting of low level averaging is applied
while stepping from 0 dBm to –1 dBm, the meter displays the final
reading within 0.01dB with no delay. The final settling of 0.01dB will
settle over a short subsequent period of time, leading to a stable high
resolution readout.
With a HIGH setting of low level averaging, the settling window is
increased (up to approximately 0.05 dB) and the settling time is longer.
With low level averaging OFF, the meter displays the final reading
instantly with no further settling observed. Any jitter due to noise is
reflected in the displayed reading, which may be inconvenient for high
resolution readings.
Example:
AVGLL A,HIGH
Query:
AVGLL? <S>
Returned String: AVGLL <S>,<MODE>
AVGM (Manual Averaging)
Syntax:
AVGM <s>
s: A or B
Remarks:
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
Changes the averaging of the sensor to 'Moving' averaging mode from
'Auto' Averaging. The average number is set to the same value that the
'Auto' averaging mode was using internally. If the sensor is not
presently in auto averaging mode, this command is ignored.
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
8-19
ML24xxA Native Commands
GPIB Operation
BAUTS (Battery Auto Turn OFF)
Syntax:
BAUTS <state>
state: ENABLE or DISABLE
Remarks:
Enable/disable the battery auto power shut off.
Note: Although GPIB is not available under battery operation, the state
of this parameter can be changed for later use.
Query:
BAUTS?
Returned String: BAUTS <state>
BAUTT (Battery Auto shut off after x minutes)
Syntax:
BAUTT <val>
val: 10 to 240 minutes
Remarks:
Automatically turns the unit off after x minutes when operating on
battery power.
Note: Although GPIB is not available under battery operation, the state
of this parameter can be changed for later use.
Query:
BAUTT?
Returned String: BAUT <val>
BUFF (GPIB response buffering enabled)
Syntax:
BUFF <s>
s: ON OFF
Remarks:
If BUFF is ON: In the ML243X native mode, 488.2 GPIB operation,
when a request for data is made the response is put in an output buffer
ready to be read by the controller. If another data request is made and
the previous data has not been read out of the output buffer; the new
data is queued after the original request. In this mode of operation the
GPIB response buffering enable is ON, and following the 488.2
specifications when ever a request for data is made the response should
be read.
If BUFF is OFF: In this mode when ever a request for data is made,
(except by serial poll) the output buffer is cleared and the only data in
the output queue will be the response to the last data request made. The
output buffer is cleared once a valid GPIB data request command has
been recognized.
Note:
8-20
If the buffering enabled is set to OFF and '*OPC?' is used, the '*OPC?'
will clear the output buffer of any previous response data so only the '1'
will appear.
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
GPIB Operation
ML24xxA Native Commands
CAL (Cal sensor to 0 dBm reference)
Syntax:
CAL <s>
s: A or B
Remarks:
Performs a 0dBm calibration when the sensor is attached to the
reference 0 dBm source on the ML243xA (or another 0 dBm reference
source). If the calibration fails, the 'execution error' bit in the Event
Status Register is set.
CFADJ (Cal Adjust)
Syntax:
CFADJ <s>, <units>, <val>
s: A or B
units: %, PCT, DB, or DBM
val: .07 to 150% +31.55 to -1.76dB
Remarks:
Sets a calibration factor to be used when performing a 0 dBm calibration
and the calibration factor source is set to 'Manual.' This value is the only
factor applied when performing a 0 dBm calibration. If the sensor
calibration factor source is set to V/GHz or Frequency, the sensor
internal EEPROM correction value at 50 MHz is used.
Example:
CFADJ A, %, 99
Sets the calibration factor to 99% for sensor A.
CFADJ A, DB, 0.2
Sets the calibration factor to 0.2 dB for sensor A.
Query:
CFADJ? <s>
Returned String: CFADJ <s>,<units>,<val>
CFCAL (Cal factor manual setting)
Syntax:
CFCAL <s>, <units>, <val>
s: A or B
units: %, PCT, DB, or DBM
val: .07 to 150% +31.55 to -1.76 dB
Remarks:
If the Cal factor source is set to manual, this is the calibration factor
number used.
Example:
CFCAL A, %, 99
Sets the calibration factor to 99% for sensor A.
CFCAL A, DB, 0.2
Sets the calibration factor to .2 dB for sensor A.
Query:
CFCAL? <s>
Returned String: CFCAL <s>,<units>,<val>
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
8-21
ML24xxA Native Commands
GPIB Operation
CFFRQ (Cal Factor Frequency value)
Syntax:
CFFRQ <s>, <value>[units]
s: A or B
value: 10 kHz to 122 GHz
Remarks:
Sets the frequency used to look up the correction data from the sensor’s
internal table.
Example:
Both of the following examples set the frequency for cal source
frequency to 25 GHz for sensor A.
CFFRQ A,25E9
CFFRQ A,25GHZ
Query:
CFFRQ? <s>
Returned String: CFFRQ <s>,<value>
CFSRC (Cal factor source)
Syntax:
CFSRC <s>,<source>
s: A or B
source: FREQ MAN VGHZ
Remarks:
Sets the source of the calibration factor. Frequency uses the internal
EEPROM calibration factor value in the sensor, from the frequency set
by the CFFRQ number. Frequencies between Cal Factor data points are
interpolated linearly to 0.01 dB resolution.
Manual uses the CFCAL number itself.
VGHz takes the frequency from the V/GHz input and uses it to look up
the calibration factor from the EEPROM in the sensor.
Related
commands:
CFVAL
Query:
CFSRC? <s>
Returned String: CFSRC <s>,<source>
8-22
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
GPIB Operation
ML24xxA Native Commands
CFUADD (Add an entry pair to a cal factor table)
Syntax:
CFUADD<s>,<table number>,<frequency value>[units],
<cal factor>,<cal factor units>
s: A or B
table number: 1 to number of tables supported by the sensor type
frequency value: 10 kHz to 122 GHz
cal factor: 0.07 to 150% 31.55 to –1.76 dB
cal factor units: %, PCT, DB, or DBM
Remarks:
Adds an entry pair to a cal factor table. This only affects the copy of the
cal factor table stored in the memory of the power meter. Cal factors
entered with this command will be available for use by the DSP, but will
NOT be saved to the sensor until a save command (CFUSAV) is
executed. If the sensor is changed or power is lost before saving, all
changes made since the last CFUSAV will be lost.
The user must ensure that the maximum number of cal factor data pairs
entered into a table is not exceeded. Sensors with a maximum frequency
of up to 40 GHz will hold 90 pairs, while sensors with a maximum
frequency of 50 GHz will hold 110 pairs.
Related
commands:
CFUSAV
CFUCT (Clear cal factor table)
Syntax:
CFUCT <s>,<table number>
s: A or B
table number: 1 to number of tables supported by the sensor type
Remarks:
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
Clears the cal factor table to one entry for 50 MHz at 100%, but does not
clear the identity of the table. The cleared table is automatically saved
to the sensor.
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
8-23
ML24xxA Native Commands
GPIB Operation
CFUID (Cal factor table identity update)
Syntax:
CFUID <s>,<table number>,<identity>
s: A or B
table number: 1 to number of tables supported by the sensor type
identity: Seven characters or until a message terminator will be read as
the identity.
Remarks:
Updates the seven character identity string. This only affects the copy of
the cal factor table stored in the memory of the power meter. To take
affect and not be lost, the table must be saved to the sensor using the
CFUSAV command.
Query:
CFUID? <s>,<table number>
Returned String: CFUID <s>,<table number>,<identity>
CFUNITS (Cal factor display units)
Syntax:
CFUNITS <s>,<units>
s: A or B
units: % or PCT dB or dBm
Remarks:
This command changes the display units of the calfactors between
either dB or percentage. Note that this will also set the form the data is
output over the GPIB (or RS232) when requested.
Query:
CFUNITS? <s>
Returned String: CFUNITS <s>,<units>
CFULD (Cal factor table binary load)
Syntax:
CFULD<s>,<table number>,<length>,<binary data>
s: A or B
table number: 1 to number of tables supported by the sensor type
length: Length of message in bytes
binary data: Same data as that received by CFURD
Remarks:
8-24
Loads binary data into the cal factor table. This command will
automatically save the data to the sensor.
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
GPIB Operation
ML24xxA Native Commands
CFUPT (Preset cal factor table)
Syntax:
CFUPT <s>,<table number>
s: A or B
table number: 1 to number of tables supported by the sensor type
Remarks:
Presets the cal factor table to the factory settings. The preset table is
automatically saved to the sensor. For a universal sensor, separate cal
factor tables exist for option 1 (when fitted) and normal operation. This
function will preset the table relating to the currently selected mode.
CFURD (Cal factor table binary read)
Syntax:
CFURD<s>,<table number>
s: A or B
table number: 1 to number of tables supported by the sensor type
F for the factory default table
Remarks:
This command outputs the cal factor table in binary mode in the
following form:
CFURD<space><length of binary data>,<binary data>
<length of binary data>: Total length of the binary data message, in
bytes, after the comma.
<binary data>: Made up of:
a. 8 bytes; 7 for the identity, plus a NULL terminator
b. 2 bytes representing the number of table pair entries
c. The cal factor table data in binary form. The binary data is output in
entries which are frequency/factor pairs of six bytes. The frequency is
held in 32768e-6LONG format and the cal factor in 1024INT format.
To convert these into real numbers the first four bytes of an entry are
read into a LONG variable, cast to a float and then divided by 32768e-6
to give a frequency. The last two bytes are then read into the low bytes
of a LONG then cast to a float and divided by 1024.
This message can be manipulated to program a different table using the
CFULD command.
CFUSAV (Cal factor table save)
Syntax:
CFUSAV
Remarks:
This command saves the cal factor table currently being edited to the
appropriate sensor. Processing may take a couple of seconds. Any
command that can select a new sensor and/or cal factor table for
changing, will not automatically save any previous changes made. It is
the users responsibility to issue a CFUSAV command.
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
8-25
ML24xxA Native Commands
GPIB Operation
CFUSEL (Select cal factor table)
Syntax:
CFUSEL <s>,<table number>
s: A or B
table number: table number or combination to use
0 = factory default table
1 to 10 = user table being used
11 to 20 = factory table + user table being used
Remarks:
Selects the cal factor table or combination of tables to be used and
automatically updates the sensor.
Example:
CFUSEL A,13
Selects the factory table plus user table 3 in sensor A.
CFUTBL (Number of cal factor tables in the sensor)
Syntax:
CFUTBL<s>
s: A or B
Remarks:
Returns the number of cal factor tables available in the selected sensor.
CFUUSE (Number of cal factor table being used)
Syntax:
CFUUSE<s>
s: A or B
Remarks:
Returns a number indicating the cal factor table, or combination of
tables, being used by the selected sensor. Possible returned values are:
0 = factory default table
1 to 10 = user table being used
11 to 20 = factory table + user table being used
CFUVLD (Valid cal factor table check)
Syntax:
CFUVLD <s>,<table number>
s: A or B
table number: 1 to number of tables supported by the sensor type
Remarks:
8-26
Returns a TRUE if the table number passed is a valid initialized table
for the selected sensor. Returns a FALSE if it is not.
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
GPIB Operation
ML24xxA Native Commands
CFVAL Current cal factor value
Syntax:
CFVAL<s>
s: A or B
Remarks:
Returns the cal factor value currently being used for the specified
sensor. This will be a fixed value only when in MANUAL cal factor
mode, otherwise the value will depend on the frequency entered when
cal source is FREQUENCY and the scaled frequency when the cal
source is V/GHz.
CFVAL will not return the updated Cal Factor Value if the system is in
TR0 Trigger Hold mode. That is, if you change the Cal Factor Frequency
and want to read back what the unit has set the Cal Factor to when the
system is in TR0 mode, the system will return the last Cal Factor value
before you went into TR0 mode.
Also, you may have to wait for approximately 0.25 s after you change the
Cal Factor Frequency to read back the Cal Factor Value even when not
in TR0, as CFVAL is not updated instantly after you change the Cal
Factor Frequency.
This restriction only applies to the CFVAL GPIB command and does not
effect any measurement taken. If you are in TR0 mode, change the Cal
Factor Frequency, and then take a measurement the Cal factor will be
calculated correctly.
Related
commands:
CFSRC, CFFRQ
CHCFG (Channel input configuration)
Syntax:
CHCFG <c>,<config>
c: 1 or 2
config: OFF, A, B, V, A–B, B–A, A/B, B/A
Remarks:
A, B, V = Sensor A, Sensor B, or External Volts
(If V is sent when in Profile or Source Sweep mode, an execution error
will occur.)
A–B, B–A = Sensor A minus Sensor B, Sensor B minus Sensor A
A/B, B/A = Sensor A divided by Sensor B, Sensor B divided by Sensor A
Example:
To set channel 2 to A–B:
CHCFG 1,A-B
Query:
CHCFG? <c>
Returned String: CHCFG <c>,<config>
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
8-27
ML24xxA Native Commands
GPIB Operation
CHRES (Set channel decimal pint resolution)
Syntax:
CHRES <c>,<val>
c: 1 or 2
val: 1 to 3
Remarks:
Set the number of decimal places displayed for the specified channel.
For example, specifying CHRES 1, 1 would yield a display of 1.5 dBm;
CHRES 1, 2 would yield 1.47 dBm; CHRES 1, 3 would yield 1.468 dBm.
If the number to be displayed is too large for the number of decimal
places selected, the decimal places displayed will be reduced so that the
display value can be shown.
Query:
CHRES? <c>
Returned String: CHRES <c>,<val>
CHUNIT (Set Channel units)
Syntax:
CHUNIT <c>, <units>
c: 1 or 2
units: W (Watts), DBM (dB), DBUV (dBmV), DBMV (dBmV)
Remarks:
DBM 0dB is equal to 1mW readout mode
W = Watts readout mode
V = Volts readout mode. This selection is automatically made when the
channel input configuration is set to External volts (EXT V).
DBUV = dBmV, 0dB is equal to 1mV in readout mode.
Query:
CHUNIT? <c>
Returned String: CHUNIT <c>,<units>
When the channel input configuration is set to External volts (EXT V),
the returned units are always volts, irrespective of what units have been
set.
CONT (Continue)
Syntax:
CONT
Remarks:
This command will allow the system to continue the startup sequence if
there are self test failures other than DSP errors.
Related
commands:
STERR, START
8-28
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
GPIB Operation
ML24xxA Native Commands
CUR (Cursor in Power vs. Time and Source Sweep modes)
Syntax:
CUR <cursor>,<fval>
cursor: 1 or 2
fval: 0.0 to 1440 min (24 h) in Power vs. Time mode
In Source Sweep mode, Power sweep: -120.0 dB to 30.0 dB
In Source Sweep mode, Frequency sweep : 10.0 kHz to 122.0 GHz
Remarks:
In Power vs. Time mode, the fval parameter is in minutes. In Source
Sweep mode, the fval parameter is in dB or Hz for a power sweep or
frequency sweep respectively.
Examples:
Power vs. Time:
Set cursor 1 to 30 s: CUR 1,0.5
Set cursor 2 to 12.5 h: CUR 2,750
Source sweep:
Power Sweep, set cursor 1 to 11.5 dB: CUR 1,11.5
Frequency Sweep, set cursor 2 to 15.6 GHz: CUR 2,15.6GHZ
Related
commands:
GRDDT, SRCSPFRQ, SRCSTFRQ, SRCSTPWR, SRCSPPWR
CURLK (Link cursors in all graphic modes)
Syntax:
CURLK <state>
state: ON, OFF
Remarks:
Links the two cursors together on the graph. When either cursor moves
left or right, the other cursor follows. Subsequent changes to delay will
move both cursors.
Query:
CURLK?
Returned String: CURLK <state>
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
8-29
ML24xxA Native Commands
GPIB Operation
CVSPF (V/GHz calibration factor stop frequency)
Syntax:
CVSPF <s>,<val>[units]
s: A or B
val: 10 kHz to 122 GHz
Remarks:
Sets the stop frequency of the V/GHz calibration factor settings.
Example:
CVSPF A, 20GHZ
Related
commands:
CVSPV, CVSTF, CVSTV
Query:
CVSPF? <s>
Returned String: CVSPF<s>,<val>
CVSPV (V/GHz calibration factor stop voltage)
Syntax:
CVSPV <s>,<val>[units]
s: A or B
val: -0.5 to 20.5
Remarks:
Sets the stop voltage of the VGHz calibration factor settings
Related
commands:
CVSPF, CVSTF, CVSTV
Query:
CVSPV? <s>
Returned String: CVSPV <s>,<val>
CVSTF (V/GHz calibration factor start frequency)
Syntax:
CVSTF <s>,<val>[units]
s: A or B
val: 10 kHz to 122 GHz
Remarks:
Sets the start frequency of the V/GHz calibration factor settings.
Related
commands:
CVSPV, CVSPF, CVSTV
Query:
CVSTF? <s>
Returned String: CVSTF <s>,<val>
8-30
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
GPIB Operation
ML24xxA Native Commands
CVSTV (V/GHz calibration factor start voltage)
Syntax:
CVSTV <s>,<val>[units]
s: A or B
val: -0.5 to 20.5
Remarks:
Sets the start voltage of the V/GHz calibration factor settings.
Related
commands:
CVSPV, CVSPF, CVSTF
Query:
CVSTV? <s>
Returned String: CVSTV <s>,<val>
DBLGHT (Battery LCD Back light mode)
Syntax:
DBLGHT <mode>
mode: ON, OFF, TIMED
Remarks:
Sets the mode of the LCD backlight when under Battery power.
ON = back light is ON all the time
OFF = back light is OFF all the time
TIMED = back light is on for a limited time period set by the DBLTIM
command.
Note:
Although GPIB is not available under battery operation, the state of this
battery-specific parameter can be changed through this GPIB command.
Related
commands:
DBLTIM
Query:
DBLGHT?
Returned String: DBLGHT <mode>
DBLTIM (Auto Backlight OFF timer setting)
Syntax:
DBLTIM <val>
val: 1.0 to 100.0 minutes
Remarks:
Sets the time limit when the backlight will turn off if the DBLGHT
setting is set to TIMED.
Note:
Although GPIB is not available under battery operation, the state of this
battery-specific parameter can be changed through this GPIB command.
Related
commands:
DBLTIM?
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
Returned String: DBLTIM <val>
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
8-31
ML24xxA Native Commands
GPIB Operation
DCONT (Set Display Contrast)
Syntax:
DCONT <val>
val: 1 to 10
Remarks:
One is the lightest setting, ten the darkest. The default is five.
Query:
DCONT?
Returned String: DCONT <val>
DCONTD (Set display contrast down by one)
Syntax:
DCONTD
Remarks:
Make the display lighter by lowering the contrast by one level.
DCONTU (Set display contrast up by one)
Syntax:
DCONTU
Remarks:
Make the display darker by increasing the contrast by one level.
DISP (Display On or OFF)
Syntax:
DISP <state>
state: ON or OFF
Remarks:
When using GPIB measurement, speed can be increased by not
updating the display. This command turns off the display and writes
REMOTE across the screen. If the LOCAL soft key is pressed, the
system reverts to DISP ON. The restrictions of this mode are:
1. Min max values read via the GPIB are not updated.
2. Relative operation is ignored so that the normal value is given.
3. DISP will not operate when sent via RS232.
Query:
DISP?
Returned String: DISP <state>
8-32
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
GPIB Operation
ML24xxA Native Commands
DPEAK (Peak meter display)
Syntax:
DPEAK <mode>
mode: A, B, A&B, OFF
Remarks:
Turns the peak meter display on or off for each channel.
A = Sensor A only
B = Sensor B only
A&B = Sensors A and B displayed at the same time
OFF = Turns the peak meter display off.
The peak meter display range covers 12 dB. When above the displayed
maximum or below the displayed minimum, the range is switched by 10
dB in the appropriate direction.
Note that in the event that the channel is displaying an alternative
measurement (e.g., external volts from the rear panel BNC) the peak
meter continues to represent the Sensor A and/or B data. This is very
useful for monitoring an external voltage on the meter, while peaking up
a response being monitored by a sensor (e.g., RF output).
Query:
DPEAK?
Returned String: DPEAK <mode>
DTRGD (Display Trigger Delay)
Syntax:
DTRGD <val>
val: 0.0 to 7.0 s
Remarks:
The delay time from the trigger point to when the profile starts to be
drawn.
Example:
DTRGD 1.25MS Sets the display trigger delay to 1.25 ms.
Query:
DTRGD?
Returned String: DTRGD <val>
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
8-33
ML24xxA Native Commands
GPIB Operation
DUTY (Duty cycle)
Syntax:
DUTY <s>,<duty_cycle>
s: A or B
duty cycle: 0.1 to 100%
Remarks:
Applies a duty cycle to the selected sensor. An offset will be applied
based on the entered value.
Example:
DUTY A,50
Specifies a duty cycle of 50% that will alter the displayed readings by
approximately +3.01 dB.
Related
commands:
DUTYS
Query:
DUTY? <s>
Returned String: DUTY <s>,<duty cycle>
DUTYS (Duty cycle state)
Syntax:
DUTYS <s>,<state>
s: A or B
state: ON or OFF
Remarks:
Turns on or off the duty cycle for the selected sensor.
Related
commands:
DUTY
Query:
DUTYS? <s>
Returned String: DUTYS <s>,<state>
8-34
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
GPIB Operation
ML24xxA Native Commands
EMUL (GPIB emulation mode)
Syntax:
EMUL <mode>
mode: ML24XX (Anritsu ML243xA native mode)
HP436A (Hewlett-Packard)
HP437B (Hewlett-Packard)
HP438A (Hewlett-Packard)
ML4803 (Anritsu ML4803A Series)
Remarks:
Set the GPIB emulation to emulate other types of power meters. This
command is available in any emulation mode, and resets the whole
GPIB interface when the emulation mode is changed.
When selecting GPIB emulation modes, the instrument configures itself
to the preset conditions of the instrument to be emulated. For example,
when selecting HP438A emulation, the front panel menus pass through
the presets for the HP437B (which presets sensor A to dBm) then selects
HP438A emulation (which presets sensor A to Watts).
ENTERR (Entry Error beep)
Syntax:
ENTERR <state>
state: ON or OFF
Remarks:
Turns the user entry error warning beep On or Off.
Query:
ENTERR?
Returned String: ENTERR <state>
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
8-35
ML24xxA Native Commands
GPIB Operation
ERRLST (Returns the DDE error list)
Syntax:
ERRLST
Remarks:
On detecting a DDE event, this command returns the error list giving
the state of the DDE causes. When the error list is read all parts of the
list are cleared and will be updated by any further occurrence of the
listed events. The ERRLST response is:ABCDEFGHIJKLMNO!PPPPPP!QQQQQQ!
A = Sensor A Zero state: 0 - ZERO done, 1 - Not done, 2 - Zero failed. (HP
error 01)
B = Sensor B Zero state: 0 - ZERO done, 1 - Not done, 2 - Zero failed. (HP
error 02)
C = Sensor A CAL state: 0 - Done, 1 - Failed. (HP error 05)
D = Sensor B CAL state, 0 - Done, 1 - Failed. (HP error 06)
E = Sensor A range hold: 0 - OK, 1 - Over range, 2 - Under range. (HP
error 17)
F = Sensor B range hold: 0 - OK, 1 - Over range, 2 - Under range. (HP
error 18)
G = Display channel 1 reading out of range; 0 - OK, 1 - Over range, 2 Under range. (HP error 25)
H = Display channel 2 reading out of range: 0 - OK, 1 - Over range, 2 Under range. (HP error 25)
I = Display channel 1 illegal log operation: 0 - OK, 1 - Error. (HP error
27)
J = Display channel 2 illegal log operation: 0 - OK, 1 - Error. (HP error
27)
K = Printer error: 0 - OK, 1 - Print error, 2 - Buffer full. 3 - Paper out
L = Sensor A fitted and used state: 0 - Fitted, 1 - Not fitted and used
M = Sensor B fitted and used state: 0 - Fitted, 1 - Not fitted and used
N = Display channel 1 limits state: 0 - Passed, 1 - High limit failed, 2 Low limit failed
O = Display channel 2 limits state: 0 - Passed, 1 - High limit failed, 2 Low limit failed.
PPPPPP = Last cause of a GPIB command error
QQQQQQ = Last cause of a GPIB execution error.
8-36
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
GPIB Operation
Notes:
ML24xxA Native Commands
The GPIB command error and GPIB execution error are always enclosed
within exclamation marks (!). If no errors have been produced since the
last ERRLST was read, the ERRLST will end with '!!!'.
When read for the first time after startup, a sensor may be reported as
not fitted even though it is. This is because the error condition of a
sensor used in a channel configuration was recorded before the sensor
initialization was completed.
If a sensor is not used in a channel configuration, it will be reported as
Zeroed, although it may not have been. If the sensor is then used in a
channel configuration, it’s zero status will be correctly reported.
Related
commands:
*ESE?, *ESR?
FAST (Operate in non-488.2 compliant mode)
Syntax:
FAST <state>
state: ON or OFF
Remarks:
This command allows the system, for speed purposes, to send the
present system readings directly to the output, with no buffering at all
(obeying the rules sent earlier when talk addressed). GPIB 488.2 rules
specify that data should only be given after a request. FAST mode
allows data to be read without requesting it first (like the HP437/8). The
following conditions and restrictions apply:
a.REMOTE is written across the screen, and no screen updates are
done.
b.Sensor data for a single sensor only can be output from display
channel 1, according to the following rules:
If the input configuration for display channel 1 is set to either OFF or
EXT VOLTS, it is set to ‘A’ and sensor A data is output if a sensor is
connected to input A.
If the input configuration for display channel 1 is set to a sensor
combination (A-B, A/B, etc.), the configuration is left as is but only the
sensor A data is output.
If the input configuration of display channel 1 is set to ‘B’, sensor B data
is output.
c.Output from display channel 2 is set to OFF.
d.Output is in dB only.
e.Sensor OFFSETS are applied.
f.Relative is applied if it is set to on before switching to FAST mode, and
if display channel 1 is configured for a single sensor and dB units.
g.No other data output requests are processed while in FAST mode,
except for serial poll. FAST mode must be turned off, for example, to ask
for the identity data.
h. FAST mode will not operate when sent via RS232.
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
8-37
ML24xxA Native Commands
GPIB Operation
FBEEP (Fail Beep On/Off)
Syntax:
FBEEP <c>,<state>
c: 1 or 2
state: ON or OFF
Remarks:
When ON, causes an audio beep every time the limits for the selected
channel fail. If FBEEP is ON, and FHOLD is ON, whenever the limits
specified for the channel have been exceeded, a beep sounds once every
second until FHOLD is turned OFF, or the CLEAR key (CLR) is pressed.
The FAIL indication is not affected by the CLEAR key, and can only be
cleared by turning FHOLD off. If a limit fail happens again, the alarm
sounds again.
Related
commands:
FHOLD
Query:
FBEEP? <c>
Returned String: FBEEP <c>,<state>
FHOLD (Fail indicator Hold)
Syntax:
FHOLD <c>,<state>
c: 1 or 2
state: ON or OFF
Remarks:
If the high or low limits fail, and this setting is turned on, the fail status
continues until the command is turned off. All BNC outputs, beeps and
displays continue to be in the 'fail' state until after the OFF is received.
Related
commands:
FBEEP
Query:
FHOLD? <c>
Returned String: FHOLD <c>,<state>
8-38
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
GPIB Operation
ML24xxA Native Commands
FROFF (Frequency/Offset Display)
Syntax:
FROFF <state>
state:
ON or OFF
Remarks:
This command turns on the top line information text displaying the
frequency and offset for the sensors used, similar to the min-max data
display except the left hand data is for sensor A and the right hand is for
sensor B. This command is only valid if the sensor cal factor source is set
to either frequency or V/GHz, and the sensor is used in a displayed
channel.
The display is 'FQ nn.nnGHZ OS nnn.nnn' for each sensor.
The frequency (FQ) is the entered frequency if the cal factor source is set
to frequency, or the calculated frequency if the cal factor source is
V/GHz.
The offset (OS) is the fixed offset if set to fixed, or the offset table
interpolated offset value depending on the frequency if the offset for the
sensor is set to table. If the offset for that sensor is OFF, dashes are
displayed in the OS part of the top line data.
Query:
FROFF?
Returned String: FROFF <state>
FRST (Factory Reset)
Syntax:
FRST
Remarks:
Resets the ML243xA to the factory default configuration (see Appendix
A). Unlike the *RST command, the offset tables are cleared and all
external interfaces are reset. Note that any settings in the *ESE and
*SRE registers prior to this command will be reset. The equivalent front
panel key sequence is System > Setup > PRESET > FACTORY.
GMNMX (Return the minimum and maximum values)
Syntax:
GMNMX <c>
c: 1 or 2
Remarks:
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
When min/max tracking is turned on, this command is used to read the
values. The format returned is:
<min_value>,<max_value>
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
8-39
ML24xxA Native Commands
GPIB Operation
GPRST (Reset min/max graph)
Syntax:
GPRST
Remarks:
When profile DATA HOLD mode is set to Min/Max points, this
command is used to reset the min/max values for each data point.
Related
commands:
GRPIX
GRAUTO (Auto scaling)
Syntax:
GRAUTO
Remarks:
Auto scale for all graphic modes (Profile, Source Sweep and Power vs.
Time). This command auto scales the y axis only based on the currently
displayed data.
GRAVG (Average between profile cursors)
Syntax:
GRAVG <state>
state: ON or OFF
Remarks:
Turns on or off averaging between cursors. The data returned by the
GRDRQ command includes the average of all data points between the
cursors if GRAVG is turned ON.
Related
commands:
GRDRQ
Query:
GRAVG?
Returned String: GRAVG <state>
GRCP (Connect points on profile)
Syntax:
GRCP <state>
state: ON or OFF
Remarks:
When set to ON, creates a line graph by connecting the profile data
points together. The default is ON.
Query:
GRCP?
Returned String: GRCP <state>
8-40
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
GPIB Operation
ML24xxA Native Commands
GRDATA (Display Graph Cursor Data)
Syntax:
GRDATA <state>
state: ON or OFF
Remarks:
Display the graph cursor data readout box. GRDATA must be turned on
before attempting to execute the GRDRQ command to send the data
over the GPIB. If GRDATA is not on, GRDRQ will produce an execution
error in the event status register (ESR).
Related
commands:
GRDRQ
Query:
GRDATA?
Returned String: GRDATA <state>
GRDDT (Power vs. Time data display time)
Syntax:
GRDDT <time>,<units>
time: 1 minute to 24 hours (1440 minutes)
units: MIN (minutes), HR (hours)
Remarks:
Sets the time period of the x axis in minutes or hours. For example,
either of the following statements may be used to set the time period to
2.5 hours:
GRDDT 2.5,HR
GRDDT 150,MIN
Query:
GRDDT?
Returned String: GRDDT <time>,<units>
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
8-41
ML24xxA Native Commands
GPIB Operation
GRDRQ (Return Graph Data readout)
Syntax:
GRDRQ
Remarks:
Returns the values in the graph data box. GRDATA must be turned on
before attempting to execute GRDRQ. The result string is:
GRDRQ
<channel_number>,<Cursor_1_dB>,<Cursor_2_dB>,<Delta_power>,
<Delta_time>[,<Average>]
<Delta_power> and <Delta_time> are absolute values. <Average> is
only present when between cursor averaging is turned ON with the
GRAVG command.
If no data is available, that is, a sensor is not fitted, the profile is not
triggered, or the Power vs. Time graph has not reached to the cursor, the
output for the relevant readout value is 999 output as 9.99e2.
Example result strings might look like:
GRDRQ 1, –10.000, –5.000, 5, 1E-03 (cursor average off)
GRDRQ 1, –10.000, –5.000, 5, 1E-03, –7.5 (cursor average on)
Related
commands:
GRAVG, GRDATA
GRFS (Profile Reference line state)
Syntax:
GRFS <state>
state: ON or OFF
Remarks:
Turn the profile reference line ON or OFF. The profile reference line is
centred between the top and bottom of the display.
Query:
GRFS?
Returned String: GRFS <state>
GRMD (Profile, Power vs. Time and Source Sweep Selection)
Syntax:
GRMD <c>
c: 1 or 2
Remarks:
Selects the channel displayed on the Profile, Power vs. Time and Source
Sweep graphs.
Query:
GRMD?
Returned String: GRMD <c>
8-42
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
GPIB Operation
ML24xxA Native Commands
GRPIX (Profile type)
Syntax:
GRPIX <mode>
mode: NORM, MINMAX, MIN, MAX, AVG
Remarks:
Changes the type of graph displayed:
NORM: Profiles the sensor readings vs. time from the triggered point.
MINMAX: Plots both the MIN and MAX values for each point on the
graph. If connect points (GRCP) is ON, a vertical bar is drawn between
the min and max points.
MIN: Same as NORM, but each point is the minimum value that point
has achieved.
MAX: Same as NORM, but each point is the maximum value that point
has achieved.
AVG: This position plotted on the chart for an x-axis time slot is the
average of all the readings during that x-axis time slot period, and is
only available in Power vs. Time mode.
Query:
GRPIX?
Returned String:
GRPIX <mode> (Mode can be AVG in Power vs. Time mode.)
GRPRD (Profile data collection period)
Syntax:
GRPRD <val>[units]
val: 100 ns to 7 s
Remarks:
Sets the time the system will collect data for and scale into the profile
graph after a trigger event.
Example:
GRPRD 20US sets the data collection period to 20 microseconds.
Query:
GRPRD?
Returned String: GRPRD <val>
GRPTP (Graph Pretrigger Percentage)
Syntax:
GRPTP <val>[units]
val: 0 to 100
units: PCT
Remarks:
Sets the pre trigger percentage of the profile screen. The percentage of
the data collection period that shows pretrigger information if the
display trigger delay is 1/PRF.
Query:
GRPTP?
Returned String:
GRPTP <val>
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
8-43
ML24xxA Native Commands
GPIB Operation
GRSWP (Graph Averaging Number for Profile or Source Sweep)
Syntax:
GRSWP <s>,<val>
s: A or B
val: 1 to 512
Remarks:
If GRSWS is set to ON, the points on the graph represent the averaged
value of that point against its averaged value since either the graph
averaging was reset, or since it was turned on.
Related
commands:
GRSWR, GRSWS
Query:
GRSWP? <s>
Returned String: GRSWP <s>,<val>
GRSWR (Reset Graph Averaging for Profile or Source Sweep)
Syntax:
GRSWR
Remarks:
If the Graph averaging mode in ON, this command resets the data
points and restarts the averaging.
Related
commands:
GRSWP, GRSWS
GRSWS (Graph Average State for Profile or Source Sweep)
Syntax:
GRSWS <state>
state: ON or OFF
Remarks:
Turns Graph Averaging on or off.
Related
commands:
GRSWP, GRSWR
Query:
GRSWS?
Returned String: GRSWS <state>
8-44
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
GPIB Operation
ML24xxA Native Commands
GRTMM (Profile Min/Max tracking mode)
Syntax:
GRTMM <mode>
mode: SINGLE, INFINITE
Remarks:
Set Minimum and maximum tracking mode between the cursors.
SINGLE: Resets min and max values after each sweep.
INFINITE: Never resets the min and max values. The min & max
values are updated after each sweep.
Note: The INFINITE tracking mode can be reset using the MMRST
command.
Related
commands:
MMRST
Query:
GRTMM?
Returned String: GRTMM <mode>
GRYB (Set graph Y-axis bottom scale)
Syntax:
GRYB <val>
val: -150.0 to +250.0
Remarks:
It is not necessary to specify units as the displayed units are always
assumed. Profile and Source Sweep modes always use dBm, but Power
vs. Time mode can also use dBmV or dBmV.
Query:
GRYB?
Returned String: GRYB <val>
GRYT (Set graph Y-axis top scale)
Syntax:
GRYT <val>
val: –150.0 to +250.0
Remarks:
It is not necessary to specify units as the displayed units are always
assumed. Profile and Source Sweep modes always use dBm, but Power
vs. Time mode can also use dBmV or dBmV.
Query:
GRYT?
Returned String: GRYT <val>
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
8-45
ML24xxA Native Commands
GPIB Operation
GT0 (Set to ignore the Group Execute Trigger (GET) command)
Syntax:
GT0
Remarks:
The ML243xA will ignore the GET command or a *TRG.
Related
commands:
*TRG, Group Execute Trigger (GET), GT1, GT2
GT1 (Set 'GET' command to TR1 type (immediate) trigger)
Syntax:
GT1
Remarks:
When the ML243xA receives a GET or *TRG command, the system will
perform a TR1-type trigger command.
Related
commands:
*TRG, Group Execute Trigger (GET), GT0, GT2
GT2 (Set 'GET' command to TR2 type (settling delay) trigger)
Syntax:
GT2
Remarks:
When the ML243xA receives a GET or *TRG command, the system will
perform a TR2-type trigger command.
Related
commands:
*TRG, Group Execute Trigger (GET), GT0, GT1
GTARM (Set profile trigger arming)
Syntax:
GTARM <state>
state: ON or OFF
Remarks:
Sets the profile trigger arming ON or OFF. If set to ON, the system first
checks to see if the BNC sweep blanking input is TRUE before it starts
to trigger. If set to OFF, the system triggers on whatever trigger source
it has been set up for.
Related
commands:
GTARM?
Returned String: GTARM <state>
Query:
8-46
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
GPIB Operation
ML24xxA Native Commands
GTDLY (Set profile trigger sample delay)
Syntax:
GTDLY <val>[units]
val: 0.0 to 1.0 s
Remarks:
Sets the time delay after the display trigger delay to when the system
starts to take readings and displaying them. This point is represented
by the left most cursor.
Note:
Changing the left most cursor or trigger delay time updates either the
cursor or the delay time value.
Query:
GTDLY?
Returned String: GTDLY <val>
GTGW (Set profile trigger gate width)
Syntax:
GTGW <val>[units]
val: 100ns to 7.0 s
Remarks:
Sets the time the system uses to perform whatever calculations are set
up. The time interval is represented by the space between the left most
cursor and the right most cursor. Changing either cursor, or the Gate
width value, will update both the cursors and the gate width value. The
default gate width value is 20 ms.
Query:
GTGW?
Returned String: GTGW <val>
GTLVL (Set profile trigger level)
Syntax:
GTLVL <val>
val: -30 to +20 dBm
Remarks:
When the system trigger in profile mode is set to either INTA or INTB
(internal sensor A or B) it will trigger on a power level given by the
sensor. This command sets the level.
Related
commands:
GTSRC, GTTYP
Query:
GTLVL?
Returned String: GTLVL <val>
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
8-47
ML24xxA Native Commands
GPIB Operation
GTSRC (Set Profile Trigger source)
Syntax:
GTSRC <source>
source: INTA, INTB, EXTTTL, MANUAL, CONT
Remarks:
INTA = internal sensor A
INTB = internal sensor B
EXTTTL = external BNC TTL trigger input
MANUAL = manual push button trigger
CONT = continuous
MANUAL trigger only functions correctly on non-repetitive sampling,
i.e., the PROFILE PERIOD needs to be 6 ms or greater.
The display shows an ‘x’ marking the trigger point. This trigger point
mark rotates as the profile data is updated, changing between 'x' and '+'
on each data update. On rapid updates, the trigger point mark may
appear like a star (*), as it is rotating so quickly. In manual, external or
GPIB triggered displays, the mark rotates at a slower rate and each true
data update can be seen.
The GTSRC setting is overridden by the Group Execute Trigger GPIB
common command (GET), *TRG, TR0, TR1 and TR2 commands. The
TR3 command will return the system to its previous state if the TR0
(Trigger hold) command has been used.
Query:
GTSRC?
Returned String: GTSRC <source>
GTTYP (Set profile trigger type)
Syntax:
GTTYP <type>
type: RISE, FALL
Remarks:
When the profile system trigger source is set to INTA or INTB (Internal
A or B) the ML243xA triggers on a power level (GTLVL) rising or falling.
This command sets the trigger for a rising or falling edge.
Related
commands:
GTLVL, GTSRC
Query:
GTTYP?
Returned String: GTTYP <type>
8-48
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
GPIB Operation
ML24xxA Native Commands
GTXTTL (Set profile external trigger edge)
Syntax:
GTXTTL <type>
type: RISE, FALL
Remarks:
When the profile system trigger source is set to External TTL, the
ML243xA triggers on a TTL level rising or falling. This command sets
the trigger for either a rising or falling edge.
Related
commands:
GTSRC
Query:
GTXTTL?
Returned String: GTXTTL <type>
HLIM (Set High limits)
Syntax:
HLIM <c>, <val>
c: 1 or 2
val:
Units Min Max
dBm -270 220
dBmV-53.00 147.00
dBV 7.00 207.00
Watts 0.0 50.0
Remarks:
Sets the high limit. The HLIMS command turns the limits on and off. It
is not necessary to enter the units as the limit value is checked against
the displayed value. Therefore, if the limits have been set for –10 dBm
(HLIM 1, –10) and the display units are subsequently changed from
dBm to Watts, the system will still check for the reading to rise above
-10, even though the display units type has been changed.
Example:
The high limit is set to –10 dBm and turned ON. The display is in dBm.
A reading of –9.500 dBm would pass. If the display is subsequently
changed to Watts, a reading of 112.2 mW would fail, because the
DISPLAYED value is higher than –10. Limit checking only uses the
displayed value and does not change its value even though the display
units have changed.
Related
commands:
HLIMS
Query:
HLIM? <c>
Returned String: HLIM <c>,<val>
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
8-49
ML24xxA Native Commands
GPIB Operation
HLIMS (Turn on/off High limits)
Syntax:
HLIMS <c>,<state>
c: 1 or 2
state: ON or OFF
Remarks:
The HLIMS command turns the limits on and off.
Related
commands:
HLIM
Query:
HLIMS? <c>
Returned String: HLIMS <c>,<state>
HOLD (Graph hold)
Syntax:
HOLD <state>
state: ON or OFF
Remarks:
This command holds the present graph displayed on the screen and is
available in all graph modes. In Profile and Power vs. Time modes, this
command will not work when trigger source is set to MANUAL. The
held graph can be requested over GPIB by using the OGD or OGBD
commands. The same graph data will be held until HOLD is switched
off.
Related
commands:
OGD, OGBD
Query:
HOLD?
Returned String: HOLD <state>
IBBLP (Blanking active TTL level)
Syntax:
IBBLP <polarity>
polarity: POS (positive, for high TTL level)
NEG (negative, for low TTL level)
Remarks:
Changes the expected polarity of the TTL Blanking input signal.
Query:
IBBLP?
Returned String: IBBLP <polarity>
8-50
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
GPIB Operation
ML24xxA Native Commands
KEYCK (Turn key click sound on or off)
Syntax:
KEYCK <state>
state: ON or OFF
Remarks:
When ON, an audible annunciator produces a click corresponding to
every key press.
Query:
KEYCK?
Returned String: KEYCK <state>
LINK (Trigger linking)
Syntax:
LINK <state>
state: ON or OFF
Remarks:
This will link the trigger set-up between Profile mode and Readout mode
so that the sample delay and the gate width will agree. A change to the
trigger set-up in either Readout or Profile system set-up will affect
either display mode.
Query:
LINK?
Returned String: LINK <state>
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
8-51
ML24xxA Native Commands
GPIB Operation
LLIM (Set Low limits)
Syntax:
LLIM <c>,<val>
c: 1 or 2
val:
Units Min Max
dBm -270 220
dBmV -53.00 147.00
dBV 7.00 207.00
Watts 0.0 50.0
Volts 0.0 20.0
Remarks:
Sets the low limit. The LLIMS command turns the limits on and off. It is
not necessary to enter the units as the limit value is checked against the
displayed value.
Therefore, if the limits have been set for –10 dBm (LLIM 1, –10) and the
display units are subsequently changed from dBm to Watts, the system
still checks for the reading to rise above –10, even though the display
units type has been changed.
Related
commands:
LLIMS
Query:
LLIM? <c>
Returned String: LLIM <c>,<val>
LLIMS (Turn on/off low limits)
Syntax:
LLIMS <c>,<state>
c: 1 or 2
state: ON or OFF
Remarks:
The LLIMS command turns the limits on and off.
Related
commands:
LLIM
Query:
LLIMS? <c>
Returned String: LLIMS <c>,<state>
8-52
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
GPIB Operation
ML24xxA Native Commands
MMRST (Min Max Tracking reset)
Syntax:
MMRST <c>
c: 1 or 2
Remarks:
This command resets the min/max values when in 'Readout' or 'Power
vs. Time' mode. In profile mode, this command is used to reset the
channels min/max values.
MNGDB (Output Min Graph Binary Data)
Syntax:
MNGDB
Remarks:
Available in graph modes only. Outputs in binary form the min graph
data to the GPIB in the long integer form of 1024 bits per dB as a
definite length arbitrary block response data. The C programming
example 'Binary output decoding' shows how to extract the binary data.
The response form is as follows:
MNGDB <#><length><number_of_bytes><data_byte_1><data_byte_2>
...
<data_byte_n><\n>
<length> number of ASCII characters make up the number_of_bytes
value
<number_of_bytes> number of bytes of data contained in rest of the
string
<data_byte_n> four of these values makes up the long integer.
For example: FF FF D1 64 = –11932 As it is based on 1024 per dB,
divide by 1024 to get the dB value (–11.652).
MNGD (Output Min Graph Data)
Syntax:
MNGD
Remarks:
Available in graph modes only. Outputs in ASCII form the min graph
data. The format is as follows:
MNGD
<number_of_elements>,<element_1>,<element_2>,<element_n>...<\n>
The first number in the string is the number of elements to follow, and is
always 200 for the ML243xA.
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
8-53
ML24xxA Native Commands
GPIB Operation
MNMXS (Track min and max values)
Syntax:
MNMXS <c>,<state>
c: 1 or 2
state: ON or OFF
Remarks:
Turns ON or OFF the min/max tracking for the specified channel. The
MMRST command resets the values.
Related
commands:
MMRST
Query:
MNMXS? <c>
Returned String: MNMXS <c>,<state>
MODDEL (Modem redial delay time)
Syntax:
MODDEL <value>
value: 1 to 10
Remarks:
Sets the autodial delay between retrys. The value is the number of
minutes to delay between each autodial retry after a failure to connect.
This interval can be set from 1 to 10 minutes. See Section 5-10 for more
information on modem operation.
Query:
MODDEL?
Returned String: MODDEL <value>
MODINIT (Initialize modem)
Syntax:
MODINIT
Remarks:
Initializes the modem connected to the ML243xA serial port. See Section
5-10 for more information on modem operation.
MODLIM (Autodial enable for limits failure)
Syntax:
MODLIM <state>
value: TRUE or FALSE
Remarks:
When set to TRUE, produces an SRQ and autodials the phone number
(set with MODPH) when a channel limits failure occurs. See Section
5-10 for more information on modem operation.
Query:
MODLIM?
Returned String: MODLIM <true> or <false>
8-54
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
GPIB Operation
ML24xxA Native Commands
MODPH (Autodial phone number)
Syntax:
MODPH <number_text>
number text: the number to be dialed
Remarks:
Enter the phone number to be dialed when autodialing is enabled.
Reads in a string of up to 40 ASCII characters or the end of the message.
When the number is being dialed, a dot (.) will be interpreted as a
2-second delay in the dialing sequence; a minus sign (–) will be
interpreted as wait for another dialing tone. See Section 5-10 for more
information on modem operation.
Query:
MODPH?
Returned String: MODPH <number text>
MODPWR (Autodial enable for power on)
Syntax:
MODPWR <state>
value: TRUE or FALSE
Remarks:
When set to TRUE, produces an SRQ and autodials the phone number
(set with MODPH) when the ML243xA is powered on. See Section 5-10
for more information on modem operation.
Query:
MODPWR?
Returned String: MODPWR <true> or <false>
MODRED (Redial count)
Syntax:
MODRED <count>
count: 0 to 10
Remarks:
Sets the number of retrys after a failure to connect. The delay between
retrys is set using MODDEL. See Section 5-10 for more information on
modem operation.
Query:
MODRED?
Returned String: MODRED <count>
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
8-55
ML24xxA Native Commands
GPIB Operation
MODRNG (Autodial enable for range error)
Syntax:
MODRNG <state>
value: TRUE or FALSE
Remarks:
When set to TRUE, produces an SRQ and autodials the phone number
(set with MODPH) when a sensor range error occurs. See Section 5-10
for more information on modem operation.
Query:
MODRNG?
Returned String: MODRNG <state>
MXGDB (Output Max Graph Binary Data)
Syntax:
MXGDB
Remarks:
Available in graph modes only. Outputs in binary form the max graph
data to the GPIB in the long integer form of 1024 bits per dB as a
definite length arbitrary block response data. The C programming
example 'Binary output decoding' shows how to extract the binary data.
The response form is as follows:
MXGDB <#><length><number_of_bytes><data_byte_1><data_byte_2>
...
<data_byte_n><\n>
<length> number of ASCII characters that make up the
number_of_bytes value
<number_of_bytes> number of bytes of data contained in rest of the
string
<data_byte_n> four of these values make up the long integer.
For example: FF FF D1 64 = –11932 As it is based on 1024 per dB, divide
by 1024 to get the dB value (–11.652).
MXGD (Output Max Graph Data)
Syntax:
MXGD
Remarks:
Available in graph modes only. Outputs in ASCII form the max graph
data.
The format is as follows:
MX
GD<number_of_elements>,<element_1>,<element_2>,<element_n>...<\
n>
The first number in the string is the number of elements to follow, and is
always 200 for the ML243xA.
8-56
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
GPIB Operation
ML24xxA Native Commands
O (Return display channel reading)
Syntax:
O <c>
c: 1 or 2
Remarks:
Readout and Power vs. Time modes only. Returns the next measured
reading available in the output buffer from the selected channel. The
reading will sit in the output buffer until it is read. If another reading is
requested, that reading will be buffered after the previous reading. If
the first reading requested is read before another request for data, the
output buffer will be empty. The MAV bit in the status byte will always
indicate the state of the buffer. The display is updated at a constant rate
with available readings if the display is on.
If the selected channel is turned off, an execution error is returned. The
returned string is the value plus a line feed (hex 0X0A), no terminators.
OBACM (AC mod output polarity configuration)
Syntax:
OBACM <polarity>
polarity: POS (positive)
NEG (negative)
Remarks:
Changes the polarity of the AC mod BNC output signal.
Query:
OBACM?
Returned String: OBACM <polarity>
OBCH (BNC output port channel configuration)
Syntax:
OBCH <port>,<c>
port: 1 or 2
c: 1 or 2
Remarks:
This command changes the channel represented by BNC output modes
that can take data from either channel 1 or 2, such as “Analog Output”
and “Pass/Fail” modes.
Query:
OBCH? <port>
Returned String: OBCH <port>,<c>
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
8-57
ML24xxA Native Commands
GPIB Operation
OBDSP (BNC analog output display stop value)
Syntax:
OBDSP <port>,<units>,<val>
port: 1 or 2
units: W (Watts)
DB (dB)
DBM (dB)
DBUV (dBmV)
DBMV (dBmV)
val: 0 to 1 kW
-70 to 47dB
-23 to 94 dBmV
37 to 154 dBmV
Remarks:
Sets up the stop value for the analog out scale of the display.
Query:
OBDSP? <port>
Returned String: OBDSP <port>,<units>,<val>
OBDST (BNC analog out display start value)
Syntax:
OBDST <port>,<units>,<val>
port: 1 or 2
units: W (Watts)
DB (dB)
DBM (dB)
DBUV (dBmV)
DBMV (dBmV)
val: 0 to 1 kW
-70 to 47dB
-23 to 94 dBmV
37 to 154 dBmV
Remarks:
Sets up the start value for the analog out scale of the display.
Query:
OBDST? <port>
Returned String: OBDST <port>,<units>,<val>
8-58
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
GPIB Operation
ML24xxA Native Commands
OBMD (BNC output mode select)
Syntax:
OBMD <port>,<mode>
port: 1 or 2
mode: 'OFF' (output set to ground) port 1 or 2
'AOUT' (analog scaled output) port 1 or 2
'PASS/FAIL' (pass/fail) port 1 or 2
'SIGA' (signal output sensor A) port 1 only
‘LVLA1’ Signal channel range 1 amplifier output for sensor A
‘LVLA2’ Signal channel range 2 amplifier output for sensor A
‘LVLB1’ Signal channel range 1 amplifier output for sensor B
‘LVLB2’ Signal channel range 2 amplifier output for sensor B
'ACMOD' (AC mod output) port 1 only
'RFB' (RF blanking while zeroing) port 2 only
'SIGB' (signal output sensor B) port 2 only
Remarks:
Changes the type of output selected for the BNC outputs.
Query:
OBMD? <port>
Returned String: OBMD <port>,<mode>
OBPL (BNC pass/fail pass level)
Syntax:
OBPL <port>,<level>
port: 1 or 2
level: HIGH (TTL high is PASS)
LOW (TTL low is PASS)
Remarks:
Selects the PASS level for the Pass/fail type of output.
Query:
OBPL? <port>
Returned String: OBPL <port>,<level>
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
8-59
ML24xxA Native Commands
GPIB Operation
OBVSP (BNC analog output stop voltage scale)
Syntax:
OBVSP <port>,<val>
port: 1 or 2
val: -5.00 to +5.00 Volts
Remarks:
Sets up the stop value for the voltage output in analog output mode.
Attempting to set the start value to a voltage greater than the stop
value, or the stop value lower than the start value, will result in an
execution error.
Query:
OBVSP? <port>
Returned String: OBVSP <port>,<val>
OBVST (BNC analog output start voltage scale)
Syntax:
OBVST <port>,<val>
port: 1 or 2
val: -5.00 to +5.00 Volts
Remarks:
Sets up the start value for the voltage output in analog output mode.
Attempting to set the start value to a voltage greater than the stop
value, or the stop value lower than the start value, will result in an
execution error.
Query:
OBVST? <port>
Returned String: OBVST <port>,<val>
OBZL (BNC RF blanking output level when zeroing)
Syntax:
OBZL <level>
level: HIGH (TTL high), LOW (TTL low)
Remarks:
Sets the TTL level of the BNC RF blanking output.
Query:
OBZL?
Returned String: OBZL <level>
OFFCLR (Clear an offset table)
Syntax:
OFFCLR <val>
val: 1 to 5
Remarks:
8-60
Sets all the values in the table specified to 0 dB and 0.00 Hz.
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
GPIB Operation
ML24xxA Native Commands
OFFFIX Offset fixed value
Syntax:
OFFFIX <s>,<val>[units]
s: A or B
val: -200.000 to +200.000
units: dB
Remarks:
The value added to the sensor if the offset type is set to FIXED.
Example:
To set the fixed offset for sensor A to -47 dBm:
OFFFIX A,-47DB
Query:
OFFFIX? <s>
Returned String: OFFFIX <s>,<val>
OFFTBL (Specify the table used to apply offsets to the sensor)
Syntax:
OFFTBL <s>, <val>
s: A or B
val: 1 to 5
Remarks:
If the Offset Type is set to TABLE, use this command to specify which of
the five offset tables to apply to the sensor.
The tables are a set of frequency-against-dB offsets. The offset value
used from the table depends on the setting of the frequency correction
source. If the source is FREQUENCY, the entered frequency is used to
calculate the offset from the table. If the frequency correction source is
V/GHz, the frequency value calculated from the supplied ramp input is
used to calculate the offset from the table.
If the frequency does not match any frequency in the table, interpolation
is used to calculate the correct offset.
Note:
If the frequency is greater than the maximum frequency in the table, the
offset value from the maximum table frequency is used. If the frequency
is less than the minimum frequency in the table, the offset from the
minimum table frequency is used. The frequency comparisons start from
the beginning of the table; if the entry is 0 Hz, this is counted as the end
of the table.
Query:
OFFTBL? <s>
Returned String: OFFTBL <s>,<val>
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
8-61
ML24xxA Native Commands
GPIB Operation
OFFTBR (Output an offset table)
Syntax:
OFFTBR <val>
val: 1 to 5
Remarks:
Outputs the selected offset table. The returned string is constructed as
follows:
OFFTBR
#<length><number_of_bytes>,<element1<element2><element>
Where <length> is the character size of the <number_of_bytes> field and
<number_of_bytes> is the number of bytes which make up the string
after the comma (,). For example:
OFFTBR #41600,<data...>
4 = number of character to read next for the data length
1600 = One thousand and six hundred bytes of data to read in,
representing 200 elements placed one after the other without commas.
Each <element> is made up of 8 bytes; the first four bytes are the
Frequency and the second four bytes are the corresponding dB value for
the Frequency. For example:
<data_element1><data_element2><data_element3> is equal to:
<freq1><dB1><freq2><dB2><freq3><dB3>... is equal to:
<4bytes1><4bytes1><4bytes2><4bytes2><4bytes3><4bytes3>
The 4 byte binary values are 4 bytes single precision floating point
binary data. The C programming example 'Binary output decoding'
shows how to extract the binary data.
OFFTBU (Updates an offset table)
Syntax:
OFFTBU <val>,<bytes>,<binary_data...>
val: 1 to 5
bytes: number of bytes in the binary_data string
binary_data: frequency and dB offset
Remarks:
This command updates the offset table specified by <val>.
<bytes> is the number of bytes in the binary_data string and
<binary_data> is a string which represents the frequency and the dB
offset to apply in the format of: <element1><element2><elementn...>,
where <elementn> has four bytes to represent the frequency and four
bytes to represent the dB value.
The four byte value can be created by multiplying the floating point
number by 1024 and converting the LONG number to an ASCII string.
For example: -10.234 becomes 10479, converted to hexadecimal
FFFFD711. See the programming examples for more detail.
8-62
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
GPIB Operation
ML24xxA Native Commands
OFFTYP (Offset type to use)
Syntax:
OFFTYP <s>,<type>
s: A or B
type: OFF, FIXED, TABLE
Remarks:
Selects the type of offset to use.
OFF = No offset to be used.
FIXED = Use the fixed value (OFFFIX) specified.
TABLE = Use the Offset table (OFFTBL) specified.
Query:
OFFTYP? <s>
Returned String: OFFTYP <s>,<type>
OFFVAL (Sensor Offset Value)
Syntax:
OFFVAL <s>
s: A or B
Remarks:
Returns the Offset value being applied to the specified sensor.
Related
commands:
OFFTBL, OFFTYP
OGBD (Output Graph Binary Data)
Syntax:
OGBD
Remarks:
Output the next complete set of graph data to the GPIB in the long
integer form of 1024 bits per dB as a definite length arbitrary block
response data. The C programming example 'Binary output decoding'
shows how to extract the binary data. The response form is as follows:
OGBD <#><length><number_of_bytes><data_byte_1><data_byte_2> ...
<data_byte_n><\n>
<length> number of ASCII characters that make up the
number_of_bytes value
<number_of_bytes> number of bytes of data contained in rest of the
string
<data_byte_n> four of these values makes up the long integer.
For example: FF FF D1 64 = –11932 As it is based on 1024 per dB,
divide by 1024 to get the dB value (–11.652).
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
8-63
ML24xxA Native Commands
GPIB Operation
OGD (Output Graph Data)
Syntax:
OGD
Remarks:
Outputs the next complete set of graph data.
The format is as follows:
OGD
<number_of_elements>,<element_1>,<element_2>,<element_n>...<\n>
The first number in the string is the number of elements to follow, and is
always 200 for the ML243xA.
OGSD (Output Valid Samples Array (Power vs. Time mode only))
Syntax:
OGSD
Remarks:
A power verses time chart plots the readings on a scrolling chart from
left to right. If GRCP (connect points) is on and no new data has been
received for a time slot, the graph is plotted with the same value as the
previous time slot but the data for that sample position is not marked as
valid. This command will read out an array of 1's and 0's that indicate
whether the data for that time slot is valid. For example, '1' for valid and
'0' for connecting data only.
Because the time between reading the data and reading the valid
sample data may shift the valid samples out of sync with the graph read,
it is recommended that a 'HOLD ON' be issued before reading the graph
and sample data, and a 'HOLD OFF' after. This will make sure that the
sample data and the graph data agree.
If not in Power vs. Time mode, this command will set an execution error.
OI (Output device identification)
Syntax:
OI
Remarks:
Returned format:
<Company name>,<model>,<serial>,<firmware version>
8-64
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
GPIB Operation
ML24xxA Native Commands
ON (Output number of channel readings)
Syntax:
ON <c>,<val>
c: 1 or 2
val: 1 to 1000
Remarks:
Readout and Power vs. Time modes only. This command returns the
specified number of readings for the specified channel. The readings are
first assembled, and then passed to the GPIB as a whole, with a line feed
character (hex 0x0a) marking the end of the string.
Example: ON 1, 9
This example will return:
–10.234, –10.234, –10.235, –10.238, -10.250, –10.270, –10.500, –10.934,
–12.234<0x0a>
OPMD (ML243xA operation mode)
Syntax:
OPMD <mode>
mode: DIGIT
PROFILE
PWRTIM
SRCSWP
Remarks:
This command selects the ML243xA operation mode (data collection
method).
DIGIT = digital read out of channel data
PROFILE = profile of graphic display
PWRTIM = graph of channel power versus time
SRCSWP = source sweep graphic display
To use Graph output commands, the ML243xA must be in Profile or
Power vs. Time mode. To use the output channel data commands, the
ML243xA must be in the digital readout mode.
Related
commands:
GRMD
Query:
OPMD?
Returned String: OPMD <mode>
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
8-65
ML24xxA Native Commands
GPIB Operation
PRINT (Send details to the connected printer.)
Syntax:
PRINT
Remarks:
The type of printout depends on the operation mode currently selected.
In all modes, the printout includes a header with the current sensor
settings and measurement channel setups.
When in Readout mode, the Channel 1 and Channel 2 values, and the
max/min values if present, are printed below the header.
In Profile and Power vs. Time modes, a graph is printed out below the
header with all the details shown.
PRNSEL (Select the type of printer)
Syntax:
PRNSEL <type>
type: HP340 BJC80
Remarks:
Available printer selections are the HP DeskJet 340 and Canon BJC80.
Other 300, 500, 600 Series and later HP printers are typically
compatible. If the Canon BJC80 printer is selected, it must be set to
EPSON LQ emulation mode for proper operation. Refer to the printer
manual for instructions on setting the emulation mode.
Query:
PRNSEL?
Returned String: PRNSEL <printer>
RCD (Range Calibrator data request)
Syntax:
RCD <s>
s: A or B
Remarks:
Returns the results from an Anritsu Range Calibrator run after the
Range Calibrator is disconnected from the power meter. While still
connected to the Range Calibrator, the results can be printed but not
read via GPIB. The results include values for each end of each sensor
range and the zero value, and are kept in non-volatile memory until the
Range Calibrator is connected and a calibration run again.
Response format:
'RCD<ws><sensor>,<state>[,<zero value>,<range 1 upper>,<range 1
lower>,........]'
<state>: If state is FALSE, no data follows because there are no valid
results for this sensor available.
If state is TRUE, the results for the selected sensor are displayed in the
following order:
zero value, range 1 upper, range 1 lower, range 2 upper, range 2 lower,
range 3 upper, range 3 lower, range 4 upper, range 4 lower, range 5
upper, range 5 lower.
8-66
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
GPIB Operation
ML24xxA Native Commands
REL (Relative control)
Syntax:
REL <c>,<mode>
c: 1 or 2
mode: 0 Turn OFF
1 Turn ON and reference
2 Turn ON, use old references if not first time.
Remarks:
Turns relative ON or OFF, or references the zero point.
REL1 and REL2 toggle between relative and absolute measurements.
Sending the RELx command when in dB mode will make the meter
apply the last used RELATIVE value. This relative value is used
thereafter until it is replaced by another one in the same manner. This
allows the user to refer to a previously referenced value, without the
meter resetting itself back to a 0.00 display.
Query:
REL? <c>
Returned String: REL <c>,<mode>
RFCAL (Turn RF reference calibrator ON or OFF)
Syntax:
RFCAL <state>
state: ON or OFF
Remarks:
Turns on or off the RF reference calibrator.
Query:
RFCAL?
Returned String: RFCAL <state>
RGH (Range Hold Sensor)
Syntax:
RGH <s>[,<val>]
s: A or B
val: 0 to 5 (0 to 6 for universal power sensor only)
(0 = AUTO)
Remarks:
This function is used to toggle a sensor’s range hold off or on, to set a
specific range to be held, or to select AUTO ranging. RGH sent with only
the sensor parameter will toggle the sensor between holding the present
operating range and AUTO. If RGH is sent with sensor and value
parameters, the sensor range mode will be set to the range value sent.
Query:
RGH? <s>
Returned String: RGH <s>,<val>
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
8-67
ML24xxA Native Commands
GPIB Operation
RSBAUD (RS232 Baud Rate)
Syntax:
RSBAUD <val>
val: 12,24,48,96,192 or 384 hundred bits per second
Remarks:
Sets the RS232 Baud rate for the rear panel serial port.
Query:
RSBAUD?
Returned String: RSBAUD <val>
RSMODE (RS232 Operating Mode)
Syntax:
RSMODE <s>
s: EXTCOM
SRCSWP
Remarks:
EXTCOM = External communication. GPIB commands are sent and
received via an RS232 connection.
SRCSWP = Source sweep. Connected to a sweeper so updates to the
sweepers power of frequencies etc. are automatically updated on the
ML243xA also.
Query:
RSMODE?
Returned String: RSMODE <s>
SECURE (Secure system state)
Syntax:
SECURE <state>
state: ON or OFF
Remarks:
Normally when the system is powered on the ML243xA returns to the
state it was in when it was powered off. This includes all the offset
tables, calibration adjust values, etc.
If Secure is set to ON, non-volatile memory is disabled and all stored
values are reset to the factory defaults when the system is powered on.
As long as this command is ON, the system will load the presets (see
Appendix B) every time it is turned ON.
Query:
SECURE?
Returned String: SECURE <s>
8-68
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
GPIB Operation
ML24xxA Native Commands
SENMM (Sensor Measurement mode)
Syntax:
SENMM <s>,<mode>
s: A or B
mode: DEFAULT (carrier wave)
MOD (modulated average)
CUSTOM (user configurable trigger setup mode)
Remarks:
Tells the sensor the type of signal it is expecting. This helps the sensor
to take the best measurements.
When LINK is set to OFF, the Sensor Measurement mode changes as
requested.
When LINK is set to ON, Readout mode is temporarily forced to Custom
mode, and the Default and Mod Average modes are inhibited. If the
SENMM command is sent with the following modes while LINK is set
ON:
1.DEFAULT: The Sensor Measurement mode will not change. A GPIB
error will be raised.
2.MOD: The Sensor Measurement mode will not change. A GPIB error
will be raised.
3.CUSTOM: Sets the Sensor Measurement Mode to Custom. If LINK is
later set to OFF, the power meter will remain in Custom Mode.
Normally, when LINK is set ON, and later set OFF, the power meter
returns to the sensor measurement mode it was in when LINK was set
ON. However, when LINK is ON, SENMM <s>,CUSTOM will set the
Sensor Measurement Mode to Custom, and when LINK is later set to
OFF, the power meter will remain in Custom Mode.
Query:
SENMM? <s>
Returned String: SENMM <s>,<mode>
SENMO (Universal Sensor Operation Mode)
Syntax:
SENMO <s>,<value>
s: A or B
value: TRMS / FCW
Remarks:
Selects between using a universal power sensor in its normal operating
mode (TRMS) and its option 1 mode (FCW). FCW can only be selected if
this option is fitted in the power sensor.
Query:
SENMO? <s>
Returned String: SENMO <s>,<value>
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
8-69
ML24xxA Native Commands
GPIB Operation
SENSTL (Set Sensor Settle Percentage)
Syntax:
SENSTL <s>,<val>
s: A or B
val: 0.01 to 10%
Remarks:
Sets how long the system waits for the signal to settle. The value
parameter is only used in DEFAULT measurement sensor mode. The
settling time allows some control over the tradeoff between speed, and
the extent to which a measurement has settled to its final value.
Query:
SENSTL? <s>
Returned String: SENSTL <s>,<mode>
SENTYP (Return sensor information)
Syntax:
SENTYP <s>
s: A or B
Remarks:
This command returns information on the selected sensor in string
format: <sensor type>,<sensor serial>.
For example: MA2442A, 003277.
SRCMOD (Source Sweep Mode)
Syntax:
SRCMOD <mode>
mode: FREQ, OWER
Remarks:
Determines whether the voltage sweep applied to the V/GHz analog
input on the rear panel is interpreted as a frequency or power sweep.
The x axis of the graph on the display will be labelled appropriately.
Query:
SRCMOD?
Returned String: SRCMOD <mode>
SRCSPFRQ (Source Sweep Stop Frequency)
Syntax:
SRCSPFRQ <freq_value>[units]
freq value: 10 kHz to 122 GHz
Remarks:
Determines the stop frequency when in frequency sweep mode.
Query:
SRCSPFRQ?
Returned String: SRCSPFRQ <frequency>
8-70
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
GPIB Operation
ML24xxA Native Commands
SRCSPPWR (Source Sweep Stop Power)
Syntax:
SRCSPPWR <power_value>
power value: power
Remarks:
Determines the stop power level of power sweep mode.
Query:
SRCSPPWR?
Returned String: SRCSPPWR <power>
SRCSTAT (Source Sweep mode status request)
Syntax:
SRCSTAT
Remarks:
Requests the source sweep status, and returns the following message:
SRCSWP<ws><mode>,<start_power>,<stop_power>,<start_freq>,<stop
_freq>
SRCSTFRQ (Source Sweep Start Frequency)
Syntax:
SRCSTFRQ <freq_value>[units]
freq value: 10 kHz to 122 GHz
Remarks:
Determines the start frequency when in frequency sweep mode.
Query:
SRCSTFRQ?
Returned String: SRCSTFRQ <frequency>
SRCSTPWR (Source Sweep Start Power)
Syntax:
SRCSTPWR <power_value>
power value: power
Remarks:
Determines the start power level of power sweep mode.
Query:
SRCSTPWR?
Returned String: SRCSTPWR <power>
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
8-71
ML24xxA Native Commands
GPIB Operation
START (Initial startup self test command)
Syntax:
START
Remarks:
This is useful for ATE control. After the system has been given time to
start up, this command can be used to find out what state the system is
in. If the self test has failed, 'CONT' can be used to get the system
running. This is an initial startup self test status command and will
return one of the following:
0 - Passed self test and running.
1 - Startup self test running.
–1 - Start up self test FAILED.
In this stage of the startup process, all commands except STERR,
START, CONT and GPIB 488.2 event and status commands will
produce a GPIB execution error. STERR will return the selftest result
string.
Related
commands:
8-72
STERR, CONT
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
GPIB Operation
ML24xxA Native Commands
STATUS (Status Message)
Syntax:
STATUS
Remarks:
Replies with the power meter’s current state code. In this format, the
number of letters specifies the number of digits, with preceding zeroes
for padding. The format is:
’ABCDEFGHIJKLMNNOOPQRRRRSSSSTUVWXYZ12’
where:
A = Operating mode: '0' = Digital readout, '1' = Profile mode channel 1,
'2' = Profile mode channel 2, '3' = Power vs. Time channel 1, '4' = Power
vs. Time channel 2, ‘5’ = Source sweep chan. 1, ‘6’ = Source sweep chan.
2.
B = Channel 1 input configuration: '0' = OFF, '1' = A, '2' = B, '3' = A–B, '4'
= B–A, '5' = A/B, '6' = B/A, '7' = EXT Volts.
C = Channel 2 input configuration: '0' = OFF, '1' = A, '2' = B, '3' = A–B, '4'
= B–A, '5' = A/B, '6' = B/A, '7' = EXT Volts.
D = Channel 1 units: '0' = dBm, '1' = Watts, '2' = Volts, '3' = dBmV, '4' =
dBmV.
E = Channel 2 units: '0' = dBm, '1' = Watts, '2' = Volts, '3' = dBmV, '4' =
dBmV.
F = Channel 1 relative status: '0' = Rel OFF, '1' = Rel ON.
G = Channel 2 relative status: '0' = Rel OFF, '1' = Rel ON.
H = Channel 1 low limit state: '0' = OFF, '1' = ON.
I = Channel 1 high limit state: '0' = OFF, '1' = ON.
J = Channel 2 low limit state: '0' = OFF, '1' = ON.
K = Channel 2 high limit state: '0' = OFF, '1' = ON.
L = Sensor A measurement mode: '0' = Default, '1' = MOD average, '2' =
Custom.
M = Sensor B measurement mode: '0' = Default, '1' = MOD average, '2' =
Custom.
NN = Sensor A range hold: Manual = '01' to '05', AUTO = '11' to '15'.
OO = Sensor B range hold: Manual = '01' to '05', AUTO = '11' to '15'.
P = Sensor A averaging mode: ‘0’ = OFF, ‘1’ = AUTO, ‘2’ = Moving, ‘3’ =
Repeat.
Q = Sensor B averaging mode: ‘0’ = OFF, ‘1’ = AUTO, ‘2’ = Moving, ‘3’ =
Repeat.
RRRR = Sensor A average number. For Profile and Source Sweep
modes, this number is between 1 and 512. For digital Readout or Power
vs. Time modes, the values are either 1 to 512 or, if in AUTO averaging
mode, 513 to 1024.
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
8-73
ML24xxA Native Commands
:
GPIB Operation
SSSS = Sensor B average number (0000 if ML2437A). For Profile and
Source Sweep modes, this number is between 1 and 512. For digital
Readout or Power vs. Time modes, the values are either 1 to 512 or, if in
AUTO averaging mode, 513 to 1024.
T = Sensor A low level average: '0' = OFF, '1' = Low, '2' = Medium, '3' =
High
U = Sensor B low level average: '0' = OFF, '1' = Low, '2' = Medium, '3' =
High.
V = Sensor A zeroed status: '0' = Not zeroed, '1' = Zeroed.
W = Sensor B Zeroed status: '0' = Not zeroed, '1' = Zeroed.
X = GPIB trigger mode: '0' = TR0 hold ON, '1' = Free run.
Y = GPIB group trigger mode: '0' = GTO, '1' = GT1, '2' = GT2.
Z = Calibrator state: '0' = OFF, '1' = ON.
1 = GPIB DISP command status: '0' = OFF, '1' = ON.
2 = GPIB FAST status: '0' = OFF, '1' = ON.
8-74
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
GPIB Operation
ML24xxA Native Commands
STERR (Returns results of POST or *TST?)
Syntax:
STERR
Remarks:
Returns (<sp> = space):
'FLASH<sp>0xnnnn,CALDAT<sp>0xnnnn,PERSON<sp>0xnnnn,RAM
<sp>
0xnnnn,NONVOL<sp>0xnnnn,LCD<sp>0xnnnn,KBD<sp>0xnnnn,DSP
<sp>
0xnnnn/n'
FLASH checksum test: 0x0000 = Passed, 0xffff = Failed
CALDAT checksum test: 0x0000 = Passed, 0xffff = Failed
PERSONality data: 0x0000 = Passed, 0xffff = Failed
RAM read/write test: 0x0000 = Passed, 0xffff = Failed
NONVOL RAM test: 0x0000 = Passed, 0x0001 = Software version fail,
0x0002 = Current store fail, 0x0004 = Saved store fail, 0x0008 = secure
mode fail, 0xffff = read failure
LCD memory test: 0x0000 = Passed, 0xffff = Failed
KBD stuck key test: 0x0000 = Passed, 0xffff = Failed
DSP test: 0x0000 = Passed, else FATAL error
Related
commands:
START, CONT
SYSLD (Load saved setup store over the GPIB)
Syntax:
SYSLD <store number>, <data length>, <binary data>
store number:
1 to 10
data length:
number of bytes of binary data
binary data:
Saved data previously read from the meter using the SYSRD command
Remarks:
Sets the passed store number to the setup contained in the binary data
that was extracted using the SYSRD command.
Related
commands:
SYSRD
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
8-75
ML24xxA Native Commands
GPIB Operation
SYSLNM (Saved set naming)
Syntax:
SYSLNM <store number>,<text>
store number: 1 to 10
text: text string
Remarks:
This command allows the saved setups to have text associated with
them rather than just the ‘USED’ and ‘NOT USED’ text.
Query:
SYSLNM? <store number>
Returned String:
SYSLNM <store number>,<store name>
If a store number of 0 is used, then all the store titles will be output in
the form:
SYSLNM 1,<store 1 name>,2,<store 2 name>, … ,10,<store 10 name>
SYSRD (Output the saved setup over the GPIB)
Syntax:
SYSRD <store number>
store number: 0 (current setup) or 1 to 10 saved stores
Remarks:
Requests that the saved stored setup is output over the GPIB. This is a
BINARY output that allows the stored setup to be programmed into
other ML243xA power meters and stores via the SYSLD command. If a
request for a store number that has not had a setup stored into it is
made, an execution error event will be set in the Event Status Register
(ESR).
The output is in the form:
SYSRD<ws><#><num_digits><number num_digits long>, <binary
data>
<num_digits> = Number of following digits giving the number of bytes of
binary data.
<number num_digits long> = A number num_digits long giving the
number of bytes of binary data.
<binary data> = Saved setup.
Related
commands:
8-76
SYSLD
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
GPIB Operation
ML24xxA Native Commands
TEXT (User text command)
Syntax:
TEXT <text string>
text string: Text string of up to 20 characters
Remarks:
Defines the text string that will be displayed using the TEXTS
command.
Related
commands:
TEXTS
Query:
TEXT?
Returned String: TEXT <text string>
TEXTS (User text display command)
Syntax:
TEXTS <state>
state: ON or OFF
Remarks:
This command turns on or off the display of text entered using the TEXT
command. Up to 20 characters of user text can be displayed on the top
line of the data screen for READOUT, PROFILE and PWRvsTIME
display modes.
Related
commands:
TEXT
Query:
TEXTS?
Returned String: TEXTS <state>
TR0 (Trigger hold mode)
Syntax:
TR0
Remarks:
Sets both channels to trigger hold mode. It does not trigger until it
receives a TR1 or TR2 or GET (group executive trigger), *TRG or TR3
command. If it receives a TR3 command it reverts back to the trigger
mode it was in before the TR0 command was sent. If the REM line is
low, this command has no effect.
Related
commands:
TR1, TR2, TR3, *TRG, Group Execute Trigger (GET), GT0, GT1, GT2
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
8-77
ML24xxA Native Commands
GPIB Operation
TR1 (Trigger immediate)
Syntax:
TR1 <c>
c: 1 or 2
Remarks:
Triggers a single reading which is added to the internal digital filter and
the updated filter power level is returned on the GPIB. The returned
reading differs depending on the operation mode:
Readout: 'O' command response
Pwr vs. Time: 'O' command response
Profile: 'OGBD' command response (binary graph data for example)
Source Sweep: 'OGBD' command response (binary graph data for
example)
After a TR1 command the instrument returns to either TR0 (trigger
hold) or TR3 (trigger free run) mode depending on what it was
previously set to.
Related
commands:
TR0, TR2, TR3, *TRG, Group Execute Trigger (GET), GT0, GT1, GT2
TR2 (Trigger with a settling delay)
Syntax:
TR2 <c>
c: 1 or 2
Remarks:
Triggers a fully ranged and settled reading which is returned on the
GPIB Bus. If averaging is set to ON, the average buffer will be cleared
and filled before the result is returned. The returned reading differs
depending on the operation mode:
Readout: 'O' command response
Pwr vs. Time: 'O' command response
Profile: 'OGBD' command response (binary graph data for example)
Source Sweep: 'OGBD' command response (binary graph data for
example)
Note:
TR2 in Profile and Source Sweep mode is not supported and will revert
to a TR1 type measurement.
If the channel is set to External Volts, TR2 is not supported (as there is
no averaging and settling) and will revert to a TR1 type measurement.
After a TR2 command the instrument returns to either TR0 (trigger
hold) or TR3 (trigger free run) mode depending on what it was
previously set to.
Related
commands:
8-78
TR0, TR1, TR3, *TRG, Group Execute Trigger (GET), GT0, GT1, GT2
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
GPIB Operation
ML24xxA Native Commands
TR3 Trigger free run
Syntax:
TR3
Remarks:
Sets the ML243xA back into free run mode on both channels.
Related
commands:
TR0, TR1, TR2, *TRG, Group Execute Trigger (GET), GT0, GT1, GT2
TRGARM (Trigger arming)
Syntax:
TRGARM <c>, <state>
c: 1, 2 or 1&2
state: ON or OFF
Remarks:
Sets the readout trigger arming ON or OFF when in READOUT or
Power vs. Time mode.
Select channel 1, 2 or 1&2. Selecting 1&2 allows both channels to trigger
together on the same conditions without having to set up two sets of
trigger data.
If set to ON, the system first checks to see if the BNC sweep blanking
input is TRUE before it starts to trigger. If set to OFF, the system uses
the trigger source (TRSRC) to decide when to trigger.
TRGARM will return an execution error if trying to set trigger arming
ON when a display channel trigger source is already set to EXTTTL, as
they both use the same BNC input.
Query:
TRGARM? <c>
TRGARM <c>,<state>
The TRG type commands return the trigger state of the selected channel
if the channel is ON. This depends on the settings of the “link triggers”
flag and the current mode of the sensor on the selected channel. If the
channel is OFF, the stored trigger state of the channel is returned.
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
8-79
ML24xxA Native Commands
GPIB Operation
TRGDLY (Trigger sample delay)
Syntax:
TRGDLY <c>, <val>[units]
c: 1, 2 or 1&2
val: 0.0 to 1.0 s
Remarks:
The time the system waits after a trigger event has happened
before taking measurements when in READOUT or Power vs. Time
mode.
Select channel 1, 2 or 1&2. Selecting 1&2 allows both channels to trigger
together on the same conditions without having to set up two sets of
trigger data.
Query:
TRGDLY? <c>
Returned String:
TRGDLY <c>,<val>
The TRG type commands return the trigger state of the selected channel
if the channel is ON. This depends on the settings of the “link triggers”
flag and the current mode of the sensor on the selected channel. If the
channel is OFF, the stored trigger state of the channel is returned.
TRGGW (Set trigger gate width)
Syntax:
TRGGW <c>,<val>[units]
c: 1, 2 or 1&2
val: 100 ns to 7.0 s
Remarks:
The length of time the system uses to collect data when in READOUT or
Power vs. Time mode. The default value is 20 ms.
Select channel 1, 2 or 1&2. Selecting 1&2 allows both channels to trigger
together on the same conditions without having to set up two sets of
trigger data.
Query:
TRGGW? <c>
Returned String: TRGGW <c>,<val>
The TRG type commands return the trigger state of the selected channel
if the channel is ON. This depends on the settings of the “link triggers”
flag and the current mode of the sensor on the selected channel. If the
channel is OFF, the stored trigger state of the channel is returned.
8-80
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
GPIB Operation
ML24xxA Native Commands
TRGLVL (Set trigger level)
Syntax:
TRGLVL <c>,<val>
c: 1, 2 or 1&2
val: -30 to +20 dBm
Remarks:
If the Trigger source is set to INTA or INTB (internal A or B) the system
triggers on a rising or falling power level edge. Use this command to set
the level the channel must rise above or fall below before it triggers
when in READOUT or Power vs. Time mode.
Select channel 1, 2 or 1&2. Selecting 1&2 allows both channels to trigger
together on the same conditions without having to set up two sets of
trigger data.
Query:
TRGLVL? <c>
Returned String: TRGLVL <c>,<val>
The TRG type commands return the trigger state of the selected channel
if the channel is ON. This depends on the settings of the “link triggers”
flag and the current mode of the sensor on the selected channel. If the
channel is OFF, the stored trigger state of the channel is returned.
TRGMODE (Change trigger mode)
Syntax:
TRGMODE <mode>
mode: IND, COMB
Remarks:
Changes the trigger operating mode between INDividual channel
trigger setups and COMBined trigger set ups. Individual set up is when
the trigger conditions for each channel are setup separately. The
combined setup allows both channels to trigger together on the same
conditions.
If a channel is OFF or sensors used in both channel configurations do
not include a sensor set to CUSTOM measurement mode, the
COMBined trigger mode is not allowed, and sending the GPIB command
TRGMODE COMB will produce an execution error.
Query:
TRGMODE?
Returned String: TRGMODE <mode>
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
8-81
ML24xxA Native Commands
GPIB Operation
TRGSRC (Set trigger source)
Syntax:
TRGSRC <c>,<source>
c: 1, 2 or 1&2
source: INTA (internal sensor A)
INTB (internal sensor B)
EXTTTL (external BNC TTL trigger input)
MANUAL (manual push button trigger)
CONT (continuous)
Remarks:
This command is overridden by the TR0, TR1 and TR2 commands when
in READOUT or Power vs. Time mode. If TR3 is sent, the trigger source
reverts back to the previously selected type of triggering.
Select channel 1, 2 or 1&2. Selecting 1&2 allows both channels to trigger
together on the same conditions without having to set up two sets of
trigger data.
Query:
Query:
TRGSRC? <c> Returned String:
TRGSRC <c>,<source>
The TRG type commands return the trigger state of the selected channel
if the channel is ON. This depends on the settings of the “link triggers”
flag and the current mode of the sensor on the selected channel. If the
channel is OFF, the stored trigger state of the channel is returned.
TRGTYP (Set Trigger type)
Syntax:
TRGTYP <c>,<type>
c: 1, 2 or 1&2
type: RISE, FALL
Remarks:
Sets the control type of the trigger used when the source is set to either
INTA or INTB (internal A or B) in READOUT or Power vs. Time mode.
Select channel 1, 2 or 1&2. Selecting 1&2 allows both channels to trigger
together on the same conditions without having to set up two sets of
trigger data.
Query:
TRGTYP? <c>
Returned String: TRGTYP <c>,<type>
The TRG type commands return the trigger state of the selected channel
if the channel is ON. This depends on the settings of the “link triggers”
flag and the current mode of the sensor on the selected channel. If the
channel is OFF, the stored trigger state of the channel is returned.
8-82
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
GPIB Operation
ML24xxA Native Commands
TRGXTTL (Set external trigger edge type)
Syntax:
TRGXTTL <c>,<type>
c: 1, 2 or 1&2
type: RISE, FALL
Remarks:
Sets the control type of the external trigger input used when the trigger
source is set to EXTTTL in READOUT or Power vs. Time mode.
Select channel 1, 2 or 1&2. Selecting 1&2 allows both channels to trigger
together on the same conditions without having to set up two sets of
trigger data. If external trigger is used on both trigger channels (1 and
2) the same TTL edge MUST be used on both channels.
Query:
TRGXTTL? <c>
Returned String: TRGXTTL <c>,<type>
The TRG type commands return the trigger state of the selected channel
if the channel is ON. This depends on the settings of the “link triggers”
flag and the current mode of the sensor on the selected channel. If the
channel is OFF, the stored trigger state of the channel is returned.
VZERO (Zero the BNC input connector)
Syntax:
VZERO
Remarks:
Zeros the multipurpose BNC connector used for Volts per GHz
connection (Analog Input 2). This will calibrate the units to read zero
volts on this BNC. During this operation the connector should either not
be connected to anything, or should be connected to a 0 Volt source. A
settling time must be allowed after this command before reading any
other commands.
ZERO (Zero the selected sensor)
Syntax:
ZERO <s>
s: A or B
Remarks:
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
Zero out the noise from the selected sensor.
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
8-83
GPIB Emulation Modes
8-9
GPIB Operation
GPIB Emulation Modes
The ML243xA power meter emulates the GPIB communication of other power meters. The
emulation mode can be set through the front panel SYSTEM > more > more > Rear panel >
GPIB > MODE menu (see Chapter 4, Operation) or through the GPIB command EMUL. The
available emulation modes and command restrictions are:
Table 8-5.
Emulation Modes
Power Meter
Command Restrictions
Hewlett-Packard HP436
All commands supported.
Hewlett-Packard HP437
Commands not supported : DN, DU, ERR?,
LP, LT, SP, UP and @2.
Hewlett-Packard HP438
Commands not supported : DO, LP1 and
LP2.
Anritsu ML4803
Commands not supported : PCT, VSW, RDB,
DBV50, DBV75, VLT50 & VLT75.
In some cases, there are differences between the ML243xA in emulation mode and the actual
meter being emulated. These differences are presented in the following sections.
Zeroing a Sensor
The time taken for an ML243xA to complete the ZEROing sequence for a sensor differs from
the time taken by the emulated power meters. Any GPIB control programs that ZERO the
power meter will have no problems with this time difference if the defined ZEROing controls
and/or sequences for the device being emulated are followed.
• The HP436 uses the 'Z1T' AUTO ZERO sequence described in the HP436 manual.
• The HP437 and HP438 use bit 1 of the status byte to indicate ZERO or CAL completion.
• The ML4803 uses bit 0 of the status byte to indicate that the ZERO sequence is not
complete.
Sensor Ranges
The sensor operating ranges for the ML2430 power meters are different from those of the
meters being emulated. Refer to the specific range information for range commands in each
emulation section.
Output Format
In the HP437 and HP438, the format of the readings agrees with the format specified in the
manuals, which may differ from the output from some HP437 and HP438 units.
For example: -14.236 may be output by the HP437 or HP438 as '-14.236e00' or '-1.4236e+01'.
The ML243xA in HP437 or HP438 emulation modes will output as the manual specifies
'-1.4236e+01'.
8-84
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
GPIB Operation
8-10
ML4803A Emulation Commands
ML4803A Emulation Commands
This section provides an alphabetical listing of the GPIB commands (mnemonics) used to
program the Model ML243xA Power Meter in ML4803A mode. The emulation mode can be
set through the front panel SYSTEM > more > more > Rear panel > GPIB > MODE menu or
through the GPIB command EMUL.
All ML4803A GPIB commands that use parameters must not have a space between the
command header and the parameter. Multiple parameters must be separated by semicolons.
Multiple commands may be sent on the same line, but must be separated by spaces.
The format for ML4803A GPIB commands is:
<command header><parameter 1>;<parameter n>;...
The end of the command text must be terminated with a line feed character (0Ah, decimal 10)
or a GPIB End of Transmission State (EOI), or both.
The ML4803A has an array of memory addresses that each hold a structure of four values;
Frequency, Cal factor, Offset, and Reference. The data held for an entered frequency is not
automatically applied, but only applied if that memory address is called. The frequency value
is only a reference to the operator for which the cal factor and other data is relevant. These
memory address sets of data are only available via the GPIB in ML4803A emulation mode.
SRQs
The startup and default mode of operation for the ML4803A is to set an SRQ off then on again
for every reading when available. This has the affect of pulsing the SRQ line very quickly and
would make it very difficult to use the ML4803A with other devices on the GPIB bus that
wish to communicate via SRQs. These SRQs can be turned off temporarily by the ‘SRQ0’
command. The SRQs will start again as soon as any data is requested from the ML4803A.
Status Byte
The following table and diagram define the Status Byte.
Table 8-6.
Status Byte
Bit
Definition
Description
Bit 0
Zero execution
Bit set during zeroing. When
zeroing is complete the bit is
cleared and the ODR bit and
RQS bits are reset.
Bit 1
Cal execution
Bit is set during the Cal 0 dBm.
Bit 3
Output data ready
ODR bit is cleared and set for
every reading when made.
This is done in sync with the
RQS bit giving an SRQ.
Bit 5
Command error
Set on receiving an
unrecognized command. The
bit is cleared by reading the
status byte.
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
8-85
ML4803A Emulation Commands
Table 8-6.
GPIB Operation
Status Byte
Bit
Definition
Description
Bit 6
RQS bit
Indicates that the device is
requiring service (SRQ).
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Zero execution
Cal execution
Output data ready
Command error
RQS bit
Figure 8-3.
Status Byte Bits
Output Requests
There are three commands to request output from the ML4803A: OPW for a reading, ODT for
the cal factor, offset and reference values, and OMR for memory store settings. If these output
requests are received simultaneously, only the data for the command received last will be
available.
Unsupported Commands
The following ML4803A commands are not supported in the ML243xA Power Meter GPIB
interface:
PCT
VSW
RDB
DBV50
DBV75
VLT50
VLT75
These commands are read in without errors, but are ignored by the system.
8-86
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
GPIB Operation
ML4803A Emulation Commands
AVE (Sensor averaging setting)
Syntax:
AVE<number>
number:
0 = Averaging OFF
9 = HOLD. Holds the present averaged reading.
1 = Average for 1 s (ML243xA Repeat average number of 25).
2 = Average for 2 s (ML243xA Repeat average number of 70).
3 = Average for 5 s (ML243xA Repeat average number of 128).
4 = Average for 10 s (ML243xA Repeat average number of 256).
Remarks:
The ML4803A averages for a period of time. The ML243xA sets the
averaging to repeat averaging for a number of readings.
CAL (Set the user cal factor value)
Syntax:
CAL<value>
value: Cal factor value in dB
CCA (Clear the calfactor value to zero)
Syntax:
CCA
CDJ (Perform a CAL 0 dBm)
Syntax:
CDJ
Remarks:
During the cal 0 dBm sequence, the CAL execution bit in the status byte
is set. When the CAL operation is completed, the CAL execution bit is
cleared.
COF (Clear the offset value to zero)
Syntax:
COF
COS (Turn ON the 50 MHz, 0 dBm RF calibrator output)
Syntax:
COS
CRF (Clear the reference value to zero)
Syntax:
CRF
CST (Turn OFF the 50 MHz, 0 dBm RF calibrator output)
Syntax:
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
CST
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
8-87
ML4803A Emulation Commands
GPIB Operation
DBM (Sets the display channel units to dBm)
Syntax:
DBM
DBR (Sets display channel units to dB’s and takes the relative value)
Syntax:
DBR
Remarks:
The relative value is stored as the reference data. The reference value
can be independently changed with the GPIB command REF.
EMUL (GPIB emulation mod)
Syntax:
EMUL <mode>
mode:
ML24XX (Anritsu ML243xA native mode)
HP436A (Hewlett-Packard)
HP437B (Hewlett-Packard)
HP438A (Hewlett-Packard)
ML4803 (Anritsu ML4803A Series)
Remarks:
Set the GPIB emulation to emulate other types of power meters. This
command is available in any emulation mode, and resets the whole
GPIB interface when the emulation mode is changed.
When selecting GPIB emulation modes, the instrument configures itself
to the preset conditions of the instrument to be emulated. For example,
when selecting HP438A emulation, the front panel menus pass through
the presets for the HP437B (which presets sensor A to dBm) then selects
HP438A emulation (which presets sensor A to Watts).
Note:
This command must be entered using the 488.2 format; that is,
EMUL<ws><mode> (<ws> = white space).
MCA (Set the cal factor value at the specified memory location in dBm)
Syntax:
MCA<mem><;><value>
mem: Memory location 1 to 30.
value: Cal factor value in dBm.
Remarks:
8-88
Set the cal factor value at memory store address <mem> to <value>
dBm.
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
GPIB Operation
ML4803A Emulation Commands
MCC (Clears the cal factor value at the specified memory location)
Syntax:
MCC<mem>
mem: Memory location 1 to 30.
Remarks:
Clears the cal factor value at memory store <mem> to 0.0 dBm.
MCO (Clears the offset value at the specified memory location)
Syntax:
MCO<mem>
mem: Memory location 1 to 30.
Remarks:
Clears the offset value at memory store <mem> to 0.0 dBm.
MCQ (Clears the frequency value at the specified memory location)
Syntax:
MCQ<mem>
mem: Memory location 1 to 30.
Remarks:
Clears the frequency value at memory store <mem> to 0.1 MHz.
MCR (Clears the reference value at the specified memory location)
Syntax:
MCR<mem>
mem: Memory location 1 to 30.
Remarks:
Clears the reference value at memory store <mem> to 0.0 dBm.
MCT (Clears all the entries at the specified memory location)
Syntax:
MCT<mem>
mem: Memory location 1 to 30.
Remarks:
Clears frequency, cal factor, offset and reference values at memory store
<mem>.
MDI (Disable memory store setting and use)
Syntax:
MDI
MEN (Enable setting of the memory stores)
Also will apply the last memory store configured)
Syntax:
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
MEN
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
8-89
ML4803A Emulation Commands
GPIB Operation
MFG (Set the frequency value at the specified location in GHz)
Syntax:
MFG<mem><;><value>
mem: Memory location 1 to 30.
value: Frequency value in GHz.
Remarks:
Set the frequency value at memory store address <mem> to <value>
GHz.
MFM (Set the frequency value at the specified location in MHz)
Syntax:
MFM<mem><;><value>
mem: Memory location 1 to 30
value: Frequency value in MHz
Remarks:
Set the frequency value at memory store address <mem> to <value>
MHz.
MOF (Set the offset value at the specified location in dBm)
Syntax:
MOF<mem><;><value>
mem: Memory location 1 to 30.
value: Offset value in dBm.
Remarks:
Set the offset value at memory store address <mem> to <value> dBm
MRF (Set the reference value at the specified location in dBm)
Syntax:
MRF<mem><;><value>
mem: Memory location 1 to 30.
value: Reference value in dBm.
Remarks:
8-90
Set the reference value at memory store address <mem> to <value>
dBm.
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
GPIB Operation
ML4803A Emulation Commands
ODT (Output the current calibration factor, offset, and reference level)
Syntax:
ODT
Remarks:
These are output as three separate messages in the output buffer, as
shown below:
CAL factor: 18 ASCII characters + <CR><LF>
OFFSET value: 18 ASCII characters + <CR><LF>
REFERENCE level: 19 ASCII characters + <CR><LF>
Note:
When the ODT, OMR, and OPW data output commands are received
simultaneously, only the command which is received last is valid.
1
5
10
15
CAL
.
dB
<CR><LF>
OFFSET
±
.
dB
<CR><LF>
REFERENCE
±
.
dBm
<CR><LF>
5 character data
Figure 8-4.
ODT Data Output Format
OFF (Set sensor offset value)
Syntax:
OFF<value>
value: Offset value to add to the sensor reading.
OI? (Request identity)
Syntax:
OI?
Remarks:
Response: <ML4803>
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
8-91
ML4803A Emulation Commands
GPIB Operation
OMR (Output a memory store set of data)
Syntax:
OMR<mem>
mem: Memory location 1 to 30.
Remarks:
Output a memory store set of data. The output format is as follows:
FREQUENCY: 19 ASCII characters + <CR><LF>
CAL factor: 18 ASCII characters + <CR><LF>
OFFSET value: 18 ASCII characters + <CR><LF>
REFERENCE level: 19 ASCII characters + <CR><LF>
Note:
When the ODT, OMR, and OPW data output commands are received
simultaneously, only the command which is received last is valid.
1
5
10
15
FREQUENCY
CAL
αHz
<CR><LF>
.
dB
<CR><LF>
OFFSET
±
.
dB
<CR><LF>
REFERENCE
±
.
dBm
<CR><LF>
5 character data
α= M or G
Figure 8-5.
OMR Output Data Format
OPW (Request for channel reading)
Syntax:
OPW
Remarks:
Outputs measuring condition, measured data, and status. CR and LF
codes are automatically output and executed after each line of 22 ASCII
characters when the OPW command is used. The format of the returned
data is:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
STATUS
MODE
RANGE
AVERAGE
SIGN
5 CHARACTER DATA
<CR><LF>
EXPONENT
ALWAYS “_”
ALWAYS “E”
Figure 8-6.
8-92
OPW Output Data Format
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
GPIB Operation
ML4803A Emulation Commands
The data output codes are as shown in the table below. See the next page for measured data
output examples.
Output Code
Contents
Function
V
D
U
O
Z
WATT
dBm
dBr
%
VSWR
dB50
dB75
VL50
VL75
Measured data valid
Data range over
Under-range (dBm and dBr)
Over-range
Zero adjustment
Watt
dBm
dBr
%
VSWR
dBu, 50 W system
dBu, 75 W system
Volt, 50 W system
Volt, 75 W system
HOLD
highest sensitivity 1
2
3
4
lowest sensitivity 5
AUTO
highest sensitivity 1
2
3
4
lowest sensitivity 5
OFF
HOLD
1 (1 s interval)
2 (2 s interval)
3 (5 s interval)
4 (10 s interval)
+
Numeric data (5 characters) x
STATUS
MRG1
MRG2
MRG3
MRG4
MRG5
ARG1
ARG2
ARG3
ARG4
ARG5
AVE0
AVE9
AVE1
AVE2
AVE3
AVE4
Space
5-1
10
Figure 8-7.
MODE
RANGE
RANGE
AVERAGE
SIGN
DATA
–(exponent value)
Data Output Codes
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
8-93
ML4803A Emulation Commands
GPIB Operation
When the ODT, OMR, and OPW data output commands are received
simultaneously, only the command which is received last is valid.
Note
dBm Mode:
1
V
5
10
d B m A R G 2 A V E 0
15
- 1 0
.
0 0
<CR><LF>
MEASURED DATA
REPRESENTS -10.00 dbm
Watt Mode:
1
5
10
V W A T T A R G 2 A V E 0
15
1 0 0 .
20
0 E -
6
<CR><LF>
MEASURED DATA
REPRESENTS 100.0 nW
Figure 8-8.
Examples, dBm Mode and Watt Mode
As shown in the examples above, the dBm data is output in fixed rotation, while the WATT
data is output in scientific notation. The exponent may be converted as follows:
1.000W = 1.000E–0 1.000 µW = 1.000E–6
1.000 mW = 1.000E–3 100.0 nW = 100.0E–9
100.0 µW = 100.0E–6 10.00 nW = 10.00E–9
10.00 µW = 10.00E–6 0.100 nW = 0.100E–9
For dB (rel), including % and VSWR data, the display data is output in fixed notation just as
dBm data is.
8-94
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
GPIB Operation
ML4803A Emulation Commands
REF (Set the reference value)
Syntax:
REF<value>
value: Reference value
Remarks:
If the display channel is already in relative mode the display value will
be updated to be relative to the new reference value set. When the
display channel is put into relative mode the reference value will be over
written with the correct relative value to make the display read 0 dB.
RNG (Sensor measurement range hold)
Syntax:
RNG<number>
<number>:
1 = Range 1 (ML243xA range 5)
2 = Range 2 (ML243xA range 4)
3 = Range 3 (ML243xA range 3)
4 = Range 4 (ML243xA range 2)
5 = Range 5 (ML243xA range 1)
A = Auto ranging
Remarks:
When the ML2430 is being used to emulate the ML4803, the ranges are
reversed; that is, ML4803 range 1 (the lowest power range) is equivalent
to the ML243xA range 5, and ML4803 range 5 (the highest power range)
is equivalent to the ML243xA range 1.
SRQ (Turns on or off the SRQ on output data ready)
Syntax:
SRQ<state>
state: 0 = OFF
1 = ON
Remarks:
When SRQ0 is issued, the SRQ will no long turn off and on with each
reading. The SRQ is set back on by the SRQ1 command or by requesting
data.
STA (Restart averaging reading)
Syntax:
STA
WAT (Sets the display channel units to Watts)
Syntax:
WAT
Remarks:
Turns off relative mode. Relative is not available in this mode.
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
8-95
ML4803A Emulation Commands
GPIB Operation
ZAJ (Zero the sensor)
Syntax:
ZAJ
Remarks:
During the zero operation, the zero bit in the status byte is set. When
the zero operation is completed, the zero bit in the status byte is cleared.
When emulating the ML4803, the ML2430 may take longer to zero a
sensor than the ML4803 itself. When performing a zero, the status byte
should be used to identify when zeroing is complete.
8-96
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
GPIB Operation
8-11
HP436A Emulation Commands
HP436A Emulation Commands
This section provides an alphabetical listing of the commands (mnemonics) used to program
the Model ML243xA Power Meter when in HP436A Emulation mode. The emulation mode is
set through the front panel SYSTEM > Rear Panel > GPIB > MODE menu or through the
GPIB command EMUL.
HP Emulation commands must not have a space between the command header and the
parameter, or commas between the parameters.
The format for HP Emulation commands is:
<command header><parameter 1><parameter n>...
The end of the command text must be terminated with a line feed character (0Ah, decimal 10)
or a GPIB End of Transmission State (EOI), or both.
+ (Disable cal factor)
Syntax:
+
– (Enable cal factor)
Syntax:
-
1, 2, 3, 4, & 5 (Set sensor operating range)
Remarks:
Range 5 is the highest power range, range 1 the lowest. (These are the
opposite to the ML243xA native mode ranges; that is, HP436 range 5
sets to ML243xA range 1, and HP436 range 4 to ML243xA range 2, etc.)
When the ML243xA is being used to emulate the HP436, the ranges are
reversed; that is, HP436 range 1 (the lowest power range) is equivalent
to the ML243xA range 5, and HP436 range 5 (the highest power range)
is equivalent to the ML243xA range 1.
9 (Auto range)
Syntax:
9
Remarks:
Sets the ML243xA to automatically select the correct range for the
measurement.
A (Wat)
Syntax:
A
Remarks:
Set units to Watts. Turn relative mode off and do not allow relative.
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
8-97
HP436A Emulation Commands
GPIB Operation
B (dB (rel)
Syntax:
B
Remarks:
Set to dB units in relative mode using the present relative reference
value.
C (dB (ref)
Syntax:
C
Remarks:
Set to dB units in relative mode using the present relative reference
value, and enable the application of the calfactor.
D (dB)
Syntax:
D
Remarks:
Set units to dBm.
EMUL (Select emulation mod)
Syntax:
EMUL <mode>
mode:
ML24XX (Anritsu ML243xA native mode)
HP436A (Hewlett-Packard)
HP437B (Hewlett-Packard)
HP438A (Hewlett-Packard)
ML4803 (Anritsu ML4803A Series)
Remarks:
Sets the GPIB emulation to emulate other types of power meters. This
command is available in any emulation mode, and resets the whole
GPIB interface when the emulation mode is changed.
When selecting GPIB emulation modes, the instrument configures itself
to the preset conditions of the instrument to be emulated. For example,
when selecting HP438A emulation, the front panel menus pass through
the presets for the HP437B (which presets sensor A to dBm) then selects
HP438A emulation (which presets sensor A to Watts).
Note:
8-98
This command requires a white space between the command header
(EMUL) and the parameter <mode>. This is an ML243xA-specific
command that does not conform to the HP Emulation command format
defined at the beginning of this section.
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
GPIB Operation
HP436A Emulation Commands
H (Hold mod)
Syntax:
H
Remarks:
Sets both channels to trigger hold mode. The power meter does not
trigger until it receives an I or T command. If it receives an R or V
command, it reverts back to the trigger mode it was in before the H
command was sent.
I (Trigger without settling)
Syntax:
I
Remarks:
Triggers a single reading which is added to the internal digital filter and
the updated filter power level is returned on the GPIB. After an I
command, the instrument returns to standby mode (H).
OI (Identification)
Syntax:
OI
Remarks:
Ask for identification of current operating mode. Responds with
“HP436.”
R (Free run mod)
Syntax:
R
Remarks:
Sets the ML243xA back into free run mode to continuously take
measurements and output data.
T (Trigger with settling)
Syntax:
T
Remarks:
Triggers a new series of readings; enough to update the internal digital
filter for a noise free reading at the current power level. The value is
then returned on the GPIB and returns to standby mode (H).
V (Free run mode with settling)
Syntax:
V
Remarks:
Sets the ML243xA back into free run mode to continuously take
measurements and output data after running a settling routine.
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
8-99
HP436A Emulation Commands
GPIB Operation
Z (Zero sensor)
Syntax:
Z
Remarks:
Zero out the noise from the sensor. When zeroing the ML2430 in HP436
emulation mode, the 'Z1T' sequence followed by the '9+DI' described in
the HP436 manual must be followed.
Output Format
The output data format for the HP436A emulation mode is shown below.
Range
Character
Number
8-100
Decimal
Point
Measured
Value
- EXPONENT
Multiplier 10
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 E - 10 11 CR LF
Status
Figure 8-9.
Sign of
Measured Value
space (+) or “-”
Mode
Measured
Value
(4 digits)
Exponent
(2 digits)
HP 436A Output Data Format
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
GPIB Operation
HP436A Emulation Commands
The table below describes the HPIB output data format.
Table 8-7.
HPIB Output Data Format
Definition
Character
Status
ASCII
Decimal
Measured value valid
P
80
Watts mode under range
Q
81
Over range
R
82
Under range dBm or dB (Rel) mode
S
83
Power Sensor Auto Zero loop enabled; range 1 under range
T
84
Power Sensor Auto Zero loop enabled; not range 1 under range
U
85
Power Sensor Auto Zero loop enabled; over range
V
86
1 (Most sensitive)
I
73
2
J
74
3
K
75
4
L
76
5 (Least sensitive)
M
77
Watt
A
65
dB Rel
B
66
dB ref
C
67
dBm
D
68
Space (+)
SP
32
- (minus)
_
45
0
0
48
1
1
49
2
2
50
3
3
51
4
4
52
5
5
53
6
6
54
7
7
55
8
8
56
9
9
57
Range
Mode
Sign of Measured Value
Measured Value Digits
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
8-101
HP437B Emulation Commands
8-12
GPIB Operation
HP437B Emulation Commands
This section provides an alphabetical listing of the commands (mnemonics) used to program
the Model ML243xA Power Meter when in HP437B Emulation mode. The emulation mode
can be set through the front panel SYSTEM > Rear Panel > GPIB > MODE menu or through
the GPIB command EMUL.
HP Emulation commands must not have a space between the command header and the
parameter, or commas between the parameters.
The format for HP Emulation commands is:
<command header><parameter 1><parameter n>...
The end of the command text must be terminated with a line feed character (0Ah, decimal 10)
or a GPIB End of Transmission State (EOI), or both.
8-102
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
GPIB Operation
HP437B Emulation Commands
*CLS (Clear GPIB status byte)
Syntax:
*CLS
Remarks:
This command performs a status structure clear command. The event
status register and the status register are cleared except for the MAV
bit.
*ESE (Set the Event Status register enable mask)
Syntax:
*ESE<val>
val: 8-bit mask
Remarks:
Event registers for the HP437B.
Bit 7: Power ON
Bit 6: N/A
Bit 5: Command error
Bit 4: Execution error
Bit 3: Device Dependent error
Bit 2: N/A
Bit 1: N/A
Bit 0: N/A
See the HP437B manual for details about the HP status registers.
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
8-103
Operation Complete
GPIB Operation
Request Control
Query Error
Device Dependent Error
Execution Error
Command Error
User Request
Power On
HP437B Emulation Commands
Standard
Event Status Register
*ESR?
Queue
not empty
Logical OR
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Output Queue
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Standard
Event Status Enable
Register
*ESE <NRf>
*ESE?
read by Serial Poll
RQS
Service
Request
Generation
7 6
ESB MAV
MSS
3 2 1 0
Status Byte Register
Logical OR
read by *STB?
7
5 4 3 2 1 0
Service Request
Enable Register
*SRE <NRf>
*SRE?
Figure 8-10. IEEE 488.2 Standard Status Structures
8-104
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
GPIB Operation
HP437B Emulation Commands
*ESE? (Return Event status register enable mask)
Syntax:
*ESE?
Remarks:
Returned format: <unsigned character>
When converted to an 8-bit binary number, this byte yields the bit
settings of the register.
*ESR? (Event status register request)
Syntax:
*ESR?
Remarks:
Return the value of the standard event status register. Afterwards the
event status register are cleared. The returned format is: <unsigned
character>. When converted to a 8-bit binary number, this byte yields
the bit settings of the register.
*RST (Reset Device)
Syntax:
*RST
Remarks:
Resets the ML243xA to the default configuration (see Appendix A,
Section A-3, or see the HP manual when in HP437B emulation mode).
Offset tables are not cleared. The GPIB ADDRess and EMULation
settings are not changed, and the input queue, output queue, and status
registers on the GPIB are not cleared. This command produces the same
result as the front panel key sequence System > Setup > PRESET >
RESET.
*SRE (Setup service request enable register)
Syntax:
*SRE <val>
val: 8-bit mask
Remarks:
Sets the Service request enable register bits.
*SRE? (Return Service Request Enable register)
Syntax:
*SRE?
Remarks:
Returns the Service Request Enable register.
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
8-105
HP437B Emulation Commands
GPIB Operation
*STB? (Return Status Byte register)
Syntax:
*STB?
Remarks:
Returns the status byte value with bit 6 replaced with the MSS value.
MSS is the GPIB Master Summary Status, and indicates that the device
has at least one reason for requesting service. Although the MSS
message is sent in bit position 6 of the device’s response to the *STB?
query, it is not sent in response to a serial poll and should not be
considered part of the IEEE 488.1/2 status byte. MSS = the Status Byte
(STB) OR’ed with the Service Request Enable register (SRE). Unlike the
*ESR? Command, this command does not clear the register afterwards.
*TST? (Self Test)
Syntax:
*TST?
Remarks:
Performs a self test and returns 000.'
Related
commands:
STERR
@1 (Set SRE mask)
Syntax:
@1<val>
val: 8-bit mask
Remarks:
Status Byte Structure:
Bit 0: Data ready
Bit 1: Cal/Zero complete
Bit 2: Entry Error
Bit 3: Measurement error
Bit 4: Over/Under limit
Bit 5: Event Status Register
Bit 6: Request Service
Bit 7: N/A
Related
commands:
8-106
RV
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
GPIB Operation
HP437B Emulation Commands
CL (Cal Adjust)
Syntax:
CL<val><terminator>
val: 50.0 to 120.0
terminator:
%
PCT
EN
Remarks:
Same as the ML24XXA (native) CFADJ command. Sets a calibration
factor to be used when performing a 0 dBm calibration.
Examples:
CL98.5EN
CL98.5%
CL98.5PCT.
CS (Clear all status byte)
Syntax:
CS
Remarks:
Same as the *CLS command. Resets all of the GPIB status registers and
clears the input queue.
CT (Clear the cal factor table)
Syntax:
CT<table_number>
table number: 0 to 9
Remarks:
Clears the specified cal factor table to a single 50 MHz entry at 100%.
Since the ML243xA stores the cal factor table information in the sensor,
this data must be saved to the sensor by using the ‘EX’ command or an
additional command ‘SV’, or the data could be lost. The saving of the cal
factor table data to the sensor can be done at the end of all updates to a
particular table.
DA (Display All)
Syntax:
DA
Remarks:
Turns on all the segments of the display to verify proper operation. The
display is returned to normal when another command is sent.
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
8-107
HP437B Emulation Commands
GPIB Operation
DC (Duty Cycle state)
Syntax:
DC<state>
state:
0 = OFF
1 = ON
Remarks:
Turns on or off application of the duty cycle to the sensor data.
DD (Display disable)
Syntax:
DD
Remarks:
Turns the display off to allow faster measurements to be taken.
Related
commands:
DE, DF
DE (Display enable)
Syntax:
DE
Remarks:
Return the display to normal operation after the display has been set in
DD mode.
Related
commands:
DD, DF
DF (Display disable)
Syntax:
DF
Remarks:
Turns the display off to allow faster measurements to be taken.
Related
commands:
DD, DE
DR (Set GPIB address)
Syntax:
DR<val><terminator>
val:
1 to 30
terminator:
EN
Remarks:
8-108
Changes the device address. The power meter default address is 13.
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
GPIB Operation
HP437B Emulation Commands
DY (Duty Cycle)
Syntax:
DY<val><terminator>
val: duty cycle value in percent
terminator: %, PCT, or EN
Remarks:
Sets the duty cycle to be applied to the input signal.
EMUL (GPIB emulation mode)
Syntax:
EMUL <mode>
mode:
ML24XX (Anritsu ML243xA native mode)
HP436A (Hewlett-Packard)
HP437B (Hewlett-Packard)
HP438A (Hewlett-Packard)
ML4803 (Anritsu ML4803A Series)
Remarks:
Set the GPIB emulation to emulate other types of power meters. This
command is available in any emulation mode, and resets the whole
GPIB interface when the emulation mode is changed.
When selecting GPIB emulation modes, the instrument configures itself
to the preset conditions of the instrument to be emulated. For example,
when selecting HP438A emulation, the front panel menus pass through
the presets for the HP437B (which presets sensor A to dBm) then selects
HP438A emulation (which presets sensor A to Watts).
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
8-109
HP437B Emulation Commands
GPIB Operation
EN (Enter command)
Syntax:
EN
ET (Enter data for a cal factor table)
Syntax:
ET<table_number><freq_value><cal factor><terminator>
table number:
0 to 9 (F for factory table allowed when using to read a table)
freq value:
cal factor entry frequency value
cal factor:
cal factor value in percentage
terminator:
EN to terminate and entry
EX to terminate table entries
Remarks:
Since the ML243xA stores the cal factor table information in the sensor,
this data must be saved to the sensor by using the ‘EX’ command or an
additional command ‘SV’, or the data could be lost. The saving of the cal
factor table data to the sensor can be done at the end of all updates to a
particular table.
EX (Exit cal factor table mode)
Syntax:
EX
Remarks:
Used on the ML243xA to force a save of the cal factor table to the sensor
if the data has changed.
FA (Auto average)
Syntax:
FA
Remarks:
Automatic Filter on. Allows the system to automatically select the filter
used to reduce the jitter in the display.
Related
commands:
FM, FH
8-110
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
GPIB Operation
HP437B Emulation Commands
FH (average hold)
Syntax:
FH
Remarks:
Hold filter sets the filter mode to Manual from Auto, but retains the
auto filter setting. This function is the same as the AVGM command.
Related
commands:
FM, FH, FA
FM (Set average value)
Syntax:
FM<val>EN
val: 1 to 512
Remarks:
Sets the filter length for the averaging of sensor data. For HP437B
emulation, the command accepts 1 to 512 in 2-to-the-power steps. For
example, 1, 2, 4, 8, 16,...256, 512.
Related
commands:
FH, FA
FR (Frequency of the input signal)
Syntax:
FR<val><units>
val:
units:
GZ (GHz)
MZ (MHz)
KZ (kHz)
HZ (Hz)
EN (Hz)
Remarks:
Sets the frequency of the input signal so that the correct cal factor is
used.
Example:
To set the frequency of the input signal to 300 MHz:
FR300MZ
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
8-111
HP437B Emulation Commands
GPIB Operation
GT (Set group trigger)
Syntax:
GT<mode>
mode:
0
1
2
Remarks:
0 = Ignore Group Execute Trigger (GET) command
1 = Trigger immediate response to ‘GET’ command
2 = Trigger with delayed response to ‘GET’ command
The GTn command configures what the device does when it receives the
‘GET’ command.
For example: GT1 sets the’ GET’ (Group Execute Trigger) to perform a
TR1 type trigger.
Related
commands:
TR
ID (Return identification string)
Syntax:
ID
Remarks:
Returned format:
<company name>,<model>,<firmware version>
IDN? (HP437B identity request)
Syntax:
IDN?
Remarks:
Returned format:
<company name>,<model>,<firmware version>
8-112
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
GPIB Operation
HP437B Emulation Commands
KB (Calibration factor)
Syntax:
KB<val><terminator>
val:
1.0 to 150.0%
terminator:
%
PCT
EN
Remarks:
The calibration factor compensates for mismatch losses and effective
efficiency over the frequency range of the power sensor.
Example:
KB99.9%
KB99.9PCT
KB99.9EN
LG (Set log units)
Syntax:
LG
Remarks:
Changes the display to log units (dBm).
LH (Set high limit)
Syntax:
LH<val>EN
val:
-200 to +200 (dBm only)
Remarks:
Sets the high limit.
Example:
LH30.00EN
LL (Set low limit)
Syntax:
LL<val>EN
val:
-200 to +200 (dBm only)
Remarks:
Sets the low limit.
Example:
LL20.00EN
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
8-113
HP437B Emulation Commands
GPIB Operation
LM (limits check state)
Syntax:
LM<state>
state:
0 (off) or 1 (on)
Remarks:
Turns limit checking on or off.
LN (Set linear units)
Syntax:
LN
Remarks:
Changes the display to linear units (Watts).
OC (Set calibrator state)
Syntax:
OC<state>
state:
0 (OFF)
1 (ON)
Remarks:
For example: OC0 (reference calibrator state set to OFF).
OD (Output the display)
Syntax:
OD
Remarks:
Outputs a formatted display channel reading in either dBs or Watts.
Will also output the cal factor tables, as described below.
The only way to read out the cal factor table data from the HP437 is to
send the commands to display each entry on the screen, and then ask for
a text display output using the 'OD' command.
The ML243xA supports the 'OD' command to the extent that it will
output a formatted display channel reading in either dBs or Watts, and
will also output the cal factor tables. After sending the 'ETn' command
(n = the cal factor table number) if an 'OD' is sent, the first frequency/cal
factor entry of the cal factor table is output in the HP format. If this is
then followed by an 'EN' the next cal factor entry pair is available for
output, and can be read using the 'OD' command. When all the pairs are
output, all further 'ENOD' combinations output a frequency of '00.00
MHz 100.0%'. The EX command terminates this action so that further
'OD' commands now output the display reading in a formatted mode.
If RFnOD (n = cal factor table number) is sent, the 50 MHz cal factor
table entry is output.
8-114
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
GPIB Operation
HP437B Emulation Commands
OF (Offset state)
Syntax:
OF<state>
state:
0 (OFF)
1 (ON)
Remarks:
For example: OF1 (Turn offsets ON).
OI (Return identification string)
Syntax:
OI
Remarks:
Returned format:
<company name>,<model>,<firmware version>
OS (Set offset value)
Syntax:
OS<val>EN
val: -200 to +200 (dBm only)
Remarks:
Specifies the offset applied to the displayed value. Values can be entered
in 0.01 dB increments.
Example:
OS10.13EN
Set an offset of 10.13 to the displayed value.
PR (Preset the unit)
Syntax:
PR
Remarks:
Presets the unit to the HP factory defaults. This command does not
effect the calibration factors stored in the sensor data tables.
RA (Auto Range)
Syntax:
RA
Remarks:
Sets the ML243xA to automatically select the correct range for the
measurement.
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
8-115
HP437B Emulation Commands
GPIB Operation
RC (Recall setup)
Syntax:
RC<val>EN
val: 1 to 10
Remarks:
The ML243xA can store up to 10 instrument configurations for
convenient recall. The configuration parameters stored are the same
parameters the ML243xA stores in its own *SAV and *RCL native
commands. Therefore, RC is equivalent to *RCL, and ST is equivalent to
*SAV.
Selecting Register 0 always restores the previous power meter
configuration, providing an expedient way to recover from an entry
error.
RE (Set decimal point resolution)
Syntax:
RE<number>EN
val: 1, 2, or 3
Remarks:
Set the number of decimal places displayed.
Example:
To set the display resolution to 2 decimal places:
RE2EN
RF (Set the reference cal factor value for a table)
Syntax:
RF<table_number><cal_factor>%
table number: 0 to 9
cal factor: 50 to 150
%: terminator
Remarks:
Set the reference cal factor value for a table. Since the ML243xA stores
the cal factor table information in the sensor, this data must be saved to
the sensor by using the ‘EX’ command or an additional command ‘SV’, or
the data could be lost. The saving of the cal factor table data to the
sensor can be done at the end of all updates to a particular table.
RH (Range hold)
Syntax:
RH
Remarks:
Hold the power meter in the current range. The differences in sensor
ranges must be taken into account when the ML2430 is being used to
emulate the HP437.
8-116
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
GPIB Operation
HP437B Emulation Commands
RL (Relative mode)
Syntax:
RL<mode>
mode:
0
1
2
Relative mode permits any measurement result to be compared in dB or
percent to a reference value. Relative mode can be enabled using the
current power reading (RL1) or the previous reference level (RL2).
Successive measurements are displayed relative to this reference value.
RL0 disables relative mode.
RM (Range hold set)
Syntax:
RM<val>EN
val: 0 to 5
Remarks:
Set the range to <val> and then sets range hold. A value of 0 selects
Auto Ranging, so that the range will change to take the best
measurement automatically.
Example:
To set the range to 3:
RM3EN
Related
commands:
RH
RV (Service request mask value)
Syntax:
RV
Remarks:
Read service request mask value. The returned string format is:
<integer value>
Converting the integer value into an 8-bit binary number, each bit
corresponds to the Service Request mask bits.
SE (Select cal factor table)
Syntax:
SE<table_number>EN
table number: 0 to 9
Remarks:
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
Selects the cal factor table to be used.
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
8-117
HP437B Emulation Commands
GPIB Operation
SM (status message)
Syntax:
SM
Remarks:
Returns the status message in the format:
AAaaBBCCccDDddEFGHIJKLMNOP<cr><lf>
where:
AA: measurement error code
aa: entry error code
BB: operating mode
CC: sensor A range
cc: 0
DD: sensor A filter
dd: 0
E: linear/log units
F: A
G: pwr ref status
H: REL mode status
I: trigger mode
J: group trigger mode
K: limits checking status
L: sensor A limits status
M: 0
N: offset status
O: duty cycle status
P: measurement units
8-118
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
GPIB Operation
HP437B Emulation Commands
SN (Cal table identity update)
Syntax:
SN<val>
val: up to seven characters
Remarks:
Since the ML243xA stores the cal factor table information in the sensor,
this data must be saved to the sensor by using the ‘EX’ command or an
additional command ‘SV’, or the data could be lost. The saving of the cal
factor table data to the sensor can be done at the end of all updates to a
particular table.
ST (Store setup)
Syntax:
ST<val>EN
val: 1 to 10
Remarks:
Stores the present configuration to the selected register.
Example:
To store the current instrument configuration in register 2:
ST2EN
Related
commands:
RC
SV (Save cal factor table)
Syntax:
SV
Remarks:
Since the ML243xA stores the cal factor tables in the sensors, this
command forces the edits to a cal factor table to be saved to the sensor.
The operation can take a couple of seconds to complete.
TR0 (Trigger hold mode)
Syntax:
TR0
Remarks:
Sets both channels to trigger hold mode. It does not trigger until it
receives a TR1 or TR2 or GET (group executive trigger), *TRG or TR3
command. If it receives a TR3 command it reverts back to the trigger
mode it was in before the TR0 command was sent. If the REM line is
low, this command has no effect.
Related
commands:
TR1, TR2, TR3, *TRG, Group Execute Trigger (GET), GT0, GT1, GT2
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
8-119
HP437B Emulation Commands
GPIB Operation
TR1 (Trigger immediate)
Syntax:
TR1
Remarks:
Triggers a single reading which is added to the internal digital filter and
the updated filter power level is returned on the GPIB. After a TR1
command, the instrument returns to TR0 standby mode.
Related
commands:
TR0, TR2, TR3, *TRG, Group Execute Trigger (GET), GT0, GT1, GT2
TR2 (Trigger with a settling delay)
Syntax:
TR2
Remarks:
Triggers a new series of readings; enough to update the internal digital
filter for a noise free reading at the current power level. The value is
then returned on the GPIB and returns to TR0 standby mode.
Related
commands:
TR0, TR1, TR3, *TRG, Group Execute Trigger (GET), GT0, GT1, GT2
TR3 (Trigger free run)
Syntax:
TR3
Remarks:
Sets the ML243xA back into free run mode on both channels.
Related
commands:
TR0, TR1, TR2, *TRG, Group Execute Trigger (GET), GT0, GT1, GT2
ZE (Zero sensors)
Syntax:
ZE
Remarks:
Zero all connected sensors. The ML2430, when emulating the HP437,
may take longer to Zero a sensor than the HP437 itself. When
performing a zero the status byte should be used to identify when
ZEROing is complete.
8-120
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
GPIB Operation
8-13
HP438A Emulation Commands
HP438A Emulation Commands
This section provides an alphabetical listing of the GPIB commands (mnemonics) used to
program the Model ML243xA Power Meter when in HP438A Emulation mode. The emulation
mode can be set through the front panel SYSTEM > more > more > Rear panel > GPIB >
MODE menu or through the GPIB command EMUL.
HP Emulation commands must not have a space between the command header and the
parameter, or commas between the parameters.
The format for HP Emulation commands is:
<command header><parameter 1><parameter n>...
The end of the command text must be terminated with a line feed character (0Ah, decimal 10)
or a GPIB End of Transmission State (EOI), or both.
The ML243xA in HP438A emulation mode also supports the HP437B cal factor table edit and
read commands.
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
8-121
HP438A Emulation Commands
GPIB Operation
?ID (HP Identity request)
Syntax:
?ID
Remarks:
The format of the returned string is:
<Company name>,<model>,<serial>,<firmware version>
@1 (Set SRE mask)
Syntax:
@1<val>
val: 8-bit mask
Remarks:
Status Byte Structure, HP438A:
Bit 0: Data ready
Bit 1: Cal/Zero complete
Bit 2: Entry Error
Bit 3: Measurement error
Bit 4: Over/Under limit
Bit 5: Event Status Register (HP437B only)
Bit 6: Request Service
Bit 7: N/A
AD (Set display to A – B)
Syntax:
AD
Remarks:
Display the Input A reading minus the Input B reading.
AP (Set single sensor A display)
Syntax:
AP
Remarks:
Set the display to output Input A readings.
AR (Set display A / B)
Syntax:
AR
Remarks:
Display the Input A reading divided by the Input B reading.
BD (Set display B – A)
Syntax:
BD
Remarks:
Display the Input B reading minus the Input A reading.
8-122
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
GPIB Operation
HP438A Emulation Commands
BP (Set single sensor B display)
Syntax:
BP
Remarks:
Display Input B readings.
BR (Set display B / A)
Syntax:
BR
Remarks:
Display the Input B reading divided by the Input A reading.
CL (Cal Adjust)
Syntax:
CL<val><terminator>
val: 50.0 to 120.0
terminator: %, PCT, EN
Remarks:
Same as the ML24XXA (native) CFADJ command. Sets a calibration
factor to be used when performing a 0 dBm calibration.
Examples:
CL98.5EN
CL98.5%
CL98.5PCT
CS (Clear all status bytes)
Syntax:
CS
Remarks:
Same as the *CLS command. Resets all of the GPIB status registers and
clears the input queue.
DA (Display All)
Syntax:
DA
Remarks:
Turns on all the segments of the display to verify proper operation. The
display is returned to normal when another command is sent.
DD (Display disable)
Syntax:
DD
Remarks:
Turns the display off to allow faster measurements to be taken.
Related
commands:
DE
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
8-123
HP438A Emulation Commands
GPIB Operation
DE (Display enable)
Syntax:
DE
Remarks:
Return the display to normal operation after the display has been set in
DD mode.
Related
commands:
DD
DR (Set GPIB address)
Syntax:
DR<val>
val: 1 to 30
Remarks:
Changes the device address when operating in HP emulation mode. The
power meter default address is 13.
EMUL (GPIB emulation mode)
Syntax:
EMUL <mode>
mode:
ML24XX (Anritsu ML243xA native mode)
HP436A (Hewlett-Packard)
HP437B (Hewlett-Packard)
HP438A (Hewlett-Packard)
ML4803 (Anritsu ML4803A Series)
Remarks:
Set the GPIB emulation to emulate other types of power meters. This
command is available in any emulation mode, and resets the whole
GPIB interface when the emulation mode is changed.
When selecting GPIB emulation modes, the instrument configures itself
to the preset conditions of the instrument to be emulated. For example,
when selecting HP438A emulation, the front panel menus pass through
the presets for the HP437B (which presets sensor A to dBm) then selects
HP438A emulation (which presets sensor A to Watts).
FA (auto average)
Syntax:
FA
Remarks:
Automatic Filter on. Allows the system to automatically select the filter
used to reduce the jitter in the display.
Related
commands:
FM, FH
8-124
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
GPIB Operation
HP438A Emulation Commands
FH (average hold)
Syntax:
FH
Remarks:
Hold filter sets the filter mode to Manual from Auto, but retains the
auto filter setting. This function is the same as the AVGM command.
Related
commands:
FM, FH, FA
FM (Set average value)
Syntax:
FM<val>EN
val: 0 to 9
Remarks:
Sets the filter length for the averaging of sensor data. For HP438A
emulation, the filter length is defined as the number 2 to the power of
<val>. For example, the command FM5EN would be 25, or 32.
Related
commands:
FH, FA
GT (Set group trigger)
Syntax:
GT<mode>
mode:
0
1
2
Remarks:
0 = Ignore Group Execute Trigger (GET) command
1 = Trigger immediate response to ‘GET’ command
2 = Trigger with delayed response to ‘GET’ command
The GTn command configures what the device does when it receives the
‘GET’ command.
For example: GT1 sets the’ GET’ (Group Execute Trigger) to perform a
TR1 type trigger.
Related
commands:
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
TR
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
8-125
HP438A Emulation Commands
GPIB Operation
KB (Calibration factor)
Syntax:
KB<val><terminator>
val: 1.0 to 150.0%
terminator:
%
PCT
EN
Remarks:
The calibration factor compensates for mismatch losses and effective
efficiency over the frequency range of the power sensor.
Example:
KB99.9%
KB99.9PCT
KB99.9EN
LG (Set log units)
Syntax:
LG
Remarks:
Changes the display to log units (dBm).
LH (Set high limit)
Syntax:
LH<val>EN
val: -200 to +200 (dBm only)
Remarks:
Sets the high limit.
Example:
LH30.00EN
LL (Set low limit)
Syntax:
LL<val>EN
val: -200 to +200 (dBm only)
Remarks:
Sets the low limit.
Example:
LL20.00EN
LM (limits check state)
Syntax:
LM<state>
state: 0 (off) or 1 (on)
Remarks:
8-126
Turns limit checking on or off.
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
GPIB Operation
HP438A Emulation Commands
LN (Set linear units)
Syntax:
LN
Remarks:
Changes the display to linear units (Watts).
OC (Set calibrator state)
Syntax:
OC<state>
state:
0 (OFF)
1 (ON)
Remarks:
For example: OC0 (reference calibrator state set to OFF).
OI (HP Identity request)
Syntax:
OI
Remarks:
The format of the returned string is:
<Company name>,<model>,<serial>,<firmware version>
OS (Set offset value)
Syntax:
OS<val>EN
val: -200 to +200 (dBm only)
Remarks:
Specifies the offset applied to the displayed value. Values can be entered
in 0.01 dB increments.
Example:
To set an offset of 10.13 to the displayed value:
OS10.13EN
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
8-127
HP438A Emulation Commands
GPIB Operation
PR (Preset the unit)
Syntax:
PR
Remarks:
Presets the unit to the HP factory defaults. This command does not
effect the calibration factors stored in the sensor data tables. The
defaults for the HP438A are:
Measurement mode = Sensor A
Reference Oscillator = Off
Active entry channel = A
Measurement units = Watts
REL mode = off
Measurement parameters (set for Sensor A and Sensor B):
Cal Factor = 100.0%
Cal Adj = 100.0%
Offset = 0.00 dB
RA (Auto Range)
Syntax:
RA
Remarks:
Sets the ML243xA to automatically select the correct range for the
measurement.
RC (Recall setup)
Syntax:
RC<val>EN
val: 1 to 10
Remarks:
The ML243xA can store up to 10 instrument configurations for
convenient recall. The configuration parameters stored are the same
parameters the ML243xA stores in its own *SAV and *RCL commands.
Therefore, RC is equivalent to *RCL, and ST is equivalent to *SAV.
Selecting Register 0 always restores the previous power meter
configuration, providing an expedient way to recover from an entry
error.
RH (Range hold)
Syntax:
RH
Remarks:
Hold the power meter in the current range. The differences in sensor
ranges must be taken into account when the ML2430 is being used to
emulate the HP438.
8-128
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
GPIB Operation
HP438A Emulation Commands
RL (Relative mode)
Syntax:
RL<mode>
mode:
0
1
2
Remarks:
Relative mode permits any measurement result to be compared in dB or
percent to a reference value. Relative mode can be enabled using the
current power reading (RL1) or the previous reference level (RL2).
Successive measurements are displayed relative to this reference value.
RL0 disables relative mode.
RM (Range hold set)
Syntax:
RM<val>EN
val: 0 to 5
Remarks:
Set the range to <val> and then sets range hold. A value of 0 selects
Auto Ranging, where the range will change to take the best
measurement automatically.
Example:
To set the range to 3:
RM3EN
Related
commands:
RH
RV (Service request mask value)
Syntax:
RV
Remarks:
Read service request mask value. The returned string format is:
<integer value>
Converting the integer value into an 8-bit binary number, each bit
corresponds to the Service Request mask bits.
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
8-129
HP438A Emulation Commands
GPIB Operation
SM (Status Message)
Syntax:
SM
Remarks:
Returns the status message in the format:
AAaaBBCCccDDddEFGHIJKLMNOP<cr><lf>
where:
AA: measurement error code
aa: entry error code
BB: operating mode
CC: sensor A range
cc: sensor B range
DD: sensor A filter
dd: sensor B filter
E: measurement units
F: active entry channel
G: OSC status
H: REL mode status
I: trigger mode
J: group trigger mode
K: limits checking status
L: sensor A limits status
M: sensor B limits status
others not used
ST (Store setup)
Syntax:
ST<val>EN
val: 1 to 10
Remarks:
Stores the present configuration to the selected register.
Example:
To store the current instrument configuration in register 2:
ST2EN
Related
commands:
8-130
RC
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
GPIB Operation
HP438A Emulation Commands
TR0 (Trigger hold mode)
Syntax:
TR0
Remarks:
Sets both channels to trigger hold mode. It does not trigger until it
receives a TR1 or TR2 or GET (group executive trigger), *TRG or TR3
command. If it receives a TR3 command it reverts back to the trigger
mode it was in before the TR0 command was sent. If the REM line is
low, this command has no effect.
Related
commands:
TR1, TR2, TR3, *TRG, Group Execute Trigger (GET), GT0, GT1, GT2
TR1 (Trigger immediate)
Syntax:
TR1
Remarks:
Triggers a single reading which is added to the internal digital filter and
the updated filter power level is returned on the GPIB. After a TR1
command, the instrument returns to TR0 standby mode.
Related
commands:
TR0, TR2, TR3, *TRG, Group Execute Trigger (GET), GT0, GT1, GT2
TR2 (Trigger with a settling delay)
Syntax:
TR2
Remarks:
Triggers a new series of readings; enough to update the internal digital
filter for a noise free reading at the current power level. The value is
then returned on the GPIB and returns to TR0 standby mode.
Related
commands:
TR0, TR1, TR3, *TRG, Group Execute Trigger (GET), GT0, GT1, GT2
TR3 (Trigger free run)
Syntax:
TR3
Remarks:
Sets the ML243xA back into free run mode on both channels.
Related
commands:
TR0, TR1, TR2, *TRG, Group Execute Trigger (GET), GT0, GT1, GT2
ZE (Zero sensors)
Syntax:
ZE
Remarks:
Zero all connected sensors. The ML2430, when emulating the HP438,
may take longer to Zero a sensor than the HP438 itself. When
performing a zero the status byte should be used to identify when
ZEROing is complete.
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
8-131
Programming Examples
8-14
GPIB Operation
Programming Examples
The following programming examples are provided as a general guideline on how to program
the ML243xA Power Meters using GPIB commands. All examples are written in Visual Basic
or C language. The GPIB-specific calls are for the National Instruments GPIB DLL.
Refer to the IEEE 488.2-1987 Programming Reference book for more information about how
to use the 488.2 commands.
Output Data
Function GetReading (ByVal channel As Integer) As Single
' make space for the result
Dim result As String
result = String$(10, 0)
' Set the command up
Cmd = “O ” + Str(channel) : CmdLength = Len(Cmd)
' Send the command to the device at address 13
' (default address of the power meter)
Call DLLsend(0, 13, Cmd, CmdLength, NLend, ibsta%,
iberr%, ibcntl&)
' Receive the data from ML2430A at address 13
Call DLLreceive(0, 13, result, 10, STOPend, ibsta%,
iberr%, ibcntl&)
' Pass result back
GetReading = Val(result)
End Function
8-132
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
GPIB Operation
Programming Examples
Get Graph Data
Function GetGraphData ()
‘ function assumes that you have the graph display
‘ setup and that there is a global array called
‘ Graph_Data().
‘ make space for the result
Dim result As String
result = String$(2048, 0)
‘ set up a 2K buffer for the data to put in.
‘ Set the command up
Cmd = “OGD” : CmdLength = Len(Cmd)
‘ Send the command to the device at address 13
‘ (default address of the power meter)
Call DLLsend(0, 13, Cmd, CmdLength, NLend, ibsta%,
iberr%, ibcntl&)
‘ Receive the data from ML2430A at address 13
Call DLLreceive(0, 13, result, 2048, STOPend, ibsta%, iberr%,
ibcntl&)
result = Left(result, ibcntl&) - 1
‘ Get number of elements
Number_of_elements = Val(Mid(result, 5, InStr(5, result, “,”) - 5))
‘ redimension our global array
ReDim GraphData(1 To Number_of_elements) As Single
‘ format the result string so that we only have
‘ the elements.
result = Right(result, Len(result) - InStr(5, result, “,”))
‘ loop through elements and place into our global array
For I = 1 To Number_of_elements
next_place = InStr(result, “,”) - 1
If next_place = -1 Then next_place = Len(result)
GraphData(I) = Val(Mid(result, 1, next_place))
‘ reduce the elements by one
‘ (the one we have just put in the array)
result = Right(result, Len(result) - InStr
(result, “,”))
Next I
End Function
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
8-133
Programming Examples
GPIB Operation
Status Register Control
This function demonstrates how to use the Status Registers to provide synchronization.
Uses the TR2 (trigger with settling) command to make a reading.
Function GetTR2Reading (channel) As Single
‘ make space for the result
Dim result As String
result = String$(10, 0)
‘ Send Status Register setup command + TR0 hold trigger mode
Call DLLsend(0, 13, “*SRE 16; TR2 1", 14, NLend, ibsta%, iberr%,
ibcntl&)
‘ Set loop flag
Value = -256
Do
‘ Loop until SRQ is asserted.
Do
Call DLLTestSRQ(0, SRQ%, ibsta%, iberr%, ibcntl&)
Loop Until SRQ%=0
‘ SRQ asserted, read the ML2430As status register
Call DLLReadStatusByte(0, 13, status_byte%, ibsta%, iberr%,
ibcntl&)
‘ Check if it is the ML2430A which is requesting
‘ service (SRQ bit + MAV bit)
If (status_byte% And 80) = 80 Then
' It is the ML2430A, read back value
Call DLLreceive(0, 13, result, 10, STOPend,
ibsta%, iberr%, ibcntl&)
Value = Val(result)
End If
Loop Until Value <> -256
GetTR2Reading = Value
End Function
488.2 General Send/Receive System
This function uses the status registers to synchronize the GPIB commands and return data if
a query command was used. The system waits until the command string has been completed
and then checks to see if any data is on the GPIB output buffer. If so, the data is returned in
the Result$ argument and any error code generated in receiving the data is returned in the
Result_Code% argument.
For example: Use 4882SendReceive(0, 13, “O 1”, Result$, Result_Code%) to return a reading
from the ML243xA.
Note that this function is written in “pseudo code” and cannot be executed as is.
8-134
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
GPIB Operation
Programming Examples
Function 4882SendReceive (Board%, Addr%, cmdstring$, Result$, Result_code%) as integer
‘ Set up SRE and ESE values first, then process User
’ commands, then do *OPC
cmd$ = “*ESE 49; *SRE 48; ” + cmdstring$ + “; *OPC”
‘ Send the command string
Call DLLsend(Board%, Addr%, cmd$, Len(cmd$), Nlend,
ibsta%, iberr%, ibcntl&)
‘ Wait for either the MAV_bit (Message Available)
‘ or/and the ESB_bit (*OPC)
WaitSRQ(Board, Address, MAV_bit + ESB_bit, stb)
If (stb And MAV_bit) Then
‘ Read the data string out from the ML2430A
Result_Code% = ReadML2430A(Board, Address, Result$)
' If we did not have the ESB_bit set, wait for
‘ it again (*OPC will set this)
If (stb And ESB_bit) = 0 Then WaitSRQ(Board, Address,
ESB_bit, stb)
End if
‘ Check if anything went wrong by asking for the ESB register
Call DLLsend(Board, Address, “*ESR?”, 5, NLend, ibsta%, iberr%,
ibcntl&)
‘ Wait for it to return the data on the output queue.
WaitSRQ(Board, Address, MAV_bit, stb)
ReadML2430A(Board, Address, ESB)
‘ Read the ESB value
‘ Check the ESB for the OPC bit being set
‘ (pending commands complete).
If (Val(ESB) and 1) Then
4882SendReceive = True
' Everything sent
end if
‘ Now check if anything has gone wrong.
If (Val(ESB) And CMD_ERR_bit) Then
4882SendReceive = Command_Error
ElseIf (Val(ESB) And EXEC_ERR_bit) Then
4882SendReceive= Execution_Error
ElseIf (Val(ESB) And DEVICE_ERR_bit) Then
4882SendReceive = Device_dependent_Error
End If
End Function
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
8-135
Programming Examples
GPIB Operation
Binary Output Message Decoding
The following program example may be used to decode the three types of binary output
messages. The commands that reference this code example are OGBD, MXGDB and MNGDB
for the GRAPH_BINARY_DATA decoding; OFFTBR for the
OFFSET_TABLE_BINARY_DATA decoding; and CFURD for the
CAL_FACTOR_BINARY_DATA decoding.
/*****************************************************************
/* Decode binary outputs example*/
/* This function expects the binary response from the command to be
held in a global */
/* character array buffer. The passed parameter ‘decode type’ will
be one of the global */
/* definitions*/
/* GRAPH_BINARY_DATA*/
/* OFFSET_TABLE_BINARY_DATA, CAL_FACTOR_BINARY_DATA*/
/*****************************************************************
void buffer_decode(int decode_type)
{
int count;
long *bin_value;
char *cptr;
char ch_val[6];
int length;
if (decode_type == GRAPH_BINARY_DATA)
{
/* FOR OGBD, MXGDB and MNGDB */
/********************* Decode header ************************/
/* Find # character. */
cptr = strtok(&buffer[0],"#");
cptr = strtok(NULL,"#");
/* Get the number of characters for binary length */
ch_val[0] = *cptr++;
ch_val[1] = NULL;
count = atoi(&ch_val[0]);
8-136
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
GPIB Operation
Programming Examples
/* Get length of binary data */
for (loop = 0; loop < count; loop++)
{
ch_val[loop] = *cptr++;
}
ch_val[count] = NULL;
length = atoi(&ch_val[0]);
/* If reading in a binary graph the data will be in
*/
/* 1024LONG format. In this format each of the graph */
/* values are held as the dB value multiplied by 1024 */
/* and held in LONG form. */
/**/
/* Each long is 4 byte in length. To read and transpose
the values into real dB values each set of 4 bytes
are read into a long variable and then cast into a
float type and then divided by 1024.
*/
count = 0;
loop = 0;
bin_value = (long *)cptr; /* Set the long pointer */
/* Read and cast the data */
while (count < length)
{
real_data1[loop++] = ((float)(*bin_value++))/1024.0;
count += 4;
}
real1_entries = loop;
}
else if (decode_type == OFFSET_TABLE_BINARY_DATA)
{
/* Decode header */
/* Find # character. */
cptr = strtok(&buffer[0],"#");
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
8-137
Programming Examples
GPIB Operation
cptr = strtok(NULL,"#");
/* Get the number of characters for binary length */
ch_val[0] = *cptr++;
ch_val[1] = NULL;
count = atoi(&ch_val[0]);
/* Get length of binary data */
for (loop = 0; loop < count; loop++)
{
ch_val[loop] = *cptr++;
}
ch_val[count] = NULL;
length = atoi(&ch_val[0]);
*cptr++;
/* Read past comma for offset tables. */
/* The binary offset table is 200 sets frequency and dB */
/* These are held in single precision floating point. */
/* To convert to the real values, re-order the bytes. */
/* */
count = 0;
loop = 0;
while (count < length)
{
/* Frequency conversion */
bin_data.cval[2] = *cptr++;
bin_data.cval[3] = *cptr++;
bin_data.cval[0] = *cptr++;
bin_data.cval[1] = *cptr++;
real_data1[loop] = bin_data.fval;
/* dB conversion */
bin_data.cval[2] = *cptr++;
8-138
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
GPIB Operation
Programming Examples
bin_data.cval[3] = *cptr++;
bin_data.cval[0] = *cptr++;
bin_data.cval[1] = *cptr++;
real_data2[loop++] = bin_data.fval;
count += 8;
}
real1_entries = loop;
real2_entries = loop;
}
else if (decode_type == CAL_FACTOR_BINARY_DATA)
{
/* Decode header */
/* Read length of binary data*/
ch_val[0] = buffer[6];
ch_val[1] = buffer[7];
ch_val[2] = NULL;
length = atoi(ch_val);
/* Point after the comma */
cptr = &buffer[9];
/* Read the table identity */
count = 8;
for (loop = 0; loop < count; loop++)
{
ident[loop] = *cptr++;
length—;
}
ident[count] = NULL;
/* Read number of entries*/
bin_data.cval[0] = *cptr++;
bin_data.cval[1] = *cptr++;
bin_data.cval[2] = 0;
bin_data.cval[3] = 0;
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
8-139
Programming Examples
GPIB Operation
table_entries = bin_data.ival;
length -= 2;
/* The cal factor table output is in frequency, dB order for */
/* the whole table. The frequencies format is */
/* 32768.0e-6LONG and the dBs are held in 1024INT format.*/
/**/
count = 0;
loop = 0;
while (count < length)
{
/* Frequency conversion */
bin_data.cval[0] = *cptr++;
bin_data.cval[1] = *cptr++;
bin_data.cval[2] = *cptr++;
bin_data.cval[3] = *cptr++;
real_data1[loop] = ((float)(bin_data.lval))/32768e-6;
/* dB conversion */
bin_data.cval[0] = *cptr++;
bin_data.cval[1] = *cptr++;
bin_data.cval[2] = 0;
bin_data.cval[3] = 0;
real_data2[loop++] = ((float)(bin_data.ival))/1024.0;
count += 6;
}
real1_entries = loop;
real2_entries = loop;
}
8-140
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
Appendix A — Technical Support
A-1
Getting Support
Whilst every effort has been made to ensure the quality and reliability of this product, there
may be times when operation difficulties are experienced and technical support is required.
Technical support can be obtained from your local sales and service center by visiting
http://www.anritsu.com/contact.asp
Be prepared to supply the following information:
• Product model
• Power meter serial number
• Sensor model
• Sensor serial number
• Firmware version
• DSP and FPGA sub version
• Description of the problem
• List of error messages
• Description of steps required to reproduce the problem
• Actions already taken to correct the problem
Every effort will be made to ensure that you are contacted within one working day.
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
A-1
Getting Support
A-2
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
Appendix B — Specifications
This appendix provides a listing of system configurations, defaults, and error messages for
the ML243xA Power Meters.
B-1
System Configuration
Display:
LCD Graphic display with dual channel readout mode and
dual peak meters. Backlight and adjustable contrast
standard.
Save/Recall:
Setup Memory:
10 storage registers plus RESET default settings
Secure Mode:
Erases memory information upon power ON. Default
condition is Secure Mode OFF.
Rear Panel Inputs/Outputs
Cal Factor Voltage Input
(BNC):
Operating Modes:
Voltage: Display voltage reading on selected channel.
Voltage proportional to frequency for sensor calibration
factor compensation.
Blanking Input: TTL levels only. Selectable positive or
negative polarity.
Input Range: 0 to 20 V:
Resolution: 0.5 mV
Control:
Adjustable voltage to frequency relationship
Analog Output (BNC):
Two outputs configurable to Log or Lin
Operating Modes:
Analog Out: Selectable channel adjusted for calibration
factors and other power reading correction settings.
Pass/Fail: Selectable TTL High or Low
Channel output: Near real time analog. Uncalibrated.
AC Modulation Output: Output 1 only.
Output Range:
-5.0 V to 5.0 V
Resolution:
0.1 mV
Trigger Input:
Operating Modes:
External TTL or RF Blanking.
GPIB Interface:
IEEE-488.2 and IEC-625. Implements AH1, SH1, T6,
LE0, SR1, RL1, PP0, DC1, DT1, C0 and E1.
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
B-1
System Configuration
RS232:
Supports software download and GPIB commands.
Parallel Printer Output:
Compatible with HP Deskjet 540 and 310 Models other
500 Series and 300 Series and later are typically
compatible. Also canon BJC 80. See manual for DIP
switch settings.
General Specifications
General:
MIL-PRF-28800F, class 3
Display:
Flat panel monochrome LCD graphic with backlight.
Operating Temperature Range:
0 to 50 °C (32 to 122 °F)
Storage Temperature Range:
-40 to +70 °C (-40 to +156 °F)
Moisture:
Splash and rain resistant, 90 % humidity, non-condensing
Power Requirements:
AC: 85 to 264 VAC, 47 to 440 Hz, 40 VA Maximum
DC: 12 to 24 VDC, reverse protected to –40
Maximum input 30 V
Battery: > 4 hours usable with 3000 mAh battery and
display backlight on.
Replaceable Battery (optional):
Energizer model NJ1020
3000 mAh, Ni-MH (option 2000-996-R)
EMI:
Complies with requirements for CE marking.
Warranty:
3 year standard.
External Dimensions:
Depth: 15.310" (38.887 cm), Height: 4.060" (10.312 cm),
Width: 8.540" (21.691 cm) (standard case with feet and no
handle)
Weight:
<6.6 lb (<3 kg) excluding optional battery
Accessories Furnished:
Operation and Programming Manual
Sensor Cable: One per input
Power cord plug that matches destination requirements.
B-2
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
System Defaults
B-2
System Defaults
The following default parameters are loaded whenever preset is selected from the front panel
or through GPIB.
SENSOR - setup
settle % per reading
0.10 %
measurement mode
default
range hold
auto
SENSOR - cal factor
Source
Frequency
source ( HP437B & HP438A )
manual
source = frequency
input signal frequency
50 MHz
source = manual
cal factor
100 %
cal adjust
100 %
input signal frequency
50 MHz
source = volts/GHz
start freq
10 MHz
stop freq
20 GHz
start voltage
0 volts
stop voltage
10 volts
units
percent
SENSOR - averaging
SYSTEM - setup = readout or Power vs. Time
Mode
auto
mode ( HP437B & HP438A )
auto
mode = moving
mode = repeat
averaging number
64
auto low level averaging
low
SYSTEM - setup = profile
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
B-3
System Defaults
graph averaging state
off
between cursor average
on
SENSOR - offset
offset type
off
offset type ( HP437B )
off
offset type ( HP438A )
fixed offset type = fixed
offset value
0 dB
offset type = table
table number
1
frequencies
0 Hz
offset values
0 dB
SENSOR - duty cycle
duty cycle state
off
duty cycle
100 %
CHANNEL - setup
input config
chan 1 = A, chan 2 = off
input config ( HP437B & HP438A )
chan 1 = A, chan 2 = off
meas units
dBm
meas units ( HP437B )
dBm
meas units ( HP438A )
watts
display resolution
2 decimal places
tracking min/max display
off
CHANNEL – relative
off
CHANNEL - limits
high limit
0 dBm
high limit ( HP437B )
90 dBm
high limit ( HP438A )
0 dBm
low limit 0 dBm
low limit ( HP437B )
-90 dBm
low limit ( HP438A )
0 dBm
B-4
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
System Defaults
high limit enabled
off
low limit enabled
off
fail indicator hold
off
fail beep control
off
TRIGGER
SYSTEM - setup = readout or Power vs. Time
SENSOR - meas mode = default
std trigger mode
SENSOR - meas mode = mod average
std trigger mode
SENSOR - meas mode = custom
TRIGGER - setup
source
continuous
sample delay
1 ms
sample gate width
20 ms
source = continuous, manual
trigger arming
blanking off
source = internal A, internal B
trigger arming
blanking off
trigger type
rise
trigger level
> -15 dBm
source = external TTL
trigger edge
rise
SYSTEM - setup = profile
TRIGGER - setup
source
continuous
sample delay
1 ms
sample gate width
20 ms
source = continuous, manual
trigger arming
blanking off
source = internal A, internal B
trigger arming
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
blanking off
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
B-5
System Defaults
trigger type
rise
trigger leveL
> -15 dBm
source = external TTL
trigger edge
rise
SYSTEM - setup
mode
readout
mode = profile
SYSTEM - profile
channel
1
data hold representation
normal
data collection period
10 ms
display trigger delay
0 ns
mode = Power vs. Time
SYSTEM - pwr vs. Time
channel
1
data hold representation
normal
data display time
1 min
mode = source sweep
SYSTEM - source sweep
channel
1
data hold representation
normal
source sweep mode
frequency
mode = frequency
sweep start
10 MHz
sweep stop
20 GHz
mode = power
sweep start
-10 dB
sweep stop
+10 dB
mode = profile, power vs time, source sweep
SYSTEM - control
B-6
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
System Defaults
scale top dB value
20 dB
scale bottom dB value
-50 dB
readout
on
link cursor
off
hold
off
SYSTEM - display
battery backlight
on
display contrast
5
peak meter display
off
frequency/offset display
off
GPIB user text display
off
backlight = timed
time
5 min
SYSTEM - sound
key click state
off
edit error beep
off
limits fail beep channel 1
off
limits fail beep channel 2
off
cursor off screen beep
off
SYSTEM - battery (if present)
auto power off
enable
auto power off time
30 min
SYSTEM - rear panel - GPIB
GPIB address
13 (factory preset only)
emulation mode
ML24xx (factory preset only)
SYSTEM - rear panel - RS232
mode
EXT COMMS
baud rate
9600 (factory preset only)
modem
redial count 5
delay 5 minutes
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
B-7
System Defaults
auto
limits false
range false
power false
SYSTEM - rear panel - BNC
output 1 & 2
mode
off
mode = analog out
channel
1
start volts
0V
stop volts
5V
start display value
-10 dB
stop display value
0 dB
mode = pass/fail
channel
1
pass level
high
output 1 only
mode = AC MOD output
output
off
polarity
positive
output 2 only
mode = RF blanking
channel
1
output TTL during zero
high
input 1
blanking active TTL level
high
SYSTEM - rear panel - printer
printer type
HP Deskjet 340 (factory preset only)
SYSTEM - graphics
connect graph points
on
tracking min max
single sweep
B-8
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
System Defaults
graph ref line
off
pre-trigger percentage
10 %
SYSTEM - secure
secure state
off
CAL/ZERO
RF calibrator
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
off
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
B-9
System Error Messages
B-3
System Error Messages
This section details some of the front panel error messages that may appear. In most cases,
the error condition can be easily corrected. If not, note the error message and contact the
nearest Anritsu Service Center. Errors shown here with xxxx in the display contain a
numeric error code.
Table B-1. Error Messages
Error Message
Meaning
SAVE RECALL STORE 0
Attempting save to or recall from current store,
i.e., 0.
RECALL EMPTY STORE
Attempted to recall empty store.
SAVE RECALL STORE NUMBER
Illegal store number.
NOTE: Save Recall error messages will only
be seen under the following two conditions:
1. While doing a save or recall over the GPIB
with the measurement display active on the
front panel.
2. While doing a save or recall from the front
panel and quickly exiting to a measurement
display when an error is reported.
SENSOR x over range / under range
Range Hold is selected for Sensor x, but the
measured value is too large or small for the
range selected.
CHAN x display range
Channel x display value is greater than
+99.999 dBm or less than –99.999 dBm.
CHAN x illegal LOG calc
Combination of sensor values results in an
illegal calculation.
SENSOR x CAL error (xxxx)
Sensor x Cal 0 failed, xxxx = error code
SENSOR x CAL 0 dBm invalid
Sensor x Cal 0 dBm failed.
SENSOR x ZERO . . .
ZERO in progress
SENSOR x ZERO error (xxxx)
ZERO failed xxxx = 4 digit code
SENSOR x not fitted
Sensor x is required for the current
measurement, but is not fitted.
Printer buffer full
Try selecting print, when current job finished.
Chan x - NO trigger
Waiting for trigger on specified channel for
more than 6 seconds
Increase PERIOD to > 6 ms
WARNING: In profile mode, when using
manual or continuous trigger, the data
collection period must be > 6 ms.
Updating SENSOR data
Programming SENSOR EEPROM
Graph Channel Off
In any graph mode, the selected display
channel is off.
B-10
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
System Error Messages
Table B-1. Error Messages
Error Message
Meaning
Put sensor number limit
Attempt to read/write sensor B setup on
ML2437A
Sensor x cal factor error
Cal factor out of range - sensor x
PUT current mode limit
Present configuration will not allow requested
change.
Internal error (P6)
Entered numeric value out of range
Internal error (P10)
Requested action NOT allowed
Internal error (P20)
Cal factor edit - duplicate frequency entered
Internal error (P21)
Cannot delete last cal factor data pair in
selected table, or cannot add cal factor data
pair in selected table
Internal error (P22)
Cannot delete 50 MHz cal factor in selected
table
Internal error (P23)
Non valid cal factor table
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
B-11
Calibration and Zero Error Codes
B-4
Calibration and Zero Error Codes
Table B-2. Error Messages
Error Message
Meaning
DDDx
DC_Null failure
DDxD, x=odd number
DC-range 2 gain failure
DDxD, x=4-7,C-F
AC_Null failure
DDxD, x=8-F
Reference voltage range calibration failure
DxDD, x=odd number
Range 4 failed to saturate during calibration
DxDD, x=non zero
Residual Zero too high (+ve) on ranges 3-5
XDDD, x=non zero
Residual Zero too high (-ve) 0n ranges 3-5
B-12
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
Appendix C — GPIB Quick Reference
This appendix contains quick reference tables for all supported commands. Native mode
commands are sorted by functional group.
C-1
ML24XXA Quick Reference
The following tables reference ML24XXA (native) mode commands. A command followed by a
(?) indicates that there is an equivalent query command for that function.
BNC Functional Group Commands
Table C-1. Functional Group Commands
Command
Function
IBBLP
Blanking active TTL level
OBACM(?)
AC modulation output polarity
OBCH(?)
BNC output port channel configuration
OBDSP(?)
BNC analog output display stop value
OBDST(?)
BNC analog output display start value
OBMD(?)
BNC output mode select
OBPL(?)
BNC pass/fail pass level
OBVSP(?)
BNC analog output stop voltage scale
OBVST(?)
BNC analog output start voltage scale
OBZL(?)
BNC RF blanking output level
Calibration Functional Group Commands
Table C-2. Calibration Functional Group Commands
Command
Function
CAL
Calibrate the selected sensor to 0 dBm
RFCAL(?)
Turn RF reference calibrator ON or OFF
VZERO
Zero the BNC input connector
ZERO
Zero the sensor
Channel Functional Group Commands
Table C-3. Channel Functional Group Commands
Command
Function
CHCFG(?)
Channel input configuration
CHRES(?)
Set channel decimal point resolution
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
C-1
ML24XXA Quick Reference
Table C-3. Channel Functional Group Commands
Command
Function
CHUNIT(?)
Set Channel units
FHOLD(?)
Fail indicators Hold
HLIM(?)
Set High limits
HLIMS(?)
Turn on/off High limits
HOLD(?)
Graph hold
LLIM(?)
Set Low limits
LLIMS(?)
Turn on/off Low limits
MMRST
Minimum and maximum Tracking reset
MNMXS(?)
Track minimum and maximum values
REL(?)
Relative control
Data Output Functional Group Commands
Table C-4. Output Functional Group Commands
Command
Function
ERRLST
Returns the DDE error list
GMNMX
Return Graph minimum and maximum values
GRDRQ
Return Graph Data readout
MNGDB
Output Min Graph Binary Data
MNGD
Output Min Graph Data
MXGDB
Output Max Graph Binary Data
MXGD
Output Max Graph Data
O
Return display channel reading
OGBD
Output Graph binary data
OGD
Output Graph data
ON
Output number of channel readings
STATUS
Replies with the power meter’s current state
code
STERR
Returns the results of the POST or *TST?
command
SYSLD
Sets the store number for the saved setup
SYSRD
Output the saved setup over the GPIB
C-2
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
ML24XXA Quick Reference
Display Functional Group Commands
Table C-5. Display Functional Group Commands
Command
Function
DCONT(?)
Set display Contrast
DCONTD
Set display contrast down by one
DCONTU
Set display contrast up by one
DISP(?)
Display ON or OFF
DPEAK(?)
Peak meter display
GPIB 488.2 Functional Group Commands
Table C-6. GPIB 488.2 Functional Group Commands
Command
Function
*CLS
Clear GPIB status bytes
*ESE
Event Status Byte enable
*ESE?
Return Event status register enable mask
*ESR?
Event status register request
*IDN?
Request device identification
*OPC
Operations complete
*OPC?
Operations complete Output '1'
*RST
Reset device
*SRE
Setup service request enable register
*SRE?
Return Service Request enable register
*STB?
Return status byte register
*TRG
Perform a trigger 'GET' command
*TST?
Self Test
OI
Request device identification
GPIB Setup Functional Group Commands
Table C-7. GPIB Setup Functional Group Commands
Command
Function
ADDR(?)
Change GPIB address
CONT
Continue
EMUL
GPIB emulation mode
FAST(?)
Operate in non-488.2 compliant mode
START
Initial startup self test command
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
C-3
ML24XXA Quick Reference
GPIB Trigger Functional Group Commands
Table C-8. GPIB Trigger Functional Group Commands
Command
Function
GT0
Set to ignore GET command
GT1
Set 'GET' command to TR1 type trigger
GT2
Set 'GET' command to TR2 type trigger
TR0
Trigger hold mode
TR1
Trigger immediate
TR2
Trigger with a settling delay
TR3
Trigger free run
Profile Setup Functional Group Commands
Table C-9. Profile Setup Functional Group Commands
Command
Function
CURLK(?)
Link cursors in profile mode
DTRGD(?)
Display Trigger Delay
GRAVG(?)
Average between profile cursors
GPRST
Reset min/max graph
GRCP(?)
Connect points on profile
GRDATA(?)
Display Graph Data
GRFS(?)
Profile Reference line state
GRMD(?)
Profile and Power vs. Time Mode Channel
Selection
GRPIX(?)
Profile type
GRPRD(?)
Profile data collection period
GRPTP(?)
Graph Pre-trigger Percentage
GRSWP(?)
Sweep to Sweep averaging
GRSWR
Reset Profile Sweep to Sweep Averaging
GRTMM(?)
Profile Min/Max tracking mode
GRYB(?)
Set profile Y-axis bottom scale
GRYT(?)
Set profile Y-axis top scale
C-4
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
ML24XXA Quick Reference
Sensor Functional Group Commands
Table C-10. Sensor Functional Group Commands
Command
Function
AVG(?)
Sets the averaging type for the sensor
AVGLL(?)
Auto low level averaging
AVGM
Manual Averaging
CFADJ(?)
Cal Adjust
CFCAL(?)
Cal factor manual setting
CFFRQ(?)
Cal Factor Frequency value
CFSRC(?)
Cal Factor Source
CFUADD
Add an entry pair to a cal factor table
CFUCT
Clear cal factor table
CFUID(?)
Cal factor table identity
CFULD
Cal factor table binary load
CFUPT
Preset cal factor table
CFURD
Cal factor table binary read
CFUSAV
Cal factor table save
CFUSEL
Cal factor table select
CFUTBL
Cal factor tables
CFUUSE
Cal factor tables used
CFUVLD
Valid table check
CFVAL
Current cal factor value
CVSPF(?)
VGHz cal factor stop frequency
CVSPV(?)
VGHz cal factor stop voltage
CVSTF(?)
VGHz cal factor start frequency
CVSTV(?)
VGHz cal factor start voltage
DUTY(?)
Duty cycle
DUTYS(?)
Duty cycle state
OFFCLR
Clear an offset table
OFFFIX(?)
Offset fixed value
OFFTBL(?)
Select an offset table
OFFTBR
Output an offset table
OFFTBU
Update an offset table
OFFTYP(?)
Offset type to use
OFFVAL
Sensor Offset Value
RGH(?)
Range Hold Sensor
SENMM(?)
Sensor Measurement mode
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
C-5
ML24XXA Quick Reference
Table C-10. Sensor Functional Group Commands
Command
Function
SENMO(?)
Universal Sensor operation mode
SENSTL(?)
Set Sensor Settle Percentage
SENTYP
Return sensor information
System Functional Group Commands
Table C-11. System Functional Group Commands
Command
Function
*RCL
Recall a stored setup
*SAV
Save configuration
BAUTS(?)
Battery Auto State
BAUTT(?)
Battery Auto shut off after x minutes
BUFF
GPIB response buffering enabled
CUR
Cursor movement in Power vs. Time and
Source Sweep modes
DBLGHT(?)
Battery LCD Back light mode
DBLTIM(?)
Auto Backlight OFF timer setting
ENTERR(?)
Entry Error beep
FBEEP(?)
Fail Beep On/Off
FROFF(?)
Frequency/Offset display
FRST
Factory Reset
GRAUTO
Auto scaling
GRDDT(?)
Power vs. Time data display time
KEYCK(?)
Turn key click sound on or off
MODDEL
Modem redial delay time
MODINIT
Initialize modem
MODLIM
Autodial enable for limits failure
MODPH
Autodial phone number
MODPWR
Autodial enable for power on
MODRED
Redial count
MODRNG
Autodial enable for range error
OPMD(?)
Operation mode
PRINT
Send details to the connected printer
PRNSEL
Select the type of printer
RSBAUD(?)
Set the RS232 Baud rate
SECURE(?)
Secure system state
C-6
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
ML24XXA Quick Reference
Table C-11. System Functional Group Commands
Command
Function
SRCMOD(?)
Source sweep mode
SRCSTRFQ(?)
Source sweep start frequency
SRCSPFRQ(?)
Source sweep stop frequency
SRCSTPWR(?)
Source sweep start power
SRCSPPWR(?)
Source sweep stop power
SRCSTAT
Source sweep status request
SYSLNM
Saved set naming
TEXT(?)
User text command
TEXTS(?)
User text display command
Trigger Functional Group Commands
Table C-12. Trigger Functional Group Commands
Command
Function
GTARM(?)
Set profile trigger arming
GTDLY(?)
Set profile trigger sample delay
GTGW(?)
Set profile trigger gate width
GTLVL(?)
Set profile trigger level
GTSRC(?)
Set profile Trigger source
GTTYP(?)
Set profile trigger type
GTXTTL(?)
Set profile external trigger edge
LINK(?)
Link graph and readout trigger
TRGARM(?)
Trigger arming
TRGDLY(?)
Trigger sample delay
TRGGW(?)
Set trigger gate width
TRGLVL(?)
Set trigger level
TRGMODE
Change trigger mode
TRGSRC(?)
Set trigger source
TRGTYP(?)
Set Trigger type
TRGXTTL(?)
Set external trigger edge type
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
C-7
ML24XXA Quick Reference
ML24XXA Native Mode Query Commands
Table C-13. ML24xxA Native Mode Query Commands
Query
Return String
ADDR?
ADDR <VAL>
AVG? <S>
AVG <S>,<MODE>,<VAL>
AVGLL? <S>
AVGLL <S>,<MODE>
BAUTS?
BAUTS <STATE>
BAUTT?
BAUTT <VAL>
CFADJ? <S>
CFADJ <S>,<UNITS>,<VAL>
CFCAL? <S>
CFCAL <S>,<UNITS>,<VAL>
CFFRQ? <S>
CFFRQ <S>,<VALUE>
CFSRC? <S>
CFSRC <S>,<SOURCE>
CFUID? <S>,<TABLE NO>
CFUID <S>,<TABLE NO>,<IDENTITY>
CFUNITS? <S>
CFUNITS <S>,<UNITS>
CHCFG? <C>
CHCFG <C>,<CONFIG>
CHRES? <C>
CHRES <C>,<VAL>
CHUNIT? <C>
CHUNIT <C>,<UNITS>
CURLK?
CURLK <STATE>
CVSPF? <S>
CVSPF <S>,<VAL>
CVSPV? <S>
CVSPV <S>,<VAL>
CVSTF? <S>
CVSTF <S>,<VAL>
CVSTV? <S>
CVSTV <S>,<VAL>
DBLGHT?
DBLGHT <MODE>
DBLTIM?
DBLTIM <VAL>
DCONT?
DCONT <VAL>
DISP?
DISP <STATE>
DPEAK?
DPEAK <MODE>
DTRGD?
DTRGD <VAL>
DUTY? <S>
DUTY <S>,<DUTY CYCLE>
DUTYS? <S>
DUTYS <S>,<STATE>
ENTERR?
ENTERR <STATE>
FBEEP? <C>
FBEEP <C>,<STATE>
FHOLD? <C>
FHOLD <C>,<STATE>
FROFF?
FROFF <STATE>
GRAVG?
GRAVG <STATE>
GRCP?
GRCP <STATE>
GRDATA?
GRDATA <STATE>
C-8
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
ML24XXA Quick Reference
Table C-13. ML24xxA Native Mode Query Commands
Query
Return String
GRDDT?
GRDDT <TIME>,<UNITS>
GRFS?
GRFS <STATE>
GRMD?
GRMD <C>
GRPIX?
GRPIX <MODE> (MODE can be AVG in Power
vs. Time mode)
GRPTP?
GRPTP <VAL>
GRPRD?
GRPRD <VAL>
GRSWP? <S>
GRSWP <S>,<VAL>
GRSWS?
GRSWS <STATE>
GRTMM?
GRTMM <MODE>
GRYB?
GRYB <VAL>
GRYT?
GRYT <VAL>
GTARM?
GTARM <STATE>
GTDLY?
GTDLY <VAL>
GTGW?
GTGW <VAL>
GTLVL?
GTLVL <VAL>
GTSRC?
GTSRC <SOURCE>
GTTYP?
GTTYP <TYPE>
GTXTTL?
GTXTTL <TYPE>
HLIM? <C>
HLIM <C>,<VAL>
HLIMS? <C>
HLIMS <C>,<STATE>
HOLD?
HOLD <STATE>
IBBLP?
IBBLP <polarity>
KEYCK?
KEYCK <STATE>
LINK?
LINK <STATE>
LLIM? <C>
LLIM <C>,<VAL>
LLIMS? <C>
LLIMS <C>,<STATE>
MNMXS? <C>
MNMXS <C>,<STATE>
MODDEL?
MODDEL <value>
MODLIM?
MODLIM <true> or <false>
MODPH?
MODPH <phone_number>
MODPWR?
MODPWR <true> or <false>
MODRED?
MODRED <count>
MODRNG?
MODRNG <true> or <false>
OBACM?
OBACM <POLARITY>
OBCH? <PORT>
OBCH <PORT>,<C>
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
C-9
ML24XXA Quick Reference
Table C-13. ML24xxA Native Mode Query Commands
Query
Return String
OBDSP? <PORT>
OBDSP <PORT>,<UNITS>,<VAL>
OBDST? <PORT>
OBDST <PORT>,<UNITS>,<VAL>
OBMD? <PORT>
OBMD <PORT>, <MODE>
OBPL? <PORT>
OBPL <PORT>,<LEVEL>
OBVSP? <PORT>
OBVSP <PORT>,<VAL>
OBVST? <PORT>
OBVST <PORT>,<VAL>
OBZL?
OBZL <LEVEL>
OFFFIX? <S>
OFFFIX <S>,<VAL>
OFFTBL? <S>
OFFTBL <S>,<VAL>
OFFTYP? <S>
OFFTYP <S>,<TYPE>
OPMD?
OPMD <MODE>
PRNSEL?
PRNSEL <printer>
REL? <C>
REL <C>,<MODE>
RFCAL?
RFCAL <STATE>
RGH? <S>
RGH <S>,<VAL>
RSBAUD?
RSBAUD <VAL>
RSMODE?
RSMODE <state>
SECURE?
SECURE <STATE>
SENMM? <S>
SENMM <S>,<MODE>
SENMO?
SENMO <S>,<VAL>
SENSTL? <S>
SENSTL <S>,<MODE>
SRCMOD?
SRCMOD <MODE>
SRCSPFRQ?
SRCSPFRQ <FREQ>
SRCSTFRQ?
SRCSTFRQ <FREQ>
SRCSPPWR?
SRCSPPWR <POWER>
SRCSTPWR?
SRCSTPWR <POWER>
SYSLNM? <STORE NO>
SYSLNM <STORE NO>,<STORE NAME>
TEXT?
TEXT <TEXT STRING>
TEXTS?
TEXTS <STATE>
TRGARM? <C>*
TRGARM <C>,<STATE>
TRGDLY? <C>*
TRGDLY <C>,<VAL>
TRGGW? <C>*
TRGGW <C>,<VAL>
TRGLVL? <C>*
TRGLVL <C>,<VAL>
TRGMODE?
TRGMODE<MODE>
TRGSRC?<C>*
TRGSRC <C>,<SOURCE>
C-10
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
ML24XXA Quick Reference
Table C-13. ML24xxA Native Mode Query Commands
Query
Return String
TRGTYP? <C>*
TRGTYP <C>,<TYPE>
TRGXTTL? <C>*
TRGXTTL <C>,<TYPE>
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
C-11
ML4803A Quick Reference
C-2
ML4803A Quick Reference
The following tables reference ML4803A emulation mode commands.
ML4803A Emulation Mode Commands
Table C-14. ML4803A Emulation Mode Commands
Command
Function
AVE
Sensor averaging setting
CAL
Set the user cal factor value
CCA
Clear the user cal factor to zero
CDJ
Perform a Cal 0 dBm
COF
Clear the offset value to zero
COS
Turn ON the 50 MHz, 0 dBm RF calibrator
output
CRF
Clear the reference value to zero
CST
Turn OFF the 50 MHz, 0 dBm RF calibrator
output
DBM
Sets the display channel units to dBm
DBR
Set the display channel units to dB and takes
the relative value
EMUL
GPIB emulation mode
MCA
Set the cal factor value at the specified
memory location in dBm
MCC
Clears the cal factor value at the specified
memory location
MCO
Clears the offset value at the specified memory
location
MCQ
Clears the frequency value at the specified
memory location
MCR
Clears the reference value at the specified
memory location
MCT
Clears all values at the specified memory
location
MDI
Disable memory store setting and use
MEN
Enable setting of the memory stores and apply
the last memory store configured
MFG
Set the frequency value at the specified
memory location in GHz
MFM
Set the frequency value at the specified
memory location in MHz
C-12
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
ML4803A Quick Reference
Table C-14. ML4803A Emulation Mode Commands
Command
Function
MOF
Set the offset value at the specified memory
location in dBm
MRF
Set the reference value at the specified
memory location in dBm
ODT
Output the current calibration factor, offset
value, and reference level
OFF
Set sensor offset value
OI?
Request identity
OMR
Output a memory store set of data
OPW
Request for channel reading
REF
Set the reference value
RNG
Sensor measurement range hold
SRQ
Turns on or off the SRQ on output data ready
STA
Restart averaging reading
WAT
Set the display channel unit to Watts
ZAJ
Zero the sensor
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
C-13
HP436A Quick Reference
C-3
HP436A Quick Reference
The following table references HP436A emulation mode commands.
HP436A Emulation Mode Commands
Table C-15. HP436A Emulation Mode Commands
Command
Function
+
Disable cal factors
–
Enable cal factors
1, 2, 3, 4 & 5
Set sensor operating range
9
Auto range
A
Watt
B
dB (rel)
C
dB (ref)
D
dBm
EMUL
Select emulation mode
H
Hold mode
I
Trigger without settling
OI
Identification
R
Free run mode
T
Trigger with settling
V
Free run mode with settling
Z
Zero sensor
C-14
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
HP437B Quick Reference
C-4
HP437B Quick Reference
The following table references HP437B emulation mode commands.
HP437B Emulation Commands
Table C-16. HP437B Emulation Mode Commands
Command
Function
+
Disable cal factors
–
Enable cal factors
1, 2, 3, 4 & 5
Set sensor operating range
9
Auto range
A
Watt
B
dB (rel)
C
dB (ref)
D
dBm
EMUL
Select emulation mode
H
Hold mode
I
Trigger without settling
OI
Identification
R
Free run mode
T
Trigger with settling
V
Free run mode with settling
Z
Zero sensor
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
C-15
HP438A Quick Reference
C-5
HP438A Quick Reference
The following table references HP438A emulation mode commands.
HP438A Emulation Commands
Table C-17. HP438A Emulation Mode Commands
Command
Function
?ID
Return ID string
@1
Set SRE mask
AD
Config to A-B
AP
Config to A
AR
Set display A / B
BD
Set display B – A
BP
Set single sensor B display
BR
Set display B / A
CL
Cal Adjust
CS
Clear all status bytes
DA
Display All
DD
Display disable
DE
Display enable
DR
Set GPIB address
EMUL
GPIB emulation mode
FA
Auto average
FH
Average hold
FM
Set average value
GT
Set group trigger
KB
Calibration factor
LG
Set log units
LH
Set high limit
LL
Set low limit
LM
Limits check state
LN
Set linear units
OC
Set calibrator state
OI
Identification
OS
Set offset value
PR
Preset the unit
RA
Auto Range
RC
Recall setup
C-16
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
HP438A Quick Reference
Table C-17. HP438A Emulation Mode Commands
Command
Function
RH
Range hold
RL
Relative mode
RM
Range hold set
RV
Read service request mask value.
SM
Status message
ST
Store setup
TR0
Trigger hold mode
TR1
Trigger immediate
TR2
Trigger with a settling delay
TR3
Trigger free run
ZE
Zero sensors
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
C-17
HP-IB Support
C-6
HP-IB Support
The following tables list HP-IB commands for the HP437B and HP438A power meters, and
which commands are supported in the Anritsu ML243xA power meter. Restrictions, if any,
are also listed. Commands that are not supported will be ignored.
HP437B Commands
Table C-18. HP437B Emulation Mode Commands
Mnemonic
Action
Supported?
Restrictions
CL
CAL 0 dBm
Yes
None
*CLS
Clear Status
Yes
None
CS
Clear status
Yes
None
CT0-CT9
Sensor data tables
Yes
None
DA
Set all screen pixels
Yes
None
DC0
Duty cycle OFF
Yes
None
DC1
Duty cycle ON
Yes
None
DD
Disable display
Yes
DISP OFF restrictions:
Screen and min/max
not updated, Relative
not active
DE
Display enable
Yes
DISP ON. None.
DF
Disable Display
Yes
see DD
DN
Down arrow
No
Not supported
DU
User message
No
Not supported
DY
Duty cycle
Yes
None
EN
Enter msg terminator
Yes
None
ERR?
Error query
No
Not supported
*ESR?
Read event reg
Yes
None
*ESE
Set event enable reg
Yes
None
*ESE?
Read event enable
reg
Yes
None
ET0-ET9
Edit cal factor table
Yes
None
EX
Exit
Yes
None
FA
Auto average
Yes
None
FH
Average hold
Yes
None
FM
Manual average
Yes
None
FR
Set frequency
Yes
Switch to frequency
cal factor source.
GT0
Ignore GET
Yes
None
GT1
TR1 on GET
Yes
None
C-18
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
HP-IB Support
Table C-18. HP437B Emulation Mode Commands
Mnemonic
Action
Supported?
Restrictions
GT2
TR2 on GET
Yes
None
GZ
Terminator
Yes
None
HZ
Terminator
Yes
None
ID
Return ID string
Yes
None
IDN?
Return ID string
Yes
None
KB
Set cal factor
Yes
None
KZ
Terminator
Yes
None
LG
Units to dBm
Yes
None
LH
Set high limit
Yes
On channel not
sensor.
LL
Set low limit
Yes
On channel not sensor
LM0
Limit check off
Yes
Both high and low off
as HP437B
LM1
Limit check on
Yes
Both high and low on
as HP437B
LN
Units to Watts
Yes
None
LP
Learn mode 1
No
Not supported
LT
Left arrow
No
Not supported
MZ
Terminator
Yes
None
OC0
RF calibrator off
Yes
None
OC1
RF calibrator on
Yes
None
OD
Output display text
Yes
Supports reading
output and Cal factor
table output only.
(F=Factory table.)
OF0
Offset off
Yes
None
OF1
Offset on
Yes
None
OS
Set offset value
Yes
OSDOEN not
supported
PCT
Terminator
Yes
None
PR
Preset
Yes
None
RA
Auto range
Yes
None
RC
Recall setup
Yes
Limited to 10 stores
RE
Resolution
Yes
Set screen decimal
places
RF0-RF9
Sensor cal factors
Yes
None
RH
Range hold
Yes
None
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
C-19
HP-IB Support
Table C-18. HP437B Emulation Mode Commands
Mnemonic
Action
Supported?
Restrictions
RL0
Relative mode off
Yes
None
RL1
New relative value
Yes
None
RL2
Use old relative value
Yes
None
RM
Set sensor range
Yes
ML243xA ranges
*RST
Reset
Yes
None
RT
Right arrow
No
Not supported
RV
Read SRE
Yes
None
SE
Select data table
Yes
None
SM
Status output
Yes
As much as has
meaning for
ML243xA. Set to 0 if
not used
SN0-SN9
Serial number
Yes
None
SP
Special
No
Not supported
*SRE
Set SRQ enables
Yes
None
*SRE?
Read SRQ enables
Yes
None
ST
Store setup
Yes
Limited to 10 stores
*STB?
Read status byte
Yes
None
TR0
GPIB trigger hold
Yes
None
TR1
Immediate trigger
Yes
None
TR2
Settled trigger
Yes
None
TR3
Trigger hold off
Yes
None
*TST?
Selftest
Yes
Always returns 0
UP
Up arrow
No
Not supported
@1
Status mask
Yes
None
@2
Learn mode 2
No
Not supported
%
Terminator
Yes
None
C-20
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
HP-IB Support
HP438A Commands
Table C-19. HP438A Commands
Mnemonic
Action
Supported?
Restrictions
AD
Config to A-B
Yes
None
AE
Select sensor A
Yes
None
AP
Config to A
Yes
None
AR
Config A/B
Yes
None
BD
Config to B-A
Yes
None
BE
Select sensor B
Yes
None
BP
Config to B
Yes
None
BR
Config to B/A
Yes
None
CL
CAL 0 dBm
Yes
None
CS
Clear status
Yes
None
DA
Set all screen pixels
Yes
None
DD
Disable display
Yes
DISP OFF restrictions:
Screen and min/max
not updated, Relative
not active.
DE
Display enable
Yes
DISP ON. None.
DO
Display to offset
No
Not supported
EN
Enter msg terminator
Yes
None
FA
Auto average
Yes
None
FH
Average hold
Yes
None
FM
Manual average
Yes
None
GT0
Ignore GET
Yes
None
GT1
TR1 on GET
Yes
None
GT2
TR2 on GET
Yes
None
KB
Set cal factor
Yes
None
LG
Units to dBm
Yes
None
LH
Set high limit
Yes
On channel not
sensor.
LL
Set low limit
Yes
On channel not sensor
LM0
Limit check off
Yes
Both high and low off
as HP437B
LM1
Limit check on
Yes
Both high and low on
as HP437B
LN
Units to Watts
Yes
None
LP1
Learn mode1
No
Not supported
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
C-21
HP-IB Support
Table C-19. HP438A Commands
Mnemonic
Action
Supported?
Restrictions
LP2
Learn mode2
No
Not supported
OC0
RF calibrator off
Yes
None
OC1
RF calibrator on
Yes
None
OS
Set offset value
Yes
OSDOEN not
supported
PR
Preset
Yes
None
RA
Auto range
Yes
None
RC
Recall setup
Yes
Limited to 10 stores
RH
Range hold
Yes
None
RL0
Relative mode off
Yes
None
RL1
New relative value
Yes
None
RM
Set sensor range
Yes
ML243xA ranges
RV
Read SRE
Yes
None
SM
Status output
Yes
As much as has
meaning for
ML243xA. Set to 0 if
not used
ST
Store setup
Yes
Limited to 10 stores
TR0
GPIB trigger hold
Yes
None
TR1
Immediate trigger
Yes
None
TR2
Settled trigger
Yes
None
TR3
Trigger hold off
Yes
None
@1
Status mask
Yes
None
?ID
Return ID string
Yes
None
Note
C-22
The Factory cal factor table can be read by sending an ‘F’ instead of the table
number. The HP438 emulation mode supports the HP437 cal factor table
commands on the ML243xA. This allows the cal factor tables to updated or read
since the ML243xA supports cal factor tables.
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
Appendix D — Connector Care and
Handling
Follow the precautions listed below when handling or connecting cables. Complying with
these precautions will guarantee longer component life and less equipment down time due to
connector or device failure.
D-1
Pin Depth Mating Connectors
Destructive pin depth of mating connectors is the major cause of failure in the field. When an
RF component is mated with a connector having a destructive pin depth, damage will usually
occur to the RF component connector. A destructive pin depth is one that is too long in respect
to the reference plane of the connector (see figure below).
Figure D-1.
N Connector Pin Depth Definition
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
D-1
Torquing Connectors
The center pin of a precision RF component connector has a precision tolerance. The mating
connectors of various RF components may not be precision types. Consequently, the center
pins of these devices may not have the proper pin depth. The pin depth of EUT connectors
should be measured to assure compatibility before attempting to mate them with Power
Sensor connectors. An Anritsu Pin Depth Gauge or equivalent can be used for this purpose.
Figure D-2.
Pin Depth Gauge
If the measured connector is out of tolerance in the "+" region, the center pin is too long (see
Allowable EUT connector pin depth table below). Mating under this condition will likely
damage the precision RF component connector. If the test device connector measures out of
tolerance in the "-" region, the center pin is too short. This should not cause damage, but it
will result in a poor connection and a consequent degradation in performance.
Anritsu Gauging Set
EUT Connector Type Model
Pin Depth (inches)
Pin Depth Gauge
Reading
N - Male
207 -0.000
207 +0.000
01-163
N - Female
+0.030
-0.030
WSMA - Male
WSMA - Female
01-162
-0.000
3.5 mm - Male
Same as pin depth
-0.010
3.5 mm - Female
D-2
Torquing Connectors
Over torquing connectors is destructive; it may damage the connector center pin. Finger-tight
is usually sufficient for Type N connectors. Always use a connector torque wrench (8 lbf-in)
when tightening WSMA, K or V type connectors. Never use pliers to tighten connectors.
D-3
Mechanical Shock
Precision connectors are designed to withstand years of normal bench handling. However, do
not drop or otherwise treat them roughly. Mechanical shock will significantly reduce their
service life.
D-2
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
Cleaning Connectors
D-4
Cleaning Connectors
The precise geometry that makes possible the RF component's high performance can easily be
disturbed by dirt and other contamination adhering to the connector interfaces. When not in
use, keep the connectors covered.
To clean the connector interfaces, use a clean cotton swab that has been dampened with
isopropyl alcohol.
Note
Most cotton swabs are too large to fit in the smaller connector types. In these
cases, it is necessary to peel off most of the cotton and then twist the remaining
cotton tight. Be sure that the remaining cotton does not get stuck in the connector.
Cotton swabs of the appropriate size can be purchased through a medical
laboratory-type supply center.
The following are some important tips on cleaning connectors:
• Use only isopropyl alcohol as a cleaning solvent.
• Do not use excessive amounts of alcohol as prolonged drying of the connector may be
required.
• Never put lateral pressure on the center pin of the connector.
• If installed, do not disturb the Teflon washer on the center conductor pin.
• Verify that no cotton or other foreign material remains in the connector after cleaning.
• If available, use compressed air to remove foreign particles and to dry the connector.
• After cleaning, verify that the center pin has not been bent or damaged.
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
D-3
Cleaning Connectors
D-4
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
Numerics to S
Index
Numerics
M
488.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
488.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
command format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
A
accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
advanced triggering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
B
battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-2
2-3
2-3
2-3
manual
associated documents . . . . . . . . . .
scope of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
memory types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
model types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
modulated carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
N
non-volatile RAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
O
optimising measurements . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
C
P
channel menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
channels
using both . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
connector care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
CW power measurements . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
D
data I/O formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
default settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3
power measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
power requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
power versus time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27
power-on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
printer connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
profile operation mode . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
programming examples . . . . . . . . . . 8-132
pulse signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17, 7-19
Q
query commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
E
environmental requirements . . . . . . . . 2-2
error codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-12
error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-10
F
front panel connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
front panel controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
R
rack mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
rear panel connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
remote commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
remote operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
remote reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
RS232 modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
G
gain compression measurement . . . . 7-15
GPIB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
quick reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
GPIB PC card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
GSM-TDMA bursts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-23
I
identification number . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
instrument shipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
instrument storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
1-1
1-1
3-1
1-1
7-8
1-1
2-1
2-5
2-5
S
sensor
calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
zero/cal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
zeroing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
sensor menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
using two . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
serial remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
shipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
Index-1
T to Z
software loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
source sweep mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
system defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3
system menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
trigger menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
triggered measurements . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
triggering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
U
user cal factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
Z
zeroing sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
T
technical support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
Index-2
PN: 10585-00001 Rev. P
ML2437A/38A OM/PM
Anritsu utilizes recycled paper and environmentally conscious inks and toner.
Anritsu Company
490 Jarvis Drive
Morgan Hill, CA 95037-2809
USA
http://www.anritsu.com